Agfa CR35-CR25 Serice Manual

ReadMeFirst
Service Manual for Download
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services
Purpose of this Document

This document describes how to
add the order list for documentation.
print.
add comments.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
compared to previous Version 1.1
1.2
06-2008
Added how to integrate the order list for documentation in a

printed manual. See section 1.
Edition 1, Revision 2
06-2008 printed in Germany
Agfa Company Confidential
Document Node ID: 16099429
Copyright 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
ReadMeFirst
Integrating the Order List for Documentation

IMPORTANT:
The order list for documentation is not part of the service manual for download.
Purpose of the order list for documentation:
To verify the latest level and completeness of your Service Manual.
(1) In the MEDNET GSO library select the product of your interest.
(2) Select Order list and Front page PRODUCT - Chapter 00 - Order List for
Documentation.
(3) Download the order list for documentation to your computer.
(4) When creating a paper manual:
Print the order list and put it behind the cover sheet.
Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual
IMPORTANT:
Preferably print this manual double-sided:
This PDF manual contains empty pages at the end of several chapters, to have the
next chapter starting with an uneven page number when printed doubles-sided.
If printed one-sided, dispose these empty pages.
Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3 or ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if
available.
Some pages especially circuit diagrams for equipment have been created on paper
size larger than DIN A4/Letter. Printing these pages on DIN A4/Letter may result in
reduced legibility. It is recommended to print these pages separately on a DIN A3 or
ANSI B (Ledger) printer.
DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
06-2008
Page 2 of 5
ReadMeFirst
2.1
Printing single Pages or Chapters

To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows:
(1)
Click the bookmark of the desired chapter.
(2)
Write down or remember the shown PDF page number. See Figure 1.
Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar

(3)
Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.
(4)
Select "Print".
(5)
Select the page range.
(6)
Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".
(7)
Select OK.
Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters

06-2008
Page 3 of 5
ReadMeFirst
NOTE:
Shrink to printable area may be named on other Adobe Reader versions
reduce to printer margins or shrink oversized pages to paper size.
2.2
Printing the complete Service Manual

To print the complete service manual proceed as follows:
(1)
Select "Print".
(2)
Select All.
(3)
Select "shrink to printable area" and "Auto-rotate and Center"

(see NOTE above).
(4)
Select OK.
Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual
Adding Comments
If you open this file in an Adobe Reader version 7, the comment toolbar will
show-up.
This allows adding comments, to highlight or underline text and many more text
manipulations.
Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar

06-2008
Page 4 of 5
ReadMeFirst
3.1
Exporting your Comments

NOTE:
Exporting your comments allows importing them again in a next version of the manual.
(1)
In the drop down menu Comment & Markup select "Show comments List".
Figure 5: Drop down menu Comment & Markup
3.2
(2)
Select the desired comments: Press the CTRL-key for multiple selections.
(3)
Select Options - Export Selected Comments.
(4)
Save the file with any name.
Importing Comments
(1)
In the drop down menu Comment & Markup select "Show comments List".
(2)
Select Options - Import Comments.
(3)
Browse for the comments file and press select.
NOTE:
The imported comments possibly appear on different pages, if the file where the
comments have been imported has a different number of pages.

06-2008
Page 5 of 5
HEALTHCARE
Service Manual
Imaging Services
Document No: DD+DIS219.06E
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN 6000)
2nd Edition
CR 35-X
CR 25.0
Type 5158 / 100
Type 5156 / 105

(as of SN 6000)
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.


eq_00_about manual_e_template_v02
Copyright 2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
DD+DIS219.06E
About this Manual
Manufacturer
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstrae 161
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.
INSTRUCTION:
(1)
Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document

(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2)
Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.

01-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 0 / 2
DD+DIS219.06E
About this Manual
Purpose of this document

This document provides information on the structure and contents of the
Service Manual.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.0
12-2006
compared to previous Edition 1:
Only layout changes as CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105

(as of SN 6000) is also integrated in this
Service Documentation, DD+DIS219.06E.

01-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 0 / 3
DD+DIS219.06E
About this Manual
Chapter Overview
Chapter
0
Order List
Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures
Functional Description
Repair and Service

3.1
Machine specific Safety and Repair Information
3.2
Machine specific Tools, Software Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
3.3
Troubleshooting
3.4
Electrical and Mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs
3.5
Replacement of Parts
3.6
Adjustments and Calibrations
3.7
Software Menus and Setting
3.8
Software Releases, Patches
3.9
FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions
Reference and Circuit Diagrams
Spare Parts List
Accessories
Field Modifications
Manufacturing Standard Modifications
Maintenance
10
Service Bulletins
11
Installation Planning
12
Glossary

01-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 0 / 4
DD+DIS219.06E
About this Manual
Explanation of notes
This documentation uses:

Safety relevant notes
Icon
Signal Word
Situation
CAUTION:
Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the

equipment described in the manual and/or damage to any other
equipment or goods and/or environmental pollution can be the
consequence.
WARNING:
Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a user, engineer,

patient or any other person and possible mistreatment of patients
can be the consequence.
DANGER:
Direct, immediate danger: Death or serious injuries can be the

consequence.
Not-safety relevant notes

Icon
Name
Type of Information
INSTRUCTION:
Indicates an instruction where it is important to follow literally the

described actions.
IMPORTANT:
Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to

prevent malfunction.
NOTE:
Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action without

having a direct influence on the step or action.
Highlights unusual points
Indicates background information
Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the graphical user
interface.
Conventions
Actions
Way of writing
Sample
Action,
explanation
Switch the machine on
Switch the machine on
Action with the mouse or the

"Return" key
<omni-cd.exe>
Double-click the
<omni-cd.exe> icon
Required text input via the

keyboard
vips
Enter vips and click on

<Continue>

01-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 0 / 5
DD+DIS219.06E
About this Manual
About this Manual

2nd Edition CR 35-X Type 5158/100 / CR 25.0 Type 5156/105
Service Documentation (DD+DIS219.06E)
IMPORTANT:
The 2nd Edition of the Service Documentation for
CR 35-X Type 5158/100 and CR 25.0 Type 5156/105 , DD+DIS219.06E is valid for:
CR 35-X Type 5158/100 and for
CR 25.0 Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Explanation:
The improved detector unit (light guide and photomultiplier) from CR 35-X is
integrated in CR 25.0 and hence the new subtype CR 25.0 Type 5156/105 has been
created.
The improvement is not available for CR 25.0 type 5156/100.
The Digitizer CR 25.0 Type 5156/105 has been introduced in production and can be
distinguished from CR 25.0 Type 5156/100 by the type label:
Type: 5156/105
Serial Number SN: 6000
Note that this Service Documentation is not valid for the other type of CR 25.0 as:
CR 25.0 Type 5156/100
For the CR 25.0 Type 5156/100 only the CR 25.0 Service Documentation,
DD+DIS071.04E is valid.
Reason
for the
nd
Edition
The 2nd Edition of this Documentation has been released due to the fact that the
former CR 35-X Service Documentation from now on is also valid for the
CR 25.0 Type 5156/105.
Only the layout of the Service Documentation and product specific safety notes have
been adapted. No changes of the content have been made.

01-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 0 / 6
DD+DIS219.06E
Product
Description
About this Manual
The CR 35-X Type 5158/100 (CR 25.0 Type 5156/105) digitizer is the
follow-up model of the CR 25.0 Type 5156/100 digitizer.
It has been designed for General Radiology environments and, particularly, for the
CR Mammography Solution.
Main changes between CR 25.0 Type 5156/100 and
CR 35-X Type 5158/100 (CR 25.0 Type 5156/105) are:
Acrylic light guide with glued PMT (PhotoMultiplier Tube) is used instead of
optical fibers.
Download
from
MedNet
Features of
the Digitizer
This Service Documentation is available on the MedNet GSO Library.

Path: Computed Radiography /CR Digitizers / CR 35-X
The CR 35-X Type 5158/100 (CR 25.0 Type 5156/105) scans the exposed CR
image plate, converts the information into digital data and automatically transfers the
image to the image processing station for further processing and visualization.
The digitizer requires but little manual interaction. All you have to do, after exposure
and identification of the cassette, is to insert it into the digitizer.
The digitizer takes in the cassette, reads the demographic data and routing
information from the memory chip in the cassette, opens the cassette, removes the
image plate and scans the latent image by means of a deflected laser beam.
Once the image is digitized, the cassette is returned to the cassette slot.
Depending on the X-ray intensity which has affected the phosphor during the
exposure, more or less light will be emitted during laser scanning. The light is
converted into an electrical signal. This signal is then converted into a digital bit
stream.
Once converted into digital form, the digitized image is transferred to the image
processing station for further processing and visualization.

01-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 0 / 7
DD+DIS219.06E
Further
Features of
the Digitzer
About this Manual
Further features of the CR 35-X Type 5158/100 (CR 25.0 Type 5156/105) include:
The digitizer permits assigning the status emergency to an image. An emergency
image will be given priority by the image processing station if the Emergency key
is pressed before inserting an unidentified cassette.
The digitizer permits re-erasing an image plate before re-using it. In specific cases,
this is necessary to prevent ghost images caused by previous exposures or stray
radiation from interfering with the image of interest.
If the digitizer is dedicated to one ID Station, additional features are available:
Intended
Use of the
digitizer
quickly identifying cassettes without the need for an ID Tablet
reading the identification data of a cassette
initializing a cassette, i.e. changing the image plate type
This CR 35-X Type 5158/100 (CR 25.0 Type 5156/105) must only be used to scan
exposed X-ray cassettes, containing an erasable image plate (IP).
This device is part of a system, consisting of X-ray cassettes with erasable phosphor
image plates, an identification station for the cassettes and a workstation where the
resulting digital image information is further processed and routed.
It is intended that this device is only operated in a radiological environment by
qualified staff.

01-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 0 / 8

All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
Published by
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert NV
HEALTHCARE
Generic Safety Directions
Imaging Services
Safety Directions
for HealthCare Imaging Products

This Generic Safety Directions document comprises the general safety relevant
information for the Service Engineer.
It is valid for all Agfa HealthCare Imaging Products and part of each
Service Documentation as well as Installation Planning document.
The latest version is available via
MEDNET => GSO Library => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual
Document History
Edition.
Revision
1.2
04-2007
Release
Date
Changes
compared to previous Revision 1.1
04-2007
Editorial rework to improve comprehensibility
Referenced Documents
Document
Title
n.a.
n.a.
printed in Germany
Enclosure_e_template_v02
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
Read this document prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the
equipment.
Strictly observe all safety directions within this document and on the product.

04-2007
Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products

Page 3
Document number: DD+DIS238.06E
List of Contents
LIST OF CONTENTS
DISCLAIMER .........................................................................................................6
USED ICONS.........................................................................................................7
LABELS..................................................................................................................8
3.1
CE Mark ...................................................................................................8
3.2
System Labels..........................................................................................8
3.3
System Labels concerning Laser Radiation.............................................9
PRODUCT COMPLAINTS ...................................................................................10
REFERENCES.....................................................................................................10
INTENDED USE ..................................................................................................11
INTENDED USER................................................................................................11
QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS ..........................11
CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT.........................................................12
10
ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................13
11
COMPLIANCE .....................................................................................................14
12
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION .........................................................16
13
RADIATION PROTECTION .................................................................................17
14
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION .........................17
15
GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ........................17
16
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES .............18
17
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES ................................20
18
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES.........21
19
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES..........................23
20
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

PARTS, ACCESSORIES AND DEVICES............................................................23
04-2007

Page 4
List of Contents
21
SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS ................................ 24
22
SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ................. 24
23
WASTE DISPOSAL ............................................................................................. 24
24
RECYCLING........................................................................................................ 25
25
ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI)................................... 25

04-2007

Page 5
Disclaimer
Disclaimer
The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified
personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates or who are
otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide such services.
Fitters, engineers and other persons who are not employed by or otherwise directly
affiliated with or authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates are directed to
contact one of the local offices of Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates before attempting
installation or service procedures.
No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, adapted or transmitted in any form
or by any means without the written permission of Agfa HealthCare.
Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with
respect to the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of the information contained in this
document and specifically disclaims warranties of suitability for any particular purpose.
Agfa HealthCare shall under no circumstances be liable for any damage arising from the
use or inability to use any information, apparatus, method or process disclosed in this
document.
Agfa HealthCare is not liable for resulting consequences, damages or injuries if you dont
operate the product correctly or if you dont have it serviced correctly.
Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to change the product, the characteristics and its
documentation without further notice to improve reliability, function or design.
NOTE:
In the United States, Federal Law stipulates that medical devices should only be sold to,
distributed and used by or by order of a licensed physician.

04-2007

Page 6
Used Icons
Used Icons
Icon
Name and Circumstances

CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or
damage to the equipment described in the manual and/or
damage to any other equipment or goods and/or environmental
pollution can be the consequence
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a
user, engineer, patient or any other person and possible
mistreatment of patients can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or heavy injuries
can be the consequence.
INSTRUCTION:
If used in combination with the warning or caution sign: Indicates
a specific instruction, which if followed exactly, avoids the
subject of the warning or caution.
If used without warning or caution sign: Indicates an instruction
where it is important to follow literally as described.
IMPORTANT:
Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to
prevent malfunction.
NOTE:
Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action
Highlights unusual points
Indicates background information
Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the
graphical user interface.
Is additional information without influence on the action or step!

04-2007

Page 7
Labels
Labels
3.1
CE Mark
CE Mark
3.2
This product carries the CE Mark. The CE Declaration (CE Conformity)

becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the
manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
System Labels
All system labels and software version number locations are referred to within this service
document in the appropriate section.
Enclosed an overview of common labels, according to ISO 3864.
This list is not complete.
Hot Surface
Obstacles
Laser Beam
Corrosive Liquid
Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation
High Voltage
Hand Injuries
C&W_005.cdr

04-2007

Page 8
Labels
3.3
System Labels concerning Laser Radiation

According to its classification, laser radiation can lead to eye and skin injuries. Each laser
source is classified from class 1 to class 4.
The table below lists the meaning of the different laser classes. Note the detailed
instructions in the user manual and technical documentation.
Class 1:
Not dangerous to the human eye.
Class 2:
Laser units having a maximum output of 1 mW. The accessible laser

radiation only lies within the visible range of the spectrum (400 nm to
700 nm). With brief exposure times (up to 0.25 s) there is no danger
due to the blink reflex.
Class 3A:
Laser units having a maximum output of 5 mW. The accessible laser

radiation becomes dangerous for the eye, if the cross section of
radiation is reduced by optical instruments. If this is not the case, the
emitted laser radiation in the visible region of the spectrum, with short
exposure times (up to 0.25 s), is not dangerous in the spectral
regions, even for long irradiation times.
Proper use must be observed.
Required safety equipment must be used.
Class 3B:
Laser units having a maximum output of 500 mW. Dangerous to the

human eye and in particular cases to the skin.
Class 4:
Laser units having a higher output than 500 mW. Extremely

dangerous to the human eye and dangerous to the human skin.
Manufacturer AGFA GEVAERT N.V.

GIUM
Septestraat 27-2640 -Mortsel-BEL
1011 Date: 20 06-07
Type 5175/100 S/N
50-60Hz
100-12 0/220-240V 2.0/1.0A
Made in Germany
Pe issenberg
July 2 006
Figure 1: Example for Laser Classification

04-2007

Page 9
Product Complaints - References
Product Complaints
Any service person who has any complaints or has experienced any dissatisfaction in the
quality, durability, reliability, safety, effectiveness or performance of this product must
notify Agfa HealthCare by the Agfa HealthCare complaint procedure.
If the product malfunctions and may have caused or contributed to a serious injury of a
patient or an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause an accident Agfa
HealthCare must be notified immediately by telephone, fax or written correspondence to
the following address:
Agfa Service Support - local support addresses and phone numbers listed on:
www.agfa.com
Agfa
Septestraat 27
2640 Mortsel, Belgium.
Fax +32 3 444 7094
References
Technical Documentation is available via MedNet (PDF) and your local Agfa HealthCare
support organisation (Paper).
Access to MedNet:
IntraNet: http://docs.agfanet/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf
ExtraNet: http://extranet.agfa.com/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf

04-2007

Page 10
Intended Use - Intended Users - Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks
Intended Use
This Agfa HealthCare product should only be operated in a hospital or clinical radiological
environment by qualified staff.
It must only be operated according to its specifications and its intended use. Any
operation not corresponding to the specifications or intended use may result in hazards,
which in turn may lead to serious injuries or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks).
AGFA will not assume any liability whatsoever in these cases.
Make sure that the product is constantly monitored in order to avoid inappropriate
handling, especially by children.
The product must only be installed and put into operation under the specified conditions.
Intended User
This manual is written for Agfa trained Field Service engineers and Clinical Application
Specialists, trained users of Agfa HealthCare products and trained diagnostic XRay
clinical personnel who have received proper training. Users are considered as the persons
who handle the equipment as well as the persons having authority over the equipment.
Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks

This Technical Documentation describes adjustments and routines which must only to be
performed by qualified technical personnel.
The Agfa (trained) Field Service engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must have
received adequate Agfa HealthCare training on the safe and effective use of the product
before attempting to work with it. Training requirements may vary from country to country.
Agfa (trained) Field Service engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must make sure
that training is received in accordance with local laws or regulations that have the force of
law.
Your local Agfa HealthCare representative can provide further information on training.

04-2007

Page 11
Connections to other Equipment
Connections to other Equipment

Agfa HealthCare equipment must only be used in combination with other Agfa HealthCare
equipment or components if these are expressly recognized by Agfa HealthCare as
compatible. A list of such equipment and components is available from Agfa HealthCare
service on request.
Changes or additions to the equipment must only be carried out by persons authorized to
do so by Agfa HealthCare. Such changes must comply with best engineering practice and
all applicable laws and regulations that have the force of law within the jurisdiction of the
hospital.
The Agfa HealthCare products are designed to communicate with other devices in the
hospital network using DICOM protocols.
Connections to other equipment:

Warning:
Accessory equipment not complying with the safety requirements of this product
may lead to a safety hazard.
INSTRUCTION:
Consult the Technical Documentation before making any connections to other
equipment.
Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include:
Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity

Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has been
performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-1
harmonized national standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard
IEC 60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system Configurer and is
responsible for complying with the systems standard.
If required, contact your local service organization.

04-2007

Page 12
Accessories and Spare Parts
10
Accessories and Spare Parts
Parts and accessories replacement:

WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation.
INSTRUCTION:
Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of compatible
accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or www.agfa.com

04-2007

Page 13
Compliance
11
Compliance
Directive for HealthCare Imaging Products:
Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning medical devices
(OJ No L 169/1 of 1993-07-12)
ANNEX I - ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The

products are designed and manufactured in such a way that, when used under the
conditions and for the purposes intended and, where applicable, by virtue of the
technical knowledge, experience, education or training of intended users, they will not
compromise the clinical condition or the safety of patients, or the safety and health of
users.
ANNEX II - EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Full quality assurance system ISO

13485
ANNEX X - CLINICAL EVALUATION The clinical evaluation follows a defined and

methodologically sound procedure.
Applied Standards for HealthCare Imaging Products

IEC 60601-1, Ed. 3: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic
safety and essential performance
ISO 14971:2000, Medical devices Application of risk management to medical devices
IEC 60601-1-2 It specifies the MANUFACTURER of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME
SYSTEM provides information to the RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION that is essential in
determining the suitability of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM for the electromagnetic
environment of use, and in managing the electromagnetic environment of use to permit
the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM to maintain BASIC SAFETY and provide its
ESSENTIAL PERFORMANCE without disturbing other equipment.

04-2007

Page 14
Compliance
Additional standards for documentation:

IEC 62079 Ed. 1: Preparation of instructions - Structuring, content and presentation
Harmonization:
Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/
This document has been prepared to comply with Study Group 1 guidance document
of the Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/ to assist development
of a consistent, harmonized definition for a medical device that could be used within a
global regulatory model and would offer significant benefits to the manufacturer, user,
patient or consumer, and to Regulatory Authorities and support global convergence of
regulatory systems.
IECEE CB SCHEME
The IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme is the world's first truly international system
for acceptance of test reports dealing with the safety of electrical and electronic products.
It is a multilateral agreement among participating countries and certification organizations.
Agfa has produced a CB test report and claims national certification in all other member
countries of the CB Scheme.
Details see www.iecee.org
Radiation of radio frequency:

CAUTION: For USA only:
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the service manual, may cause interference
to radio communication.
Note:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial
environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference.
The user will be required to take all necessary measures to correct the interference at
his own expense.

04-2007

Page 15
Safety Directions for Operation
12
Safety Directions for Operation

Accessibility of the mains power switch:
CAUTION:
Do not obstruct the mains power switch.
Position the Agfa HealthCare product so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power
connection.
Under certain conditions the Agfa HealthCare product will show a display containing a
message. This message will show that either a problem or action has occurred or that
a requested action is required or cannot be performed. The user must read these
messages carefully they will provide information on what to do. This will be either
performing an action to resolve the problem or to contact the Agfa HealthCare service
organization. Details on the contents of messages can be found in this Technical
Documentation.
All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which could be
confused with diagnostic t information. If there is any doubt that the diagnostic
information could be corrupted, Additional investigations must be performed to get
clear diagnostic information.
Ventilation openings must not be covered.
If you notice conspicuous noise or smoke, disconnect the product immediately from
the mains.
Do not pour water or any other liquid over the device.
If a system malfunction causes an emergency situation involving the patient, operating
personnel or any system component, activate the emergency stop for the system
concerned. All motor driven system movements will be stopped.
Do not store any magnetic media near or on devices, which produce magnetic fields,
since stored data may be lost.
Explosive environment:
DANGER:
Risk of explosion.
Never operate this device in zones where there are flammable anesthetics or oxygen
which may cause an explosion.
Usage of an un-interruptible power supply:
Warning:
Images can be lost due to power failure.
Connect the equipment to an un-interruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional
standby generator.

04-2007

Page 16
Radiation Protection - Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection General Safety Directions for Service Activities
13
Radiation Protection
Only qualified and authorized personnel shall operate any X-Ray system. In this context
qualified means those legally permitted to operate this X-Ray equipment in the
jurisdiction in which the X-Ray equipment is being used, and authorized means those
authorized by the authority controlling the use of the X-Ray equipment. Full use must be
made of all radiation protection features, devices, systems, procedures and accessories.
14
Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection
15
Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is
applied, the required protective measures must be complied with.
Details about cleaning and disinfection or sterilization methods that may be used on
SYSTEM parts or ACCESSORIES that can become contaminated through contact
with the PATIENT or with body fluids, are referred to within the individual service
documents.
Disconnect the power supply from the equipment prior to cleaning the equipment.
General Safety Directions for Service Activities
This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician
Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
The safety directions for operation (see section 12) are also valid for all service
activities.
During all service activities observe prescribed local and country-specific
requirements (e.g. occupational safety and accident prevention regulations).
All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not
be overstressed when tightening. There must always be compliance with stated
torque values!
Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with the same screw types that
have the specified hardness rating. Unless a different value is listed in the
instructions, all Allen screws used must be hardness rated 8.8.
All screws must be secured in accordance with the corresponding data.
If "Loctite" has to be used to secure screws, this is stated in the text.
Any Agfa service PC or tool which is to be connected via RS232 ,RJ45, USB or other
interface to an Agfa device must not be connected to the mains but must be operated
on its internal battery or indirect supply (low voltage).

04-2007

Page 17
General Safety Directions for Service Activities Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must be
observed:
o Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before you disconnect
or connect cables on printed circuit boards.
o When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never touch any
parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers.
o PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry a PCB
without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering (electrostatic
charge).
o Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected from
electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.
Static discharge at electrical components:

CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this strap on a
grounded conducting metal piece.
16
Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
Accessibility of the power disconnection device:

Warning:
Electrical device. Shock possible.
INSTRUCTION:
Do not position Agfa EQUIPMENT so it is difficult to operate the disconnection

device when an APPLIANCE COUPLER or separable plug is used as isolation.
Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies and
voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or their
engineers.

04-2007

Page 18
Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
The device complies with the EN 60601-1, 2006 standard for Information Technology.
This means that, although it is absolutely safe, patients may not come in direct contact
with the equipment. Therefore the operator console must be placed outside a radius
of 1.5 m around the patient.
R = 1.5m
1.5m
1.5m
Patient environment
This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g. a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Fixing equipment at the wall or floor:

Warning:
Unknown composition of wall or floor structure: Risk of injury or damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.
Floor load:
CAUTION:
Heavy device may damage the floor covering.
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device.
Fixing equipment at the ceiling:

CAUTION:
Ceiling construction may be inadequate for fixing of equipment: Risk of injury or
damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.

04-2007

Page 19
Safety Directions for Installation Activities
17
Safety Directions for Installation Activities
If not otherwise stated, installation and configuration is performed by Agfa HealthCare

trained personnel.
If damage of the package is visible from the outside contact your local AGFA
representative.
Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g. safety boots and gloves, care
must be taken that heavy loads are correctly lifted/carried to avoid injury. The relevant
instructions must be complied with. Heavy or awkward loads must be moved by
mechanical means or by several people.
When installing the product be sure that there is either a mains plug or an all-cable
disconnecting device in the internal installation fitted near the product and that it is
easily accessible.
Defective covers, sharp edges or protruding parts of equipment can cause injuries, if
accidentally knocked into. Route cables and position equipment safely.
This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g., a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Connection of the device to the power supply:

CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the device by using the wrong power supply:
INSTRUCTION:
Prior to connecting the device to the mains ...
Compare the power requirements indicated on the type label with the available
power supply in the installation room.
Check the service manual for the type of input voltage selection, manual or
automatic: If manual, select the appropriate voltage and fuses.
Confirm to use the correct socket and plug for the required power supply.
Check the equipment will work with the power supply available.

04-2007

Page 20
Safety Directions for Installation Activities Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities
Ground potential differences :

CAUTION:
To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
connected to the same power source.
INSTRUCTION:
18
Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power Source
as the PC.
When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical

environments a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in
different localities. If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can cause a
HAZARD for the OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities
This Technical Documentation identifies the parts on which preventive inspection and
maintenance shall be performed by Agfa HealthCare service personnel, including the
periods to be applied.
In general the device has to be switched off during service activities. Exception: If the
device is switched on to perform tests pay particular attention to any hazards due to
moving and rotating parts. Avoid lose clothing or finger traps. Switch off the device
immediately after the tests.
Do not turn motors manually. If required, first disconnect the motor from the motor
control board.
Make sure that the power cord does not show any signs of damage.
After repair work always check that the integrated safety features are not overridden
or disconnected.
If there is any visible damage to the machine casing do not hand-over the product to
the customer. First repair the machine casing.
Cleaning optical elements:
CAUTION:
Image artifacts possible after cleaning optical elements.
When cleaning optical elements follow the service manual precisely.

04-2007

Page 21
Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities
Secured screws:
CAUTION:
Opening screws secured by red lacquer may misalign important device
adjustments:
Do not open screws that are secured by red lacquer.
Sharp edges:
CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the device: Cut or abrasion possible.
Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts.
Replacing batteries:
WARNING:
Battery can explode, causing chemical burns.
INSTRUCTION:
Check that batteries are inserted with correct polarity.
Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by the
manufacturer.
Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the

manufacturer.
Checking ground connections:

WARNING:
Improper ground connection of the device metal housing may lead to electric
shocks.
In case of power supply replacements or maintenance check the protective earth

resistance according to the national regulations.
Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers are present

04-2007

Page 22
Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts, Accessories and Devices
Opening PCs and Workstations:

Warning:
Electrical shock and damage to the equipment possible.
Only open the PC or workstation if explicitly stated in the service manual.
Unplug before opening.
Observe anti-static safety regulations.
Replacing fuses:
Warning:
Replacing fuses by wrong type may lead to fire hazard!
Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated in the service manual or on
the device.
19
Safety Directions for remote Service Activities

Remote Service Activities:
Warning:
During remote service activities images can be lost.
Inform the customer prior to remote service activities to finish the current work and to
stop working on the system.
20
Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts,

Accessories and Devices
In compliance with transport regulations, all uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)

must be shipped with batteries disconnected.
Use the original packing when returning spare parts, accessories or devices.

04-2007

Page 23
Safety Directions concerning Modifications Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials - Waste Disposal
21
Safety Directions concerning Modifications

Modifications made in products/systems shipped by Agfa HealthCare must not be
implemented without written permission from Agfa HealthCare.
This applies in particular to changes which may affect the mechanical and/or electrical
safety or radiation-protection properties of a product (e.g. changing of safety distances,
removal of locks/instructions etc.).
22
Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials

'Hazardous materials' is the designation for substances which can ignite or explode or
which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. The Hazardous Material
instructions must be read and the required protective measures must be complied with
when performing work to avoid health risks.
Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with them
are identified clearly by symbols and described by the instructions appertaining to the
hazardous substances.
23
Waste Disposal
The Directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE), which
entered into force as European law on 13th February 2003, resulted in a major
change in the treatment of electrical equipment at end-of-life.
The purpose of this Directive is, as a first priority, the prevention of WEEE, and in
addition, to promote the reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of such wastes so as
to reduce the disposal of waste.
The WEEE logo on the product or on its box indicates that this product must not be
disposed of or dumped with household waste. The owner of the equipment is liable to
dispose of all electronic or electrical waste equipment by delivering to the specified
collection point for recycling of such hazardous waste, collection and proper recovery of
electronic and electrical waste equipment at the time of disposal will allow the producer to
help conserve natural resources.
Recycling of the electronic and electrical waste equipment will ensure safety of human
health and the environment. For more information about electronic and electrical waste
equipment disposal, recovery and collection points, please contact your local, waste
disposal service or producer / distributor of this equipment.
If your equipment or replaced spare parts contain batteries or accumulators please
dispose of these separately according to local regulations.

04-2007

Page 24
Recycling - Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)
24
Recycling
Recycling pass see http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf
25
Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)

AGFA HealthCare Field Service Personnel or its authorized affiliates are responsible for
the removal of Protected Health Information (PHI) patient data from devices, modules or
parts that are removed from the customers site. This also applies to the exchange of
spare parts, especially to parts that are returned to central warehouses for repair or
refurbishing. Examples for parts or modules that may contain Protected Health
Information (PHI) are: Computer hard disks, CD-ROMS, backup tapes, archive tapes.

04-2007

Page 25

Published by
Agfa HealthCare N.V.
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.
printed in Germany
Chapter 1
HEALTHCARE
Controls, Connections,
and Setup Procedures
Imaging Services
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN 6000)

This document contains:
all important routines to be carried out prior to putting the machine in operation
location and function of the controls and connectors of the machine
all routines necessary to put an unpacked machine in operation
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
compared to previous version 2.0
2.1
02-2007
Updated section Removing the Shipping Brackets

See section 2.4, pages 7-8.
Document
Title
n.a.
n.a.



eq_01_setup_procedure_e_template_v02
DD+DIS219.06E
Controls, Connections, and Setup Procedures
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and
on the product.

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 2
DD+DIS219.06E
LIST OF CONTENTS
INTENDED USE OF CR 35-X ..................................................................................................4
PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION ...........................................................................5

2.1
Inspection of Packing................................................................................................................5
2.2
Unpacking the Components......................................................................................................6
2.3
Checking the Scope of Delivery................................................................................................6
2.4
Removing the Shipping Brackets..............................................................................................7
OPERATION TERMINAL .......................................................................................................10
PREPARATIONS FOR THE INSTALLATION ........................................................................11
4.1
Preconditions ..........................................................................................................................11
4.2
Required Service Programs....................................................................................................11
4.2.1
CCM-Tool................................................................................................................................11
4.2.2
Error Message Program..........................................................................................................12
4.3
Preparations for the Installation ..............................................................................................12
INSTALLATION OF DIGITIZER .............................................................................................13

5.1
Electric Connection .................................................................................................................13
5.1.1
Connecting the Mains Cable...................................................................................................14
5.2
Start-up ...................................................................................................................................14
5.2.1
Installation without CRUS .......................................................................................................15
5.2.2
Installation with CRUS ............................................................................................................16
5.3
System Integration ..................................................................................................................16
5.4
Make a Backup of machine-specific Data...............................................................................16
CONCLUDING THE INSTALLATION.....................................................................................17

6.1
Checking the Technical Image Quality ...................................................................................17
6.1.1
Exposure of a Flatfield ............................................................................................................17
6.1.2
Evaluation of a Flatfield...........................................................................................................19
6.2
Last Steps ...............................................................................................................................20
INSTALLATION OF OTHER CR COMPONENTS..................................................................20
CHECKLIST FOR INSTALLATION / MACHINE START-UP..................................................21

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 3
DD+DIS219.06E
NOTE:
The Installation Checklist in section 8 of this chapter gives an overview of all steps and
guides through the complete installation process.
Intended Use of CR 35-X

The CR 35-X must only be used to scan exposed X-ray cassettes, containing an
erasable image plate (IP). This device is part of a system, consisting of X-ray cassettes
with erasable phosphor image plates, an identification station for the cassettes and a
workstation where the resulting digital image information is further processed and
routed.
It is intended that the CR 35-X is only operated in a radiological environment by
qualified staff.

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 4
DD+DIS219.06E
Preparations before Installation
2.1
Inspection of Packing
The following actions should be taken upon delivery of the system components,
preferably by the customer:
Completeness check of the shipment by means of the packing list (number of

pallets)
Comparison of the labels on the boxes with the customer's order list and the
shipping papers.
Checking of the packing material for visible transport damage such as
dented edges
damage on the box
torn fixing elements (metal straps, screws)
In case of damage visible from the outside turn to your local AGFA
representative.
Checking of the attached safety indicators on the packing boxes.
figure 1
If the machine was tilted, the

arrow head in the circle of the
TILTWATCH changes from white
to red.
If the machine was subjected to shocks, the

square field in the middle of the
SHOCKWATCH changes from white to red.

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 5
DD+DIS219.06E
2.2
Unpacking the Components

The following actions must be taken by the forwarder upon delivery of the system
components.
(1)
Remove the outer packing material.

The individual boxes inside must not be opened by the forwarder.
(2)
Take out the accessories or boxes and take out hooks for the ramp.
(3)
Take the machine off the pallet and transport it to the installation site.
(4)
Dispose the packing material.
NOTE:
For unpacking and lifting the machine off the pallet, an area of minimal 200 cm x 350
cm is required. If the available space at the installation site is limited, the machine can
be unpacked beforehand and rolled to the installation site.
2.3
Checking the Scope of Delivery

The following actions have to be done by the FSE (Field Service Engineer) at the
customer site.
Check the scope of delivery:

Compare the inventory of every component with the packing list which specifies
the complete scope of delivery
Pieces
Description
Digitizer
Installation Instructions
Installation Report
User Manual
Reference Manual
Certificates
Mains Cable (1x US- connector, 1 x Euro-DIN connector)
UTP network cable (2 x RJ45 connection)
floppy disks (3 x Release floppy, 1 x Hard Disk Formatter floppy,

1 x Language floppy, 1 x Backup floppy, 2 x Portex floppy)
Handle
Cu filter

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 6
DD+DIS219.06E
2.4
Removing the Shipping Brackets

Remove all cushioning parts and transport safeguards prior to first operation as
described below in steps 1 11.
figure 2
CAUTION:
Transportation parts can damage the product.
Remove all transportation parts prior to first operation.
(1)
Remove two cable ties and swing metal safeguard forward and remove it.
(2)
Remove cable tie.
(3)
Remove two cable ties and lift the foam strip and remove it.
(4)
Remove two cable ties and lift the foam strip and remove it.
(5)
Swing the foam block aside and remove it.
(6)
Lift and remove the two foam blocks.
(7)
Remove cable tie and turn the metal bar upwards approx. 45 and pull it out.
(8)
Swing out the cPCI-rack and remove the foam part.
NOTE:
The foam part is hidden behind the cPCI-rack and can not be seen from outside!
02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 7
DD+DIS219.06E
(9)
Remove the L-shaped transport safeguard.
(10) Install the handle (which is in scope of delivery) instead.

(11) Remove three cable ties at the Photomultiplier.
(2 cable ties on the left side and 1 cable tie on the right side)
figure 3

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 8
DD+DIS219.06E
Controls and Connections
4
3
2
1
5
6
8
7
5158_reg01_003.cdr
VDE
UL
figure 4
(1)
Line switch Digitizer
(2)
Port (RS 232 25-pin D connector, female D) for the Service PC

(behind the front door)
(3)
Status indicator
(4)
Emergency buttons
(5)
Network connection (unshielded twisted pair)
(6)
Voltage adaptation switch
(7)
Mains cable VDE/UL
(8)
Supplementary grounding cable connection and Potential Equalization

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 9
DD+DIS219.06E
Operation Terminal
5155_reg01_002.cdr
figure 5
Display Functions
The key operator level is intended to be used by the normal operator. He uses the
system only to produce diagnostic usable images without the requirement for special
technical skill or background.
Key
Function
Key
Function
Gives an image the status of

emergency when sending it to
the processing station
Starts erasing images without

scanning them
Provides access to advanced

key-operator functions
Gives access to service level

functions
Exits the service level
Quits the current function, exits a

menu without saving
modifications
Confirms the keyboarded input
Exits from key-operator mode

and service level
Confirms that you have noticed

non-fatal errors
In "LOCKED" condition,
proceeds with the Digitizer
operation
Moves the cursor one position up

to previous edit field
Moves the cursor one position

down to next edit field
Scrolls upwards or increments

digits in a numeric entry field
Scrolls downwards or
decrements digits in a numeric
entry field
Scrolls backwards through

multiple choices within a field
Moves the entry position in a
numerical field in descending
order (from right digit to left digit)
or toggles between values
Scrolls backwards through

multiple choices within a field
Moves the entry position in a
numerical field in ascending
order (from left digit to right
digit) or toggles between values

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 10
DD+DIS219.06E
Preparations for the Installation
4.1
Preconditions
the digitizer is at its installation site
finished pre-installation as described in 4.3
NOTE:
When integrating the digitizer into an existing network, it is necessary to create a
CPF file beforehand (see Chapter 11, Installation Planning, checklist).
With a pure CR Network
(1 Digitizer, 1 Image Processing Station, 1 Preview/ID Station), the shipment
configuration can be used.
4.2
Required Service Programs

The following Software has to be installed on:
4.2.1
your Service PC or
the PC of the ID / Preview -Station.
CCM-Tool
The latest version of the CCM - Tool can be downloaded from MedNet.
The CCM - Tool is needed to create and modify the configuration file (adc.cpf) for the
CR 35-X and the other CR System Components.
IMPORTANT:
Possibility of incorrect software performance.
If there is already a previous version installed on your Service PC, remove the
complete directory as well as the icons.
Installation:
install by executing "setup.exe"
The CCM Tool will be installed in

directory "IMOS" or any directory
of your choice.

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 11
DD+DIS219.06E
4.2.2
Error Message Program

The "SHOW ERROR PROGRAM" with the "ERROR.MSG file" translates the CR 35-X
error codes into clear text.
The "SHOW ERROR PROGRAM" is a part of IMOS, the "ERROR.MSG file" is loaded
in the Digitizer.
4.3
Preparations for the Installation

The following work should be performed before the system components are installed:
Laying of the network cables (Ethernet).
Creation and adaptation of the configuration file adc.cpf, together with the
application specialist.
NOTE:
We recommend, creating and adapting the configuration file adc.cpf, before starting
the installation. This allows you a smooth installation.
For detailed information see CR System Components, DD+DIS198.00E, chapter 6.2.

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 12
DD+DIS219.06E
Installation of Digitizer
5.1
Electric Connection
CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the digitizer by wrong voltage selection.
Prior to first operation check voltage selector at rear side of digitizer.
If the voltage adaption is not correct, take a screw driver and turn the switch to
correct position.
Voltage selector
11_
_reg
5155
Voltage can be adapted to

100 / 120 / 230-240 V.
dr
007 .c
The default setting is 230-240 V
figure 6
NOTE:
If the CR 35-X shall operate at 240 V / 60 Hz use a phase to phase centre tap wall
outlet, otherwise the leakage current will rise over 0.5 mA.

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 13
DD+DIS219.06E
5.1.1
Connecting the Mains Cable

Two mains cables are included as standard delivery:
USA/Japan: Nema 5-15P; (UL)
Europe: CEE(7)VII 250 V / 16 A; (VDE)
Mains connection
Remove the yellow sticker
from the mains socket of the
machine only after having
checked the voltage
adjustment.
(2)
Connect the correct mains

cable to the machine and to
the power supply.
CHECK POWER
SELECTION BEFORE
CONNECTING TO MAINS
5155_reg01_004.cdr
(1)
figure 7
5.2
Start-up
NOTE:
The Digitizer must not be connected to a network during the start-up process.
(1)
Switch on the digitizer.
(2)
Check the operation terminal during the initialization.

While booting for the first time, the message "Installation not yet confirmed"
appears.
Confirm with .
(3)
After a successful start-up "ready" appears.
(4)
Check/adjust date and time in key operator mode.
(5)
Choose terminal language in the service menu "Configure User terminal

language", available after release of Language File.
(6)
Store the modified machine-specific data.
(7)
Open the service menu "Maintenance test cycle without scan" and check
the function of cassette- and plate operation with the machine open. Each size
should run at least one time.
(8)
Erase all image plates.
End of the mechanical part of start-up. Proceed with 5.2.1 or 5.2.1.2

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 14
DD+DIS219.06E
5.2.1
Installation without CRUS
5.2.1.1
Integrating the Digitizer into an independent, pure CR Network

A pure CR network consists of:
1 digitizer
processing station
In this case the ex factory settings for the IP-address (adcs1 192.9.200.199) can be
used.
A new configuration of the machine is not required.
Measures:
(1)
Switch off the digitizer
(2)
Connect the digitizer to the Ethernet
(3)
Switch on the digitizer
End of network integration. Proceed with 5.3.
5.2.1.2
Integrating the Digitizer into an existing Network

In this case the IP-address has to be adapted to the existing network. This happens by
means of the CPF-file created beforehand.
Measures:
(1)
Load the adapted configuration file adc.cpf (see 4.2.1):

- insert the disk with the CPF-File
- select <Install from floppy>
<CPF-File>
(2)
Choose a name suggested on the LCD
(3)
Store the modified machine-specific data
(4)
(5)
Connect the digitizer to the Ethernet
(6)
The digitizer is now integrated to the network

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 15
DD+DIS219.06E
5.2.2
Installation with CRUS

The CRUS already includes UPS, HUB, isolating transformer and processing station
with monitor, keyboard and mouse. It works together with a digitizer as a pure CR
network.
Measures:
5.3
(1)
(2)
Connect all components
(3)
System Integration
Precondition
The destinations intended for the digitizer, have to be put into operation and must be
obtainable via Ethernet.
Measures:
(1)
Check whether the processing station is obtainable.

Service menu: "Checks Check destinations"
(2)
Send a test image to the processing station

Key operator menu Send test image
(3)
Check the function of the emergency buttons. As a precondition the emergency

buttons must have been programmed via CPF. Standard CPF includes entries
about the emergency buttons. If a new CPF has been created, corresponding
entries have to be present.
End of system integration
5.4
Make a Backup of machine-specific Data

(1)
Insert an existing backup floppy or a

new formatted floppy
(2)
Start the service program
(3) Select
<save on floppy>
<Machine specific data>
(4)
Start the backup procedure
(5)
Label the floppy as shown in figure 8.
figure 8

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 16
DD+DIS219.06E
Concluding the Installation
6.1
Checking the Technical Image Quality

The hard disk of the digitizer contains two flatfields showing the least acceptable
quality.
For quality evaluation flatfields can be sent to a printer via Service-Menu
<CHECKS>
<SEND FLATFIELD>
<CALIBRATION PATTERN>
<BANDING PATTERN>
Compare the samples with the images created by yourself.
6.1.1
Exposure of a Flatfield
(1)
Expose a gray field (flatfield) and evaluate the image on the Processing Station
and the Laser printer.
Criteria: homogenous field, stripes etc.
(2)
Have a new plate of every format exposed twice as follows:
Rotating
Anode
x-ray tube
Cathode
5155_reg01_006.cdr
figure 9
(3)
For exposure place the cassette to match the long axes of cassette and x-ray
tube; see figure 9.
1st exposure: Dose: 10 Gy 12.0 mAs 75 kV 1.3 m distance, 1.5 mm Cu
filter
NOTE:
Please note that these are approximate values that may vary within the x-ray devices
to reach the specified dose of 10 Gy.

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 17
DD+DIS219.06E
(4)
Turn cassette by 180.
(5)
2nd exposure: use same parameters as in 1st exposure.
(6)
Use a dosimeter to measure the dose!
(7)
Identify the cassette as follows:
On QS Processing Station:
Select Study type:
<System Diagnosis>.
Select Substudy:
<Flat field>.
Confirm Exposure class:
<200>.
figure 10
On NX Processing Station:
Select Exam Group:
<System Diagnosis>.
Select Exposure Type:
<Flat Field>.
Confirm Detector
Sensitivity: <400>.
figure 11
(8)
Insert the cassette into the Digitizer. Print the image on a printer with a window
setting of 0.6 without changing the level setting on the processing station.

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 18
DD+DIS219.06E
6.1.2
Evaluation of a Flatfield
Banding
Fine white or gray lines in fast-scan direction
Aim: No lines visible or effect revealed less than on banding
pattern
If quality is less than banding pattern test image: Contact
Support center
NOTE:
Fine white or gray lines can also appear, if there is dust on the scanner (in slowscan
direction) - use the scan-brush for cleaning the scanner.
Calibration /
Shading
Calibration
Dark lines or stripes in slow scan direction

Aim: No lines visible or effect revealed less than on sample
If quality is less than calibration pattern test image:
Check / adjust the position of the laser beam via the fiber optics
Expose a new flatfield and compare it with the calibration
pattern.
If quality is still less than calibration pattern:
Make new calibration;
Expose a new flatfield and compare it with the calibration
pattern.
If quality is still less than calibration pattern: Contact Support
center

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 19
DD+DIS219.06E
6.2
Last Steps
(1)
Dispose of all packing material. (Depending on the country, by the forwarding

agent or by the hospital).
(2)
Complete the Installation Report (enclosed to every device) for all system
components and forward it to the regional RSN Manager.
(3)
Fill in the enclosed form "Site and System Data" and send it to HE GSO, if not
done yet.
(4)
Fill in the site entry form (available on MedNet) for entering the data in SRSS
and forward it to your national data coordinator.
(5)
Hand over the CR System to the application specialist.
NOTE:
Now the technical part of the installation is finished and the application part begins.
Activities beyond the Checklist for Installation/Machine-Start-up must not be booked
on Task Code INS.
Installation of other CR Components

NOTE:
For detailed information on the installation of the processing station / client station or IDStation, see:
ADC Quality System 2.1.xx
DD+DIS135.02E, Chapter 1
CR Quality System 3.0
DD+DIS273.04E
CR Quality System 3.5
DD+DIS302.05E
ADC System Components
DD+DIS198.00E, Chapter 3.
NX 1.0
DD+DIS396.06E

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 20
DD+DIS219.06E
Checklist for Installation / Machine Start-up

No. Step
Task
Code
OK
Before Installation
(1)
Confirm installation prerequisites
INS
(2)
Check consignment of all devices for damage and

completeness
INS
Installation and Start-up CRUS + Processing Station

(3)
Unpack, check consignment for damage and completeness
(4)
Connect power cords, monitor, keyboard, mouse, and optional INS

devices
(image disks, UPS, DAT-Drive)
(5)
Position processing station respectively CRUS.
INS
(6)
Set in operating system (OS): network settings
INS
(7)
Set in OS: regional settings
INS
(8)
Set in OS: time and data
INS
(9)
For processing station: Set network settings in

OS / settings / control panel
INS
(10) For processing station:

QS: Open Configuration Viewer / File / Import XML
NX: Start NX Configurator / Load a configuration from an
external media
INS
INS
(11) Check basic functions like receiving, printing, sending, viewing INS
images
(12) Create a site specific backup
INS
(13) Check initialization of all cassettes; if required reinitialize them INS

Digitizer Installation and Start-up
(14) Remove shipping brackets and install base plate
INS
(15) Connect the power cord
INS
(16) When first booting: Confirm installation with OK
INS
(17) Check date and time in key operator mode
INS
(18) Choose terminal language in service menu
INS
(19) Reset Infocounters

(20) Make a backup of the machine-specific data
INS
INS

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 21
DD+DIS219.06E
No. Step
Task
Code
(21) Check the mechanic components

Perform a "Handling Cycle" to check the function of image
plates and cassettes
INS
(22) Erase all image plates
INS
(23) Network Integration

load the adapted configuration file adc.cpf
select a station name for the digitizer from the display
make a backup of the machine specific data
connect the digitizer to the Ethernet
INS
(24) System Integration

- check whether the processing station is obtainable:
<Checks> <Check destinations>;
- send a test image to processing station: "Send test image"
in key operator menu
INS
(25) Check the image quality

send flatfield to a printer:
<Checks> <Send flatfield>
OK
INS
expose flatfields (calibration, banding, Blue LED)

print flatfields (calibration, banding, Blue LED),
compare and evaluate the printouts
(26) Check "Fast Preview" and Direct ID option, if activated
CR Entire System
(27) Perform system test with medical images
INS
(28) Hand over the CR system to the field application specialist
INS
(29) Fill in the form "Site and System Data" and send it to HE GSO INS
(30) Send the completed "Installation Reports" to the regional
Service Manager of your cluster.
INS
Remote Access
(31) Make connection to Service Host
INS

02-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 1 / 22
HEALTHCARE
Chapter 2
Imaging Services
CR 35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 105
(as of SN 6000)

This document explains the functional principle including the functions of the individual
assemblies always under normal conditions without any problems (nominal functional
sequence).
Furthermore it describes the structure and function of specific individual assemblies.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.0
12-2006

Document
Title
Service Bulletin
CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000) introduced,

DD+DIS407.06E



eq_02_functional_e_template_v02
DD+DIS219.06E
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
on the product.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 2
DD+DIS219.06E
LIST OF CONTENTS
DIGITIZER AS A PART OF THE CR SYSTEM ........................................................................6

1.1
CR System Components ..........................................................................................................6
1.2
Standard Workflow of a CR System .........................................................................................9
1.3
Direct ID and Emergency Mode - Work Flow of the CR System ............................................10
1.4
Combination of Direct ID and Fast Preview............................................................................12
IMAGE PLATES .....................................................................................................................12

2.1
ADC MD 30 Image Plate Principle..........................................................................................12
2.2
CR MD 40 General Plate ........................................................................................................13
2.3
CR MM 3.0 Image Plate special Treatments .......................................................................14
CASSETTES ..........................................................................................................................15
3.1
CR MD 4.0 General Cassette .................................................................................................15
3.2
CR MD 4.1 FLFS (Full Leg Full Spine) Cassette....................................................................16
3.3
Asymmetric Cassette ..............................................................................................................17
3.4
CR Mammography Cassette...................................................................................................18
3.5
CR MD 4.2 Extremities Cassette ............................................................................................19
3.6
Modular Structure of the Digitizer ...........................................................................................22
3.7
Overview of Modules ..............................................................................................................22
3.8
Cassette Unit...........................................................................................................................23
3.9
Transport Unit .........................................................................................................................24
3.10
Scan Unit.................................................................................................................................25
3.10.1
Laser Diode.............................................................................................................................27
3.10.2
Polygon Mirror.........................................................................................................................27
3.10.3
Photomultiplier with acrylic Light Collection Module ...............................................................28
3.10.4
Optic Module Housing.............................................................................................................28
3.11
Erasure Unit ............................................................................................................................29
3.12
cPCI-Rack ...............................................................................................................................30
3.12.1
CPU-OBERON........................................................................................................................31
3.12.2
Scan Master Board .................................................................................................................32
3.12.3
cPCI Power Supply .................................................................................................................33

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 3
DD+DIS219.06E
3.12.4
Hard Disk ................................................................................................................................34
3.13
Power Unit...............................................................................................................................35
3.13.1
Power Integration Board .........................................................................................................36
CYCLE OF A CASSETTE IN THE DIGITIZER.......................................................................37

4.1
Cassette Unit...........................................................................................................................37
4.1.1
Starting Machine Cycle by inserting a Cassette .....................................................................37
4.1.2
Identification of the Cassette...................................................................................................37
4.1.3
Lowering and Clamping the Cassette and reading the ID Data .............................................38
4.1.4
Opening the Cassette .............................................................................................................38
4.2
Transport Unit .........................................................................................................................39
4.2.1
Sucking the IP .........................................................................................................................39
4.2.2
Taking IP out of the Cassette and transporting IP to the Scan Unit .......................................39
4.3
Scan Unit.................................................................................................................................40
4.3.1
Positioning the IP relative to Scan Unit...................................................................................40
4.3.2
Stimulation and Scanning the IP (Optical Path)......................................................................41
4.4
Erasure Unit ............................................................................................................................41
4.4.1
Unloading IP from Scan Unit and transport to Erasure Unit ...................................................41
4.5
Cassette Unit...........................................................................................................................42
4.5.1
Putting IP back into Cassette..................................................................................................42
4.5.2
Putting Cassette out of Digitizer..............................................................................................43
SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ..............................................................................................44

5.1
Available Software ..................................................................................................................44
5.2
Web Pages..............................................................................................................................44
5.3
Hardware Modification Floppy of Spare Part ..........................................................................44

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 4
DD+DIS219.06E
SIGNAL AND DATA FLOW ....................................................................................................45

6.1
Signal Flow..............................................................................................................................45
6.2
Data Flow ................................................................................................................................46
6.3
FLD<XXXXX> Directories.......................................................................................................47
CALIBRATION PRINCIPLE....................................................................................................48
7.1
IP Center Calibration (BOL/BOS Adjustment) ........................................................................48
7.1.1
BOL Sensor.............................................................................................................................48
7.1.2
BOS Sensor ............................................................................................................................48
7.1.3
Calibration Procedure .............................................................................................................48
7.2
Shading Calibration.................................................................................................................49

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 5
DD+DIS219.06E
Digitizer as a Part of the CR System
1.1
CR System Components
ADC Cassette with image plate inside
The ADC cassette is the container for the image plate. During
the handling outside the Digitizer (e.g. exposing the plate) the
image plate is in the cassette. It is only opened inside the
Digitizer. The ADC cassette has an internal chip card which holds
the cassette, patient, examination and routing data belonging to a
certain X-ray exposure. The data put together are called
demographic data.
The image plate takes the place of the X-ray film in a
conventional system. It receives the X-Ray radiation and stores
a latent image. The image plates can be reused thousands of
times. The actual restriction of utilization is the mechanical
robustness.
Identification Tablet CRUS (CR User Station)

The Identification Tablet is used to write the cassette, patient,
examination and routing data to the cassette chip. This data can
be entered manually or by retrieving the data from a Hospital or
Radiology Information System (HIS/RIS).
Writing and reading is done by means of radio frequency in a
contact less manner.
The Identification software is an AGFA product and implemented
in the processing station software.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 6
DD+DIS219.06E
DICOM Digitizers
(CR 85-X / CR 75.0 / ADC Compact / CR 35-X / CR 25.0 / ADC
Solo)
The Digitizer is used to read the latent image in the image plate.
After the ADC cassette is exposed and identified it is inserted into
the Digitizer. The Digitizer reads the data on the cassette chip,
opens the cassette, takes out the image plate and scans it. The
latent image on the image plate is stimulated by means of a laser
beam to emit light according to X-ray exposure.
The data from the cassette chip is used to set the scan
parameters correctly (e.g. speed class, image plate size, etc.) for
this individual X-ray exposure.
The emitted light is converted into voltage and then digitalized
into a 12/14bit, square root compressed raw image. This image is
transmitted together with the chip data on the fly via Ethernet to
the Processing Station. A backup of that image is made on the
internal hard disk in parallel to retransmit the image in case of
transmission problems. The output format of the Digitizer is
DICOM SCU-CR.
After scanning / transmitting is finished the image plate is erased
with very bright light to make it ready for the next exposure. It is
put back into the cassette and a status flag on the cassette chip
is set from EXPOSED to ERASED. The cassette is returned to
the user and is ready for the next examination.
CR QS Server Station
The CR QS (Quality System) Server Station is a Windows XPbased Workstation with the CR Quality-System software
installed.
The CR QS Server Station receives the raw image from the
Digitizer. Every incoming image runs through an image
processing. The processed images are stored on the internal
hard disk(s) of the Server station.
However, the QS Server station only provides short term storage.
The final archiving must be realized either by hardcopies or a
PACS.
Further on, the QS Server station decodes the routing data and
sends the image data to the selected destinations (e.g. Printer,
PACS)
A Softcopy can be sent to an Archive with 8 or 12 bit. To print a
Hardcopy a 8 bit format is used.
For the QS Server station a lot of licensed software options (e.g.
Annotation, Print Composer, etc.) exist.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 7
DD+DIS219.06E
CR QS Client Station
The CR QS (Quality System) Client Station allows identification
and basic viewing.
NX Processing Station
NX is the successor of the CR QS systems.
NX shows the following features:
Identify examinations using RIS-based worklists.
Perform multiple exams at the same time.
Perform emergency exams, without selecting RIS data for

identification.
Select exposures fro an exam.
Edit patient data.
NX does not support client stations.

The NX system can either be installed in or outside an X-ray
room, in mobile environments. It can also be operated in an
secure environment using authentication and certificates.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 8
DD+DIS219.06E
1.2
Standard Workflow of a CR System
X-Ray device
ID-Tablet - CRUS
ADC Cassette
with image
plate inside
ID-Data
Digitizer
ID- and Image Data

ADC QS
Server/Client
Station
Archive Station
Printer
5158_reg02_007.cdr
figure 1

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 9
DD+DIS219.06E
1.3
Direct ID and Emergency Mode - Work Flow of the CR System
X-Ray device
ADC Cassette
with image
plate inside
Digitizer
ID-Data
ID-Station
5155_reg02_002.cdr
figure 2
Dedicated configuration offers a time saving workflow (approximately one minute for a
two cassettes study). If only one ID Station is dedicated to one CR 35-X, cassettes can
be identified without using an ID-Tablet. This option is called Direct ID. The
demographic data are transmitted from the ID viewer to the digitizer via the network.
This data flow makes it possible to scan an IP and to simultaneously enter the ID data.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 10
DD+DIS219.06E
A speed class is selected on the CR 35-X by use of the emergency buttons. The
sensitivity associated with the emergency buttons has been set during the
configuration of the system.
An exposed but unidentified cassette is inserted into the digitizer.
By entering the cassette, the digitizer reads the remaining cassette information of
the RF Tag and a communication channel to its dedicated ID Station is opened.
The digitizer starts scanning the IP and sends an ID Data Request message to
the ID Station along. The ID Window pops up at the ID Station and the ID data
have to be entered.
After the user completed the information at the ID Station, it is sent back to the
digitizer. The communication channel is closed afterwards.
The transmission of the scanned image to the Processing Station and the Fast
Preview image data is sent to the PRID-Station.
Before the cassette is put out, the ID data on the RF Tag is erased and the cycle
counter is increased by the digitizer.
NOTE:
Dealing with an emergency cassette the identification can be left out at all. Therefore,
the user enforces the complete processing of the IP by pressing the Confirm Key at the
digitizer. The digitizer emits an ID Cancel command to the ID Station, where the ID
screen drops and the communication channel is closed. The digitizer completes its
emergency cycle and increases the cycle counter of the cassette.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 11
DD+DIS219.06E
1.4
Combination of Direct ID and Fast Preview

The features Direct ID and Fast Preview can also work in combination:
A speed class, by use of the emergency buttons, is selected on the digitizer.
The digitizer starts scanning the IP and sends an ID Data Request message to
the ID Station along. The ID Window pops up at the ID Station and the ID data
will be entered.
While the user is entering the data, the Fast Preview screen of the PRID is not
visible. The transmission of the reduced Fast Preview image will be postponed
until the ID data is completely inserted.
The digitizer sends the image to the Processing Station and parallel the
reduced Fast Preview image to the PRID. As soon as the calculation of the
image is finished, the Processing Station sends the preview image to the PRID
and replaces the Fast Preview.
Image Plates
The CR plate can be identified by the plate type and sensitivity code printed on the
back.
2.1
ADC MD 30 Image Plate Principle

The image plate lying in the cassette consists of five different layers:
Legend figure 3:
Image Plate Structure
Protective EBC
(electron-beam-cured) top coat
Phosphor layer
Anti-halo layer, blue
Support P.E.T, white
Laminate
1
2
3
5146_reg02_003.CDR
4
5
figure 3
The phosphor layer is storing the picture information as energy.

The EBC top coat provides a smooth surface of the image plate to reach a good signalto-noise ratio.
Combination of white support layer and blue anti-halo layer increases the sensitivity.
The anti-halo layer lets through the stimulated light but blocks laser light.
The laminate is needed as base material.
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 12
DD+DIS219.06E
2.2
CR MD 40 General Plate
CR MD40 Plates are initialized with code 15.
The fourth-generation imaging plate is composed of the following six layers:
figure 4
Improved phosphor layer

The storage phosphors used in the phosphor layer provide high absorption efficiency
and excellent homogeneity, while their short response time ensures the fading of the
previous pixel before stimulating the next one.
A high level of sharpness at all spatial frequencies is thus secured.
Since the phosphor layer has been improved, the ADC MD40 imaging plates ensure
increased image quality for lower doses, such as the 400 speed class.
Additional adhesion layer
Another new feature of the ADC MD40 imaging plate is the introduction of an additional
adhesion layer. This gives the ADC MD40 imaging plate better mechanical stability
than its forerunners, and prevents peeling at the corners.
EBC top-coating technology
Agfa's long experience and extensive research into plate abrasion resistance has led to
a dramatic improvement in EBC top-coating technology. This improved technology has
been used for the ADC MD30 as well as for
the ADC MD40.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 13
DD+DIS219.06E
White support layer and anti-halo layer

The use of a white support layer in combination with an anti-halo layer gives high
sensitivity. The anti-halo layer is an Agfa-patented blue layer that forms a perfect
barrier against laser light, but lets through the stimulated light.
Downward compatibility
Each ADC MD40 imaging plate is identified by a code on the back.
The ADC MD40, ADC MD30 and ADC MD10 plates can be used together without any
problem.
2.3
CR MM 3.0 Image Plate special Treatments

CAUTION:
Wrong screen cleaner may damage the Image plate.
Do not use the AGFA CR phosphor plate cleaner to clean the CR MM3.0 Mammo
image plates. Use PROSAT wipers instead.
CR MM3.0 Mammo image plates require dedicated wipers.
These wipers can only be used once, but different CR MM3.0 Mammo image
plates can be cleaned one after the other with one wiper.
Storage of the PROSAT wipers:

carefully close the bag of wipers and keep in a cool place (< 25 C).
When cleaning CR MM3.0 Mammo image plates, leave the plate surface to dry
for about one (1) minute before putting the plate back into the casette.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 14
DD+DIS219.06E
Cassettes
The principle function of the digitizer is close connected to the structure of the CR
Cassettes. The digitizer accepts only CR Cassettes. All other cassettes, e.g. ADC 70,
are refused.
3.1
CR MD 4.0 General Cassette

NOTE:
The cassette must always be inserted into the digitizer in the correct orientation to
make it possible to identify and handle the cassette!
Legend figure 5:
(1)
ADC label
(2)
ID-Chip carries demographic data
(3)
Label showing size of Image Plate
(4)
Sliders to prevent from usage in film

handling devices
(5)
Metal label silver dot identifies an ADC

Cassette
(6)
ADC Image Plate (gray surface up, white

surface down)
4
5
6
4
figure 5
The ADC label and the label, showing the size of the contained image plate, are put on
for the identification by the user.
The metal label is detected by the digitizer to identify the cassette as an ADC cassette.
The demographic data is at the ID-Station transferred by no-touch radio frequency
tagging to the ID-Chip and is read out in the digitizer. The data is in that way always
linked to the image.
For protection against electrostatic charging and mechanical damage the inner lining of
the cassette is made of felt.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 15
DD+DIS219.06E
3.2
CR MD 4.1 FLFS (Full Leg Full Spine) Cassette

Specification
To improve the image quality with Full Leg Full Spine (FLFS) images
a FLFS CR Cassette was introduced.
Identification
The FLFS CR Cassettes are with exception of two major differences identical to the
current standard ADC Cassette (35 cm x 43 cm).
The differences are:
Reduced backscatter protection (minus 1.5 cm at locking and

hinge side)
Specific FLFS labeling
figure 6
Further points of identification
All labels are yellow, which is unique for FLFS
Labeling FLFS to identify cassette as type FLFS
Yellow dots to recognize cassette as FLFS also in buffer or stack I
Format
The FLFS Cassette is available in format 35 cm x 43 cm.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 16
DD+DIS219.06E
3.3
Asymmetric Cassette
Specification
The Asymmetric Cassette is dedicated for X-ray exposures where no centered
positioning of the part of the body is possible (e.g. side view of a spinal column).
Identification
A cassette for asymmetric scanning can be
identified by a red hatching covering less
than the half of the cassette side. (see
beside)
5146_reg02_004.cdr
figure 7
Formats
The ADC Asymmetric Cassette is available in:
21 cm x 43 cm (asymmetric partial scan of dedicated 35 cm x 43 cm cassettes)

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 17
DD+DIS219.06E
3.4
CR Mammography Cassette
Specification
The CR Mammo Cassette is a dedicated cassette for use in combination with CR
Mammo Plates 2.00 for dedicated mammography applications. It features a narrow
hinge to allow scanning right up to the chest wall.
A distinctive feature of the CR Mammo Cassette, in comparison with general ADC
cassettes, is the narrower hinge. This means that there is a closer contact with the
skinline, offering an increased amount of information during scanning.
The CR Mammo Cassette contains a CR Mammo image plate. This type of image plate
has a special phosphor layer which results in reduced noise and increased sharpness.
The cassette is equipped with a positioning mechanism in order to ensure the chest
wall distance to the image plate.
Identification
The cassette is labeled with Mammo on both sides.
The cassette is pre-initialized as a Mammo Cassette, but if the identification is lost, it
can be given via the ID Station.
figure 8
positioning mechanism for IP (2 x, left and right cassette side)
passive suction cup, keeping the IP in place inside the cassette

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 18
DD+DIS219.06E
Formats:
The CR Mammo Cassette is available in two formats:
3.5
18 cm x 24 cm
24 cm x 30 cm
CR MD 4.2 Extremities Cassette

Specification
The CR MD4.2 Extremities system is foreseen for X-ray images of the distal extremities
and adjacent joints (hands and feet) and provides a spatial scan resolution of 50 m.
Initialization:
Scan size: 18 x 24 or 24 x 30 cm
Scan resolution: Very high resolution
The CR MD4.2 Extremities cassettes can only work when digitizer software C25_2007 or
higher is installed on the CR 35-X.
WARNING:
Poor image quality caused by incorrect cassette initialization.
Initialize the cassette/plate as described in the corresponding user manual.
Identification
CR MD4.2 Extremities cassettes can be recognized by the code label
Extremities - code XX
The light green dots are dedicated only to the CR MD4.2 Extremities cassette. This
makes it easy to distinguish the cassette from others when stored in a rack.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 19
DD+DIS219.06E
CAUTION:
Image quality may be inadequate when using wrong cassettes:
Only cassettes with both labels CR MD4.2 Extremities and Extremities code XX must
be used for the Extremities application
(XX depends on the plate sensitivity SAL).
Other cassettes must not be used.
a b
CR MD4.2 Extremities
2 green dots on side
2 green dots
5156_dis307.05_001.cdr
1 silver dot
1 green dot
Extremities - code XX
Cassette formats
18 x 24 cm or 24 x 30 cm
figure 9: Labeling of the CR MD4.2 Extremities cassette
Formats
New CR MD4.2 Extremities cassettes (available formats 18 x 24 cm and
24 x 30 cm) are delivered with the appropriate initialization:
Scan size:
Scan resolution: Very high resolution
18 x 24 or 24 x 30 cm

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 20
DD+DIS219.06E
System Preparation
Ensure the correct digitizer software has been installed: see Software
Requirements.
You can check this via the digitizer display.
Ensure the additional shading calibration for Extremities (75 kV,

2 x 10 Gy, Cu filter 1.5 mm as for GenRad) has been performed with a GenRad
cassette 35 x 43 cm
(in the same digitizer sub-menu as for the other shading calibrations)
Installation of the Extremities-testimage on the digitizer in E:/extremity

The test image is an Extremity image of a hand with wrist. The image
(30 MB) will be provided first via Service MedNet, GSO Library:
Computed Radiography / CR Digitizers / CR 25.0 / Freeware/
CR 25.0 - Software - Extremities Test Image
Later on it will additionally be available on a new CR test images CD. Further
information will be distributed.
CR QS software version 3.0.207 or higher must be installed(check via the Help menu of
the CR QS software)
Using the Extremities System
Radiographer
Cassette should be erased before first usage after delivery
Same handling as for normal GenRad cassettes in respect of:

o
X-ray exposure technique
Identification of cassette
Workflow
Erasure
According to good radiographer practice - lead markers indicating Left/Right

should be applied
Cassettes have to be erased if they were not used for 1 - 2 days

(e.g. over weekend)
Cleaning of image plate with ADC - Screen cleaner, frequency as for GenRad
cassettes or on demand
Digitizers which do not fulfill the requirements will reject the Extremities cassette
Dose indicator (lgm value) can be 0.15 points lower than on the same image done
on a GenRad cassette. This is because the phosphor layer of the image plate is a
bit thinner.
Radiologist
Improved sharpness of the trabecular structure of the bone because of

50 m pixel size.
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 21
DD+DIS219.06E
3.6
Modular Structure of the Digitizer
3.7
Overview of Modules
100
700
600
500
400
300
200
51
5
6_
re g
02
_0
01
.cd
r
100 Frame
200 Power Unit
300 cPCI Rack
400 Scan Unit
500 Erasure Unit
600 IP Transport Unit
700 Cassette Unit
figure 10
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 22
DD+DIS219.06E
3.8
Cassette Unit
4
3
2
1
figure 11
(1)
Cassette roller
(2)
Clamp unit
(3)
Cassette lift
(4)
Cassette position detection light barrier
(5)
Cassette opener 0-position light barrier
(6)
RF tag reader
(7)
Finger to block Input/Output (I/O) slot
The cassette unit loads the cassette from the I/O slot, fixes and holds the cassette
during the IP is taken out and scanned. The RF-tag reader and the antenna read out
the ID- and image specific data.
After processing the IP cassette status is changed from Identified to Erased.
Cassette unit transports the cassette back to I/O slot for output.
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 23
DD+DIS219.06E
3.9
Transport Unit
figure 12
(1)
Vacuum pump
(2)
Suction cups
Within the transport unit the IP is taken out of the cassette and lead to the scan unit.
After scanning, the IP is erased while it is moved upwards. The IP is put back to the
cassette in the cassette unit.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 24
DD+DIS219.06E
3.10
Scan Unit
figure 13
(1)
Optic module
(2)
Stepper motor boards
(3)
Slow scan motor

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 25
DD+DIS219.06E
5158_re
g02_00
1.cdr
figure 14
(1)
Photomultiplier module
(2)
Optic module
(3)
Light collector
The function of the scan module is to stimulate a two dimensional, X-ray exposed
phosphor image plate with laser energy. Out of the blue light, which is emitted by the
phosphor, a digital image is generated.
The stimulation of the image plate is done pixel by pixel. Therefore the laser beam is
moved. The laser power on the focal plane is 50 mW + 5 %. The movement in the xaxis is achieved by a rotating polygon mirror (fast scan direction) which is part of the
optical path. The movement in the y-axis is done mechanically by transporting the
image plate (slow scan direction) with two pairs of rolls.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 26
DD+DIS219.06E
The Scan mode 2 s is used for 35 cm x 43 cm high resolution scanning.

A 1 s scan mode has been established already in ADC Compact Plus for
35 x 43 cm cassettes standard resolution.
This principle has been enhanced in CR 85-X /CR 35-X to small
formats < 35 x 43 cm.
Consequently, the throughput increases because of reduced scan time.
The 1 s scan mode option can be switched on in the key operator menu.
3.10.1
Laser Diode
The optic module contains a monochromatic anamorph scan optic where the laser
beam is modified. The light source which is stimulating the image plate is one red laser
diode, with a wavelength from 650 nm to 670 nm and a maximal output of 50 mW each
(see 2 in figure below). The increase and decrease time of the laser power is shorter
than 20 s. The beam of the laser diode is focused to have a spot diameter of 60 m
on the scan surface.
1
3
2
Fa
s
4
51
48
_c
ha
p2
_0
02
.cd
r
ts
ca
nd
ire
c
tio
figure 15
3.10.2
Polygon Mirror
The Polygon mirror has 6 facets, each with a mirror (see 1 in figure 11). It is turned by
a DC motor which is clock pulsed from the scanning hardware. Pixel times between 2.5
and 0.6 s can be reached, but for scanning are two times used, 1 and 2 s.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 27
DD+DIS219.06E
3.10.3
Photomultiplier with acrylic Light Collection Module
5148_02_007.cdr
figure 16
The detector module consists of an acrylic light collection module, an optical filter and a
photomultiplier module (PMM).
The acrylic light collection module, the optical filter and the PMM are cemented
together in order to obtain the maximum available light
collection efficiency.
The acrylic light collection unit consists of an acrylic light guide, a collection mirror and
a mechanical mount supporting simple exchange of the detector module.
The aim of this development is to provide high image quality for EUREF compliance
with a detector that can be integrated in a digitizer with maximum similarity to the CR
75.0 digitizer. The image quality is increased by improved light collection efficiency with
an acrylic light guide.
3.10.4
Optic Module Housing

The housing is made of cast aluminum witch is electrical isolated to the ground plate.
The cover is made of conductive material to achieve electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC). The housing of the optic module stays closed in the field and no service needs
to be done inside.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 28
DD+DIS219.06E
3.11
Erasure Unit
figure 17
(1)
Halogen lamps, 100 Watt
(2)
Erasure unit fan (part of the frame)
(3)
KG2 filter for heat protection
(4)
Front glass (UV filter with sensitive gelatin layer)
The lamps are controlled by the erasure control board. They are controlled during work
in pairs and also the power supply of 12 V is generated via 5 single transformer. For
erasing the image plate a power input of in total 1000 Watt with 230 V / 50 Hz is
present.
The erasure unit fan (placed in the Frame) is switched on during erasing the image
plate for cooling down the unit. The speed the IP is transported past the erasure unit
depends on speed class and format (Erasure energy per time is determined by means
of the demographic data).

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 29
DD+DIS219.06E
3.12
cPCI-Rack
7
6
5
4
figure 18
1 cPCI Rack Fan

2 cPCI Power Supply
3 CPU Oberon
4
5
6
7
Scan Master Board

Backplane
Hard disk
Floppy drive
The cPCI-Rack (compact Peripheral Component Interconnect) consists of the

processing unit CPU, the Scan Master Board, the Power Supply of the cPCI-Rack, a
floppy drive and a hard disk. On top of the rack the fan for cooling the cPCI-Rack is
mounted and on the back the backplane with all the connectors is placed.
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 30
DD+DIS219.06E
3.12.1
CPU-OBERON
The CPU (Central Processing Unit) is a Power PC and is working with an operating
system called Oberon. The interfaces to the service and the Ethernet are placed on the
front plane.
Service:
Serial debug port connector,
SuperIO and DUART
Connector (female) to
Service Interface
(RS232)
Fast Ethernet Controller:

RJ45 connector, Fast Ethernet with
10 to 100 Mbit/s
Connector to Fast
Ethernet
LED (FPGA NOT Conf.

Green, TRAFFIC
yellow, Ethernet LINK
red) Hardware control
Software controllable with Portex

tool
3
2
LED (3 green, 2 yellow,

1 red) Software control
Hardware related signaling:

Ethernet Traffic yellow LED
Ethernet linked red LED
FPGA not configured green LED
Halt Switch
HALT: Abort action
Reset Switch
RESET: Global reset
figure 19

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 31
DD+DIS219.06E
3.12.2
Scan Master Board

The Scan Master Board controls the main functions of the digitizer which are related to
the image data acquisition. The board has to support two operating levels, low
resolution and high resolution. Therefore timing, frequency and converters need to be
controlled.
Photomultiplier Tube Control:

Controls the Photomultiplier itself, the
high voltage settings and receives the
current/voltage (I/V) converter signal.
Connector (female)
to Photomultiplier
Tube
Polygon Control:
Controls via the Polygon the deflection
of the laser beam on the image plate,
controls the rotational speed and
detects the facets.
RF-Tag Reader Control:
Controls the transmitter and receiver
signals for reading out demographic
data of the ADC Cassette.
User terminal Control:
Controls the user terminal via a 20 mA
interface.
Connector (female)
to Polygon
Connector (male)
to RF-Reader
Connector (female)
to User terminal
IO-BUS Control:
Provides the IO-BUS with power and
is connected via eight data lines and
three control lines to the IO-BUS.
Connector (female)
to IO-Bus
Laser diode Module Control:
Controls the power supply of the laser
diode of the laser module, controls the
power switch of the laser diode,
controls Begin-of-Line Signal and
Laser-Power-Monitor board.
Connector (male)
to Laser Diode
Module
5146_reg02_013.cdr
figure 20
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 32
DD+DIS219.06E
3.12.3
cPCI Power Supply
Legend to the LEDs

below, showing the
Output voltages
Green LEDs to
monitor power supply
5146_reg02_014.cdr
figure 21
During normal operation the LEDs monitor 5.1 V and 3.3 V voltage levels.
Effects of Interlock Switches:

The power supply of the cPCI Rack is not interrupted by the interlock switch at right
side panel. This independent supply makes it possible to update software or work out
other actions at the rack while right side panel of the digitizer is open.
The power supply of the cPCI Rack is interrupted by the interlock switch of the front
door. At the rack is no action possible while front door of the digitizer is open.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 33
DD+DIS219.06E
3.12.4
Hard Disk
The gray rectangle in the partition map marks the directories which are only necessary
for remote control via http access.
Partitions
Directories and
subdirectories
C:
CGI-BIN
PUBLIC
DL
IMAGES
Annotations
*.BAT
STARTUP.COM
*.PPC
ERROR.MSG
*.ESX
batch
*.PPC
program files
program files
error message files
tables
*.html
html files
*.zip
zip files
*.GIF
*.JPG
*.SYS
AOS.LOG
ADC.CPF
*.AXX
*.CXX
*.UXX
ICN_XXXX.DAT
C35_<S/N>.ICN
D:
E:
Files
system files
current log file
configuration files
infocounter (binary form)
infocounter (text form)
SHD
*.TBL
*.SHD
*.TEMP
tables
calibration files
HTTP
HTTPTEMP.OUT
temporary files
FLATFLD
CONTROL.DAT
IMAGE.DAT
FLATFLD2
CONTROL.DAT
IMAGE.DAT
TESTIMG
CONTROL.DAT
IMAGE.DAT
test image
(Collection of diagnostic images)
TSHEET
CONTROL.DAT
IMAGE.DAT
testsheet of the optimum

image quality
FLD00001
CONTROL.DAT
IMAGE.DAT
STATUS
TAGFILE
image control file + demographic data

image data
FLD00002
CONTROL.DAT
IMAGE.DAT
STATUS
TAGFILE

image data
only when emergency mode is activated
change of status
FLD00010
CONTROL.DAT
IMAGE.DAT
STATUS
TAGFILE

image data
only when emergency mode is activated
change of status
LOG
SCCTMP
*.SES
session files
BOLIMAGE.DAT
BOLIMAGE.INF
MFAIMAGE.DAT
MFAIMAGE.INF
SHDIMAGE.DAT
SHDIMAGE.INF
temporary directory
SNAPSHOT
*.LOG
uncompressed logfiles
(without quickcheck and
machine state)
*.TXT
change of status
5158_reg02_32.cdr
figure 22

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 34
DD+DIS219.06E
3.13
Power Unit
Function of the power unit is to supply erasure unit, VME-Rack, stepper motors and
stepper motor boards with power. Power integration board is part of the unit.
figure 23
(1)
Main switch
(2)
Interlock switch
(3)
Power integration board
(4)
Fuse for Power Unit (2 A, slowblow Si 201)
(5)
Fuse for Stepper motor transformer (2 A, slowblow Si 202)

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 35
DD+DIS219.06E
3.13.1
Power Integration Board

Main functions of power integration board are:
Recognition and control of the required periphery
Vacuum pump
Magnetic valve
Erasure unit fan
Power unit fan
Check of the following units directly via hard- or software
Magnetic valve
Interlock for SM-voltage
Stepper motor voltage of the transformer
Erasure unit fan
Vacuum pump (indirectly via current of the pump motor)
LED's for error analysis
ST2
BU5
BU6
BU7
ST4
BU4
5158_reg02_015.cdr
figure 24
NOTE:
Only the LEDs marked with a star are lighting in a machine that is in proper
condition.
ST2
Voltage supply for stepper motor boards in cassette unit (+ 40 V)
BU5
Voltage supply for stepper motor boards in scan unit (+ 40 V)

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 36
DD+DIS219.06E
Cycle of a Cassette in the Digitizer
4.1
Cassette Unit
4.1.1
Starting Machine Cycle by inserting a Cassette

An ADC Cassette with an exposed Image
Plate (IP) inside is set in correct orientation
into the I/O slot.
The light barrier (1) GS732/734 recognizes
the cassette and starts the mechanical
process of the digitizer.
1
2
The transport roller (2), moved by motor

M701, brings the cassette into the cassette
unit.
figure 25
4.1.2
Identification of the Cassette

A plastic bolt, activated by the rear slider of
the cassette, interrupts the cassette position
detection light barrier GS726 (1).
As only ADC Cassette have that certain
slider, it is made sure that the right cassette
in the correct position is inserted.
figure 26

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 37
DD+DIS219.06E
4.1.3
Lowering and Clamping the Cassette and reading the ID Data

3
The cassette is lowered (1) by lift motor

M703 when a signal of light barrier GS718
comes in.
In the lowered position the light barrier
GS724 , for starting the clamp mechanism,
detects the cassette. The clamp motion is
run by motor M705.
2
1
While the cassette unit is moved to the right

side (2) the R/F-Tag antenna (3) GS738 and
the corresponding R/F-Tag reader GS736
read out the ID-Data from the chip on the
cassette.
The cassette unit is roughly positioned

corresponding to the size of the cassette.
figure 27
4.1.4
Opening the Cassette

In the clamped position the light barrier
GS716 detects the start for the opening
mechanism.
The cassette lid is opened by motor M702

with a certain number of steps.
51
55
_re
g0
2_
02
0.c
dr
figure 28

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 38
DD+DIS219.06E
4.2
Transport Unit
4.2.1
Sucking the IP
The transport robot of the IP transport unit

(2), run by motor M601, moves up quickly
(see arrow).
The suction cups (3) are moved to the right
position on the IP. IP transport 0-position is
detected by GS604.
The vacuum pump GS608 starts (1) to build
up low pressure. By opening the solenoid
valve GS606 the vacuum is transferred to
the suction cups and the IP is sucked.
figure 29
4.2.2
Taking IP out of the Cassette and transporting IP to the Scan Unit

The IP is taken out of the cassette and
moved down (see arrow) by the transport
robot (1) to the scan unit, driven by motor
M601.
By passing the light barrier GS446 the scan
rollers open (2), driven by motor M401.
1
Vacuum is reduced and suction cups release

IP.
figure 30

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 39
DD+DIS219.06E
4.3
Scan Unit
4.3.1
Positioning the IP relative to Scan Unit

The IP alignment finger (1) positions the IP
(2) relative to scan unit by means of long
distance light barrier (3) GS442/444 .
IP is moved by alignment finger, until long

distance light barrier (3) is interrupted.
Afterwards the IP alignment finger moves
back until long distance light barrier is no
longer interrupted.
IP
1
figure 31
The scan rollers close (1) and clamp the IP

between.
Scan rollers start to roll and move the IP
down until its edge reaches the PIN diodes
(2).
figure 32

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 40
DD+DIS219.06E
4.3.2
Stimulation and Scanning the IP (Optical Path)

The IP is moved through the scanner by
M402.
The scan process is split into a fast and a
slow scan direction.
The laser power of the laser diode is lead
to the IP via optical lenses and a polygon.
The light emitted from the IP is transferred
by two acrylic light guides to the photo
multiplier.
Fast s
c
an
5156_reg02_003.cdr
figure 33
4.4
Erasure Unit
4.4.1
Unloading IP from Scan Unit and transport to Erasure Unit

As scan process is finished, scan rollers stop
to transport the IP in slow scan direction.
Erasure lamps (1) switch on.

For unloading IP of scan unit the scan rollers
turn direction and move IP upwards (see
arrow).
Suction cups of transport unit are positioned
again on the surface of IP and vacuum pump
starts.
As the IP is sucked the scan rollers (2) move
apart and the IP is moved by transport robot
to erasure unit.
The IP passes the erasure lamps in a certain
speed. The speed depends on the format of
the cassette and on the examination type.
This information was given by the chip on
the cassette, read out at the begin of the
cycle.
figure 34

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 41
DD+DIS219.06E
There are different speeds to vary

homogeneity and intensity of the erasure
effect on the IP.
As the complete IP passed the erasure unit,
lamps are switched off.
The image information on the IP is erased
and the blank IP can be used for another Xray exposure.
4.5
Cassette Unit
4.5.1
Putting IP back into Cassette

For putting IP back into cassette the cassette
unit has to be positioned relative to IP.
Cassette unit moves to IP until light barrier
GS730 is interrupted (1).
Light
barrier
IP
Afterwards cassette unit moves back until

light barrier is no longer interrupted (2).
1
Light
barrier
IP
Transport robot puts IP back into cassette.

Vacuum is switched off and suction cups
release IP.
Transport robot moves down to home

position while cassette is closed.
figure 35

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 42
DD+DIS219.06E
4.5.2
Putting Cassette out of Digitizer

Cassette unit moves to the left while the RFTag (1) changes status of cassette chip to
erased.
Cassette is released by clamping

mechanism and lifted.
I/O slot of digitizer is unlocked.

The transport belt, turned by motor M704 ,
and transport roller (3) move cassette out of
the I/O slot.
After removal of the cassette the cassette
unit moves to home position.
figure 36

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 43
DD+DIS219.06E
Software Architecture
5.1
Available Software
The checks help to find defective or misadjusted parts in the digitizer.
Checks available in Service Program of the Digitizer:
5.2
System check
Rough check of complete system

creates a file in d:\ snapshot.txt
Send flatfield
1 Calibration pattern
2 Banding pattern
Web Pages
The Software of the digitizer allows access from the Internet to the service level of the
machine. The access via a graphic User Interface (ADC web pages) is part of the
service concept. The web pages follow the structure of the well-known User Terminal.
Access via web pages guarantees a convenient and fast service by making use of
standard tools. The usage of different ports for these ways allows working
simultaneously with FTP, HTTP, and TelNet.
Further information, see chapter 3.2.
5.3
Hardware Modification Floppy of Spare Part

Spare parts which are sent with a floppy, need to be included in the system via
software. The floppy e.g. of the optic module contains specific settings of production
calibration and data of the spare part. This information need to be installed after the
spare part is mounted in the digitizer. For other spare parts sent with a floppy only the
information for the info counter is included.
The floppy is put into the floppy drive of the cPCI-Rack and the installation starts
automatically. The information concerning the spare part is integrated in the system.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 44
cPCI Backplane
RAM
Demographic
Data
Raw Data (to
Partition C:
Partition D:
Image Data
Lowpass Filter
Proc. Station)
12-2006
cPCI Unit
Ethernet
100 Mbit
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 45
I/V converter
Service PC
DD+DIS219.06E
Raw Data 12 bit
Signal and Data Flow
Legend:
Harddisk
High
tension
IO-Bus
Polygon
Laser
diodes
Calculation
of scan
settings
Signal Flow
figure 37
10
6.1
Image Data
Demographic Data

CPU
Oberon
Partition E:
Optic Module
Cassette Unit
DD+DIS219.06E
6.2
Data Flow
IP data
Cassette data
Exposure
Destination
Patient
Conversion of
emitted light
into current
R/F Tag on the cassette
Photomultiplier
Conversion from current to voltage
in the I/V - converter
Calculation of:
Scanspeed
Voltage for high tension of PMT
Antialiasing-filter-frequence
Signal compression for grey scale

coordination (square rooted)
Signalfiltering to avoid aliasing

Revolutions per minute of Polygon
Voltage adaptation for high tension of PMT
Conversion from analog to

digital (14bit)
Start of scan with slow scan

speed = constant
Scan Master board
Raw image data and

demographic data via network to
processing station
Raw image data in RAM
5146_reg02_056.cdr
figure 38

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 46
DD+DIS219.06E
6.3
FLD<XXXXX> Directories
CONTROL.DAT (Image control file):
There are six possible status set in an image control file:
queued
Waiting for transmission
sending
Transmission in progress
sent
Transmission completed, waiting for response
transmitted
Positive response from workstation
warning*
Positive response, but file cannot be handled from workstation at

the moment new transmission
error*
Faulty file, transmission cancelled
NOTE:
Only images being in a status marked with a "*" can be deleted from the queue
management.
STATUS
A status file will only be created when the operator pushes the emergency button.
TAGFILE
File date and time when the status is changed.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 47
DD+DIS219.06E
Calibration Principle
There are two different calibrations to work out with the Digitizer in the field. The IP
Center Calibration, which is necessary after replacement of the optic module or a
change on the mechanical adjustment of the begin of scan sensor, and the shading
calibration which is responsible for the image quality and follows always after an IP
Center Calibration.
7.1
IP Center Calibration (BOL/BOS Adjustment)

The IP center calibration adjusts two different scan signal settings in one process, the
begin of line (BOL) signal for the fast scan direction and the begin of scan (BOS)
signal for slow scan direction. Both signals in combination are responsible for the area
which is scanned and where pixels are created.
7.1.1
BOL Sensor
The BOL sensor is a pin diode placed in the optic module. It controls the switching off
and on of the laser. The sensor is beside the IP, therefore the laser beam hits the
sensor before the IP. Out of the defined distance between the sensor and the border of
the IP the moment of reading out the pixel lines on the IP is set.
7.1.2
BOS Sensor
The BOS sensor is a long distance light barrier which is placed at the bottom part of the
scan unit. The light barrier gives the signal to start the scan process in slow scan
direction. When the IP reaches the sensor it is detected and then passes a fixed
distance to the begin of scan line, then the scan process starts.
7.1.3
Calibration Procedure
The IP center calibration is
worked out with an IP format
smaller than 35 x 43 cm. In
reference to this biggest format
the borders around the scanned
IP are detected.
BOS
BOL
The distance corresponding to the

BOS signal is measured from the
geometrical reference to the
border where the scanning of the
IP starts. The ideal distance is
defined with 5 mm.
BOL
IP
e.g. 24 x 30 cm
format
Area covered by
a 35 x 43 cm IP
(reference)
The both distances measured to

adjust the BOL signal must be
equal, means the IP is scanned in
figure 39
centered position.
5146_reg02_059.cdr

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 48
DD+DIS219.06E
7.2
Shading Calibration
Inhomogeneities of the light collector (acrylic light guide) and the photomultiplier require
a position dependent calibration of the scan line. This pixel wise line calibration evens
out differences in the transmission behavior of the acrylic light guide by calculation.
Each scanned pixel in a line is corrected arithmetically by its corresponding correction
value (shading correction). This is done for each of the three speed classes 600, 200,
and 75.
A number of lines of a flat field image are averaged and scaled to the maximum pixel
value. All the lines need to be in a certain range to make the calibration successful, if
not the error is displayed at the user terminal.
The calibration curves
can be viewed by using
a web browser.
(see chapter 3.2)
Three curves for each
format are displayed in
one image and
distinguished by three
different colors.
figure 40
The y-axis of the coordinate system shows the Scan Average Level (SAL) which is the
digital value (gray scale) of a pixel and is one of the criteria for a successful calibration.
The x-axis shows the number of pixels.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 2 / 49
Chapter 3.1
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN 6000)

This document describes safety guidelines and general repair instructions. It also
contains all product specific safety notes used in this Service Manual.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.0
12-2006

Updated type label, see section 3.2, page 13.
Document
Title
Service Bulletin

DD+DIS407.06E



eq_03-1_safety-repair_e_template_v02
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
on the product.

01-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.1 / 2
DD+DIS219.06E
Repair and Service

LIST OF CONTENTS
PRODUCT SPECIFIC SAFETY DIRECTIONS ........................................................................4

1.1
General .....................................................................................................................................4
1.2
Safety Directions for the Installation .........................................................................................4
1.3
To be considered upon Repairs on the CR 35-X......................................................................5
1.4
To be considered with mechanical Tests of Stepper Motor controlled Drive Units .................6
1.5
Safety Switches of CR35-X Digitizer ........................................................................................6
1.6
Safety Directions for the Optic Module .....................................................................................7
1.7
Safety Directions for the Photomuliplier Module (PMM) ...........................................................9
1.8
Safety Directions for the Erasure Unit ......................................................................................9
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CASSETTES AND IMAGE PLATES........................................10
LABELS ..................................................................................................................................11
3.1
Markings and Labels...............................................................................................................11
3.2
Position of the Type Label ......................................................................................................13

01-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.1 / 3
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Product specific Safety Directions
1.1
General
With every repair work check the following points visually:
1.2
Condition of the insulation of the mains plug / mains cable.
Effects of the strain relief for the mains cable.
Efficiency of the protective earth on metal panel parts (protective earth

connected and spring contacts OK).
Correct condition of the protection covers.
Safety Directions for the Installation
CAUTION:
Transportation parts can damage the product.
Remove all transportation parts prior to first operation.
CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the digitizer by wrong voltage selection.
Prior to first operation check voltage selector at rear side of digitizer.
If the voltage adaption is not correct, take a screw driver and turn the switch to
correct position.

01-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.1 / 4
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
1.3
To be considered upon Repairs on the CR 35-X

The machine must be protected against accidental activation during repair work. For
this purpose we recommend to attach the following sign on the main switch while
repairing the machine.
Do not
activate!
Repairs in progress!
Repairs in
progress.
Location:......................
Sign must only be removed by:
..................
figure 1
WARNING:
Risk of electric shock!
Switch off the digitizer and disconnect from the mains before performing any service
interventions at the digitizer.
CAUTION:
Danger of cutting!
Due to changed production methods, all parts of metal frame can be sharp-edged.
Take special care when servicing the interior of the digitizer
Wear safety shoes while removing scan unit.

01-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.1 / 5
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
1.4
To be considered with mechanical Tests of

Stepper Motor controlled Drive Units
If a stepper motor driven shaft must be turned for checking a mechanical function,
make sure to disconnect the stepper motor first on the corresponding control board
(This is to avoid destruction of the stepper motor control board by induction).
If this is not possible, turn the stepper motor only slowly.
1.5
Safety Switches of CR35-X Digitizer

There are safety
switches at the front
door (A) and at the
right side panel (B).
The safety switches

interrupt the mains
voltage supply when the
front door is opened or
the right side panel is
removed.
figure 2: Positions of safety switches
WARNING:
If the safety switch is overridden with a service key there are risks of injuries.
Keep your hair, hands and garments away from the device.
Remove service key before the device is handed over to the customer.
Laser beam! Risk of serious eye damage!
Avoid direct and indirect eye contact with the laser beam.
Do not hold any tools in the laser beam - risk of reflection.
Consider that the service key must be removed again before the doors are closed.
After use of the service key, the function of the safety switch has to be checked.
01-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.1 / 6
DD+DIS219.06E
1.6
Repair and Service

Safety Directions for the Optic Module
The CR 35-X is a Class 1 Laser Product.

It uses internally a laser diode, classification class IIIb. Under normal operating
conditions - device with all covers - there can be no laser radiation outside the DX-S.
WARNING:
Laser beam! - Risk of serious eye damage!
Do not expose to laser beam directly.
Do not hold any tools into the laser beam (risk of reflection).
During any service intervention concerning the scan unit, the
digitizer must be switched off
CAUTION:
Risk of injury when removing the scan unit!
To remove the scan unit safely, use the digitizer ramp.
Check that both adjustable feet are touching the ground before removal of the scan
unit.

01-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.1 / 7
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Observe the Caution instructions on the Optical module label:
The positions of labels referring to laser radiation are placed here:
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASERKLASSE 1
51
56
3
g0
_re
00
. 1_
dr
2 .c
figure 3: Warning labels referring to laser radiation

01-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.1 / 8
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
1.7
Safety Directions for the Photomuliplier Module (PMM)

CAUTION:
Risk of damage!
Photomultiplier and light collector are glued and must be treated as one component.
1.8
Safety Directions for the Erasure Unit

WARNING:
The erasure unit is hot - up to 200 C:
Risk of burns.
Avoid contact with the Erasure Unit.
Observe the relevant sticker on the
Erasure Unit, see figure 4.
200
figure 4: Warning labels at erasure unit

01-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.1 / 9
DD+DIS219.06E
Repair and Service

Safety Directions for Cassettes and Image Plates

CAUTION:
Wrong screen cleaner may damage the Image plate.
Do not use the AGFA CR phosphor plate cleaner to clean the CR MM3.0 Mammo
image plates. Use PROSAT wipers instead.
CAUTION:
Image quality may be inadequate when using wrong cassettes:
Only cassettes with both labels CR MD4.2 Extremities and Extremities code XX must
be used for the Extremities application
(XX depends on the plate sensitivity SAL).
Other cassettes must not be used.
WARNING:
Poor image quality caused by incorrect cassette initialization.
Initialize the cassette/plate as described in the corresponding user manual.

01-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.1 / 10
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Labels
3.1
Markings and Labels

Always take into account the markings and labels provided on the inside and outside of
the machine. A brief overview of these markings and labels and their meaning is given
below.
WARNING:
Risk of electric shock.
Shocks can cause severe injuries.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove any covers
WARNING:
The erasure unit is hot - up to 200 C: Risk of burns.
Avoid contact with the Erasure Unit.
Observe the relevant sticker on the Erasure Unit.
Type B equipment:
Indicates that the CR 35-X complies with the limits for type B equipment.
Supplementary protective earth connector:
Provides a connection between the CR 35-X and the potential equalization busbar of
the electrical system as found in medical environments. This plug should never be
unplugged before the power is turned off and the power plug has been removed.
Intergrounding connector:
Provides a connection between the Digitizer and other equipment which might exhibit
minor ground potential differences. These differences may degrade the quality of
communication between different equipment. Never remove connections to this
terminal.

01-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.1 / 11
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Protective earth (ground):

0 Provides a connection between the Digitizer and the protective earth of the mains. Do
not remove this connection, because this will have a negative influence on the
leakage current.
Power on
Power off:
Note that the power cord has to be disconnected from the wall outlet in order to
disconnect the unit entirely from the mains.
CAUTION:
Precautions for use in USA only:
Make sure that the circuit is single-phase center-tapped, if the Digitizer is connected
to a 240 V / 60 Hz source instead of a 120 V / 60 Hz source.
CAUTION:
Risk of injury during cassette insertion: Fingers if they are
caught between the cassetteand the edge of the input slot
may become trapped.
Insert the cassette in the input buffer as described in the User
Manual.
At all times, keep your fingers clear of the input slot.
As soon as the digitizer takes in the cassette, release it.
Note warning label at the Input buffer of the digitizer.

01-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.1 / 12
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.2
Position of the Type Label
figure 5: Position of the type label

01-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.1 / 13
Chapter 3.2
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Tools and Auxiliary Means
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN 6000)

This document describes tools and auxiliary means.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.0
12-2006

Document
Title
Service Bulletin

DD+DIS407.06E



eq_03-2_tools-aux_e_template_v02
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
on the product.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 2
DD+DIS219.06E
Repair and Service

LIST OF CONTENTS
RECOMMENDED TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT ..............................................................5
SERVICE PC (STANDARD).....................................................................................................5
SERVICE PROGRAM OF THE DIGITIZER .............................................................................6

3.1
Overview ...................................................................................................................................6
3.2
Working with the Operation Terminal .......................................................................................8
3.2.2
General Information ..................................................................................................................9
3.3
Active Keys / Allowed Functions .............................................................................................10
3.4
Screen Layout .........................................................................................................................11
3.5
INFO........................................................................................................................................12
3.5.1
Device Info ..............................................................................................................................12
3.5.2
Network Info ............................................................................................................................13
3.6
MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................................................14
3.6.1
SAL-Inspection........................................................................................................................14
3.6.2
Calibration ...............................................................................................................................16
3.6.3
Test Cycle ...............................................................................................................................22
3.6.4
Confirm Maintenance..............................................................................................................25
3.6.5
Confirm Repair ........................................................................................................................26
3.6.6
Confirm Modification ...............................................................................................................28
3.6.7
Confirm Installation .................................................................................................................29
3.6.8
Clear Infocounter ....................................................................................................................30
3.7
SAVE on Floppy......................................................................................................................30
3.7.1
Infocounter File .......................................................................................................................30
3.7.2
Machine specific Data.............................................................................................................32
3.7.3
Service Report ........................................................................................................................33
3.7.4
Snapshot Logs ........................................................................................................................34
3.7.5
Session Files...........................................................................................................................36
3.7.6
CPF File ..................................................................................................................................37
3.7.7
Alert Log File ...........................................................................................................................38
3.8
SHOW Error ............................................................................................................................39
3.8.1
Explain Error Code..................................................................................................................39

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 3
DD+DIS219.06E
Repair and Service

3.8.2
Error Hit List ............................................................................................................................40
3.9
INSTALL from Floppy .............................................................................................................41
3.9.1
Software ..................................................................................................................................41
3.9.2
Machine-specific Data.............................................................................................................44
3.9.3
PMT Settings mfa / mfb ..........................................................................................................45
3.9.4
Optic Parameters ....................................................................................................................46
3.9.5
Scanner Parameters ...............................................................................................................47
3.9.6
CPF File ..................................................................................................................................49
3.9.7
Language Files .......................................................................................................................51
3.9.8
HW Modification ID .................................................................................................................53
3.10
CONFIGURE...........................................................................................................................54
3.10.1
Local Network ID.....................................................................................................................54
3.10.2
User Terminal Language ........................................................................................................55
3.10.3
Active Alert System.................................................................................................................56
3.10.4
Alert System Status ................................................................................................................57
3.10.5
Alert Destination......................................................................................................................57
3.10.6
Send Test Alert .......................................................................................................................58
3.10.7
Set up Direct ID.......................................................................................................................59
3.10.8
Add-on Application..................................................................................................................59
3.11
CHECKS .................................................................................................................................60
3.11.1
System Check .........................................................................................................................61
3.11.2
Send Image.............................................................................................................................61

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 4
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Recommended Tools and Test Equipment

In addition to the common tools every service engineer is carrying in his tool box, the
following auxiliary equipment is required for the service on the Digitizer:
Equipment
Spare Part Number
Application
*service PC
See section 2
service programs
*Interface cable
CM+9 5120 9030 0
RS232,
9 pin / 25 pins SUB D
connection
service PC Digitizer
lens cleaning set
MX+06-07-015
cleaning of optical parts
test images
CD ROM
CM+9 5145 3055 0
checking image quality
ground tape
CM+9 9999 0830 0
replacement of printed circuit boards

/ EPROMs
safety lacquer
to be used after electronic or

mechanical adjustments
CCM tool
see MedNet
configuration tool
Cu filter
CM+9 5155 1015 2
test exposures
Service PC (standard)
NOTE:
The Service PC is used:
to create the adc.cpf file with the CCM tool
to do service via terminal emulation
to run the show error program
As service PC you can use any commercially available laptop.

Service PC connection: Via a RS232 interface on the Digitizer (behind the front door).

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 5
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Service Program of the Digitizer
3.1
Overview
Service level 1
Service level 2
Service level 3
1 INFO
1 Device info
2 Network info
2 MAINTENANCE
1 SAL inspection
2 Calibration
1 IP Center
calibration
2 Shading
calibration
3 Test cycle
1 Scan with
transmission
2 Scan cycle no
image
3 Scan no era, no
imgage
4 Confirm maintenance
5 Confirm repair
6 Confirm modification
7 Confirm installation
8 Clear infocounter
3 SAVE on floppy
1 Infocounter file
2 Machine specific data

3 Service report
4 Snapshot log
5 Session files
6 CPF file
7 Alert log file
4 SHOW error
1 Explain error code
2 Error hit list

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 6
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Service level 1
Service level 2
Service level 3
5 INSTALL from floppy
1 Software
2 Machine specific data

3 PMT settings (mfa/mfb)
4 Optic parameters
5 Scanner parameters
6 CPF file
7 Language files
8 HW modification ID
6 CONFIGURE
1 Local network ID
2 User terminal language
3 Active alert system
1 Alert system status

2 Alert destination
3 Send test alert
4 Direct ID
5 Add on applications
1 Mammography
(50 )
2 GenRad (50 )
3 Full Leg Full Spine
7 CHECKS
1 System check
2 Send image
1 Test image
(mosaic)
2 Flatfield
(calibration
pattern)
3 Flatfield (banding
pattern)
4 Test Sheet (jitter
pattern)
5 Blue LED test
image
6 Mammo test
image 1
7 Mammo test
image 2

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 7
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.2
Working with the Operation Terminal
5155_reg01_002.cdr
figure 1
3.2.1.1
Password
Starts or finishes Service Menu
Password?
515562be.cdr
figure 2
Enter password!
A wrong password results in a long beep. The message "Wrong password!" appears.
Wrong password!
515562ce.cdr
figure 3

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 8
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
NOTE:
If the correct password has not been entered within 4 seconds, the program returns
to the main menu of the key-operator level.
If no key is touched after pressing the service key within 60 sec, the program returns
to the operator level.
3.2.2
General Information
The infocounter file must be contained in the backup (to be restored after fresh SW
installation).
After fresh SW installation the FSE is asked to restore the infocounter and the CPF file,
e.g. Restore infocounter and CPF file
After each intervention where machine specific data, network settings or language
settings are changed, a display message must appear telling: Parameters have
changed, refresh your backup.
As long as the installation has not been confirmed, the operator is asked after each
startup if he wants to confirm. The message is shown on the LCD with repeated beeps
after a successful startup. If confirm is answered positively, the software branches
directly to the Confirm installation option. After confirmation it returns to the operator
level. The function can be cancelled until next startup.
Installation not yet

confirmed!
Press
to confirm now
Installation
Confirmation
: cancel
: ok
Service XXXX
515562de.cdr
figure 4

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 9
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.3
Active Keys / Allowed Functions

ok - starts the highlighted function
cancel - cancels the function and returns to the next
higher menu level
forward or backward scrolling
tag - possibility to select several items out of a list
returns immediately to the operator level, exits the
service level
All other keys are inactive and cause a long beep when typing them.
No timeout is foreseen in the service level.
You can choose between four different action modes:
1. Selection mode
The currently selected item appears highlighted (inverse display).
When you enter a new menu, always the first item of the list is selected by
default.
A new item can be selected by using the up and down keys <
Multiple selections (tags) can be done using < > keys

(known as toggles/selections).
Press < > to confirm your selection or to enter the highlighted

sub-menu.
Press < > to exit the current menu and to return to the next higher level.
>.
2. Instruction mode
In this mode, read the given instructions carefully and follow them
step by step.
3. Information mode
In this mode, information can be read on the display. No interactions are

possible.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 10
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
4. Decision mode
3.4
In this mode, you will be prompted to confirm or cancel the proposed action.
In case a decision is required a double beep comes up every

10 seconds.
Press < > to confirm the action, return to the higher level or to enter the next
screen.
Screen Layout
The same screen layout is used for all service menus. The screen is subdivided into
four windows.
Service menu
2
: cancel
3
: ok
Service XXXX
4
515562ee.cdr
figure 5
the action window
displays selection lists, instructions, information, questions
orientation window
displays the current service menu level
key help window
explains the meaning of the involved keypad buttons
service message
window
displays service messages
and
is displayed if scroll functionality is requested, e.g. if a list

cannot be shown in total
and
is displayed if selection functionality is requested, e.g. if

several items have to be marked in a list

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 11
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.5
INFO
Information about the device, the network, date and time.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
INFO
MAINTENANCE
SAVE on floppy
SHOW error
INSTALL from floppy
CONFIGURE
CHECKS
Service menu
OVERVIEW
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 6
3.5.1
Device Info
Detailed device information.
1 Device info
2 Network info
Service menu
Info
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 7
NOTE:
The station name is displayed, not the hostname
S/N shows the serial# without 5158
<aetitle> and <stationname> are taken from the AE_title respective

StationName cpf items in the following cpf table:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Station:
<stationname> Service menu
S/N:
1024
Info
AE-title: <aetitle>
Device info
Software: c25 2007
Total cycles: 34567

Next PM:
60424
:ok
Last rep.: 01-Jan-1970
02-Mar-2004 14:24:58
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 8
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 12
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.5.2
Network Info
Detailed network information
1 Device info
2 Network info
Service menu
Info
Network info
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 9
The hostname is displayed
<hostname> is taken from the hostname item in the following cpf table:
Hostname: <hostname>
IP-addr: 192.9.200.201
Netmask: 255.255.255.0
D-Router: 192.9.200.254
Mail-Host:192.9.200.210
Service menu
INFO
Network info
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 10

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 13
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.6
MAINTENANCE
Access to maintenance functions
Layout
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
INFO
MAINTENANCE
SAVE on floppy
SHOW error
INSTALL from floppy
CONFIGURE
CHECKS
Service menu
OVERVIEW
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 11
3.6.1
SAL-Inspection
Scope of application:
Procedure to measure the average scan level of an image plate as a result of a certain
stimulation energy. This information can be used in two ways. Either to decide whether
the IP needs to be erased or to find out the correct exposure parameters for a given Xray device. The measured value (scan average level) is displayed on the LCD.
Additionally the corresponding scan line is displayed on the LCD.
Carrying out:
The IP to be inspected is placed into the cassette entry slot and scanned consecutively
with a default speed class setting of 200 - this speed class can be changed by means
of the arrows.
For each pixel the average of 100 lines is taken: 50 lines to the middle line - the
function applies for all formats as initialized on the cassette RF-Tag.
The IP will be erased after this scan with default erasure dose (same as in ERASEmode).
As long as this menu is active the operator can put as many cassettes into the cassette
entry slot as needed.
The action starts when the cassette is in the cassette entry slot.
The function is active as long as the cassette is in the cassette entry slot.
After display of the scan result the screen needs to be confirmed.
If an identified cassette is detected a warning is displayed and the user has to confirm
the function (see erase function).
Settings:
: select speed class: 25-50-75-100-150-200-300-400-600-800-1200 (default speed
class = 200)
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 14
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Layout:
4 digits are reserved for speed class and SAL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SAL-inspection
Calibration
Test cycle
Confirm maintenance
Confirm repair
Confirm modification
Confirm installation
Clear infocounter
Service menu
Maintenance
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 12
Please select the speed

class for SAL inspection
200
...select with or
Service menu
Maintenance
SAL inspection
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 13
Default
speed class = 200
Place cassette for

inspection into the
cassette entry slot
Service menu
Maintenance
SAL inspection
:cancel
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 14
SAL inspection pending.

Wait for result...
Service menu
Maintenance
SAL inspection
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 15
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 15
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Cassette ID: XXXXX

SAL:
264
...press
to continue
Service menu
Maintenance
SAL inspection
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 16
The scanned line is displayed on the LCD, the screen comes with a double beep.
3.6.2
(1)
Press
to confirm the SAL-Inspection for that IP. If available, the next IP in the
row is inspected.
(2)
Press
to cancel the function and returns to the next higher level.
Calibration
Procedure to determine shading correction factors for all image plate formats. The
resulting scan line is displayed on the LCD. Additional information about cassette
formats, calibration results, possible fail reasons and detected SAL is given.
Carrying out:
(1)
Select Calibration from the maintenance menu.
(2)
Expose a cassette according to the calibration exposure instructions.
(3)
Insert exposed cassette.
(4)
If necessary, select the format to be calibrated from the displayed list.
(5)
If calibration fails, repeat exposure with adapted values or check the optics if
displayed scan line is interrupted.
(6)
If the function is cancelled, the user is prompted to remove the cassette and to
press confirm.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SAL-inspection
Calibration
Test cycle
Confirm maintenance
Confirm repair
Clear infocounter
Service menu
Maintenance
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 17
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 16
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Exceptions:
If an identified cassette (regular identification via ID station, status exposed, to be

erased) is detected, a warning is displayed and the user has to confirm the calibration
function.
Messages:
Cassette is identified with patient data.
Cassette is identified
with patient data.
Press
to calibrate
or
to scan.
Service menu
Maintenance
Calibration
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 18
3.6.2.1
IP Center Calibration (BOL/BOS)

1 IP Center Calibration
2 Shading Calibration
Service menu
Maintenance
Calibration
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 19
Exposure parameters:
Filter: 1.5 mm Cu
2 exposures a 10 microGy
turn 180 degree
(Approx. FFDist. 1.3 m,
12 mAs, 75 kVp)
Insert cassette 24x30cm
or smaller.
Service menu
Calibration
IP Center
:cancel
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 20
If a format 10 x 8", 24 x 18 cm, 24 x 30 cm is detected, the calibration procedure starts
immediately.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 17
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
IP Center Calibration
pending...
Service menu
Calibration
IP Center
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 21
successful.
Service menu
Calibration
IP Center
Run a Shading Calib. now

(Recommended).
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 22
In case IP Center Calibration adjustment was successful.
(1)
Press
to return to the calibration screen.
Failed - underexposed
"Dose is too low"
...press
to repeat
Service menu
Calibration
IP Center
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 23
In case IP Center Calibration adjustment fails, dose is too low.
The screen returns to Exposure parameters.
(2)
Press

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 18
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Failed - overexposed
"Dose is too high"
...press
to repeat
Service menu
Calibration
IP Center
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 24
In case IP Center Calibration adjustment fails, dose is too high.
The screen returns to Exposure parameters.
(3)
3.6.2.2
Press
Shading Calibration
Which format shall be
calibrated?
35x43 cm fast
35x43 cm slow
24x30 cm Mammo
ok
ok
Service menu
Calibration
Shading
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 25
(1)
Press
(2)
Press
to enter next screen.
The screen comprises the cassette size information (e.g. 35 x 43 cm) and the
calibration step (e.g. fast).
If a smaller format than the proposed one is entered, the following screen pops up:
Format is smaller than
recommended!
Shading calibration will
only be valid for
calibrated format and
smaller ones.
Service menu
Calibration
Shading
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 26
(3)
Press
(4)
Press
to enter next screen.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 19
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Filter: 1.5 mm Cu
2 exposures a 10 microGy
turn 180 degree
12 mAs, 75 kVp)
Service menu
Calibration
Shading
:cancel
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 27
The action starts as soon as a cassette is inserted
Calibration of format
<selected format>
pending...
Service menu
Calibration
Shading
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 28
<selected format> is:
35 x 43 cm
fast
this corresponds to a pixel time of

1 s, 100 m mode
35 x 43 cm
slow
this corresponds to a pixel time of

2 s, 100 m mode
24 x 30 cm
Mammo this corresponds to a pixel time of

1 s, 50 m mode
35x43 cm fast
Calibration successful
SAL: 2356, Dose okay
...press
to continue
Service menu
Calibration
Shading
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 29
In case of a successful calibration the calibration line is stored automatically (no
interaction necessary).
(5)
Press
to return to the shading calibration menu.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 20
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
In case the exposure dose was too low, the following screen pops up
with a long beep:
35x43 cm fast
Failure - underexposed!
SAL: 1648, try 2x mAs
...press
to repeat
Service menu
Calibration
Shading
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 30
In case the exposure dose was too high, the following screen pops up
with a long beep:
35x43 cm fast
Failure - overexposed!
SAL: 4096, try half mAs
...press
to repeat
Service menu
Calibration
Shading
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 31
Digitizer is now waiting for next exposed cassette to be calibrated or returns to the
shading calibration screen.
In case the cassette was not entirely exposed or the optics are not adjusted, the
following screen pops up with a long beep:
35x43 cm fast
Calibration failed!
Check coll. and optics
...press
to repeat
Service menu
Calibration
Shading
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 32
Digitizer is now waiting for next exposed cassette to be calibrated or returns to the
shading calibration screen.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 21
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.6.3
Test Cycle
Starts endurance cycles to check the reliability of the mechanics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SAL-inspection
Calibration
Test cycle
Confirm maintenance
Confirm repair
Clear infocounter
Service menu
Maintenance
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 33
3.6.3.1
Scan with Transmission
requires identified cassette
cycles cassette and IP
scans the IP
erases IP
transmits image as identified
informs about the current cycle number
action runs until the selected number of cycles is reached
can be aborted with
Layout:
4 digits are reserved for number of cycles
1
2
3
4
Scan with transmission

Scan cycle no image
Scan no era, no img
Handling cycle
Service menu
Maintenance
Test cycle
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 34
Use and to
select no of cycles:
XXXX
Service menu
Maintenance
Test cycle
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 35
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 22
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
No of cycles selected:
150
Current run:
64
Service menu
Maintenance
Test cycle
:cancel
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 36
3.6.3.2
Scan Cycle - No Image
scans the IP
erases IP
does not transmit the image
informs about the current cycle number
can be aborted with
Layout:
4 digits are reserved for number of cycles
1
2
3
4

Scan cycle - no image
Scan - no era, no img
Handling cycle
Service menu
Maintenance
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 37
Use and to
select no of cycles:
XXXX
Service menu
MAINTENANCE
Test cycle
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 38
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 23
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
No of cycles selected:
150
Current run:
64
Service menu
MAINTENANCE
Test cycle
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 39
3.6.3.3
scans IP
does not erase
can be aborted with
1
2
3
4

Handling cycle
Service menu
Maintenance
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 40
The user is informed about the mode.
Schematic layout, see menu Scan cycle no img.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 24
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.6.3.4
Handling Cycle
cycles regardless if cassette is identified or not
cycles IP
does not scan IP
does not erase
can be aborted with
1
2
3
4

Handling cycle
Service menu
Maintenance
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 41
The user is informed about the mode.
Schematic layout, see menu Scan cycle no img.
3.6.4
Confirm Maintenance
Procedure to confirm a finished preventive maintenance with date and counter stamp.
The entry is saved in the info counter file. After pressing confirm, the operator is asked
if he wants to clear the relative counters. The reset of the relative counters is linked to
the event Maintenance.
Layout:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SAL-inspection
Calibration
Test cycle
Confirm maintenance
Confirm repair
Clear infocounter
Service menu
Maintenance
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 42

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 25
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
To confirm this
maintenance press
Meter reading: xxxxxx
Date: <dd-mmm-yyyy>
Service menu
Maintenance
Confirm PM
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 43
(1)
Press
to return to the maintenance screen.
(2)
Press
to enter the next screen.
Do you want me to clear

the info counters?
(recommended)
Service menu
Maintenance
Confirm PM
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 44
3.6.5
(3)
Press
(4)
Press
to clear the relative info counter entries.
Confirm Repair
Procedure to confirm a successful repair with date stamp. The entry is saved in the info
counter file. After pressing confirm, the operator is asked if he wants to clear the
relative counters. The reset of the relative counters is linked to the event Repair.
Layout:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SAL-inspection
Calibration
Test cycle
Confirm maintenance
Confirm repair
Clear infocounter
Service menu
Maintenance
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 45
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 26
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
To confirm a successful
repair press
Date: <dd-mmm-yyyy>
Service menu
Maintenance
Confirm repair
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 46
(1)
Press
(2)
Press

the info counters?
(recommended)
Service menu
Maintenance
Confirm repair
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 47
(3)
Press
(4)
. Press


12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 27
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.6.6
Confirm Modification
Layout:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SAL-inspection
Calibration
Test cycle
Confirm maintenance
Confirm repair
Clear infocounter
Service menu
Maintenance
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 48
To confirm a successful
modification press
Date: <dd-mmm-yyyy>
Service menu
Maintenance
Confirm modif.
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 49
(1)
Press
(2)
Press

the info counters?
(recommended)
Service menu
Maintenance
Confirm modif
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 50
(3)
Press
(4)
Press

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 28
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.6.7
Confirm Installation
Procedure to confirm the device installation with a date stamp. The entry is saved in
the info counter file.
The confirmation automatically clears the relative info counter entries.
Layout:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SAL-inspection
Calibration
Test cycle
Confirm maintenance
Confirm repair
Clear infocounter
Service menu
Maintenance
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 51
(1)
Press
(2)
Press
To confirm this
installation press
Date: <dd-mmm-yyyy>
Service menu
Maintenance
Install date
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 52
(3)
Press
(4)
Press

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 29
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.6.8
Clear Infocounter
Free option to clear the relative infocounter entries without a forced link to a special
service intervention. The reset is linked in the infocounter file to the dummy event
Test. Date and counter stamp are added.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SAL-inspection
Calibration
Test cycle
Confirm maintenance
Confirm repair
Clear infocounter
Service menu
Maintenance
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 53
3.7
SAVE on Floppy
Save files on floppy.
Layout
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
INFO
MAINTENANCE
SAVE on floppy
SHOW error
INSTALL from floppy
CONFIGURE
CHECKS
Service menu
OVERVIEW
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 54
3.7.1
Infocounter File
(1)
Select this menu to save the info counter file on floppy.

- By default, the data is saved under A:\C25<serial#><A-Z>.ICN
Example: A:\C252034A.ICN
- If there already is an info counter file on the floppy, the last letter
of the file name is increased in alphabetical order
(no files are overwritten!).

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 30
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
- Info counters (relative counters) can be cleared by means of

maintenance or repair confirmation or manually by selecting
menu Clear infocounter.
- Exceptions (e.g. error handling, messages in case of no floppy
available, write protection, full floppy, etc.) are displayed on the
LCD as clear and understandable text,
e.g. Floppy is write protected.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Info counter file

Machine specific data
Service report
Snapshot log
Session files
CPF-File
Alert log file
Service menu
SAVE
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 55
Please insert a floppy

and press
Service menu
SAVE
Info counter
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 56
Service menu
SAVE
Info counter
copying...
D:<file name>
To
A:<file name>
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 57
Please remove the floppy

and press
Service menu
SAVE
Info counter
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 58

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 31
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.7.2
Machine specific Data

(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select this menu to create a backup floppy with machine-specific data.
Info counter file

Service report
Snapshot log
Session files
CPF-File
Alert log file
Service menu
SAVE
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 59
(2)
Click <ok>.
A zipped file C25_<serial#>.zip containing all backup files, is created on the
hard disk.

and press
Service menu
SAVE
Machine data
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 60
the floppy gets a volume label C25_<serial#>
the zip file is copied to A:\C25_<serial#>.BAC\C25_<serial#>.zip
an existing backup sub-directory is being renamed to

A:\C25_<serial#>.BCO
the zip file under an already existing A:\C25_<serial#>.BCO directory is

being overwritten
copying...
D:\C25_<serial#>.zip
To
A:<path><file name>
Service menu
SAVE
Machine data
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 61

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 32
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(3)
At the end, the following screen is displayed.

Label the floppy as described.
Label the floppy:

Backup CR25.0
S/N: <serial#>
Date: <date>
SW-version: c25_2007
and press
Service menu
SAVE
Machine data
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 62
3.7.3
Service Report
(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select this menu to create a service report during a service session.
a service session starts when the service mode is activated
all activities are logged with date and time stamp
ring buffer principle with 20 sessions
saves the service report file on floppy
the data is saved under A:\C25_<serial#>.RPT, e.g. A:\C25_2046.RPT
an existing report file is being renamed to *.RPO
an existing *.RPO file is being overwritten
Info counter file

Service report
Snapshot log
Session files
CPF-File
Alert log file
Service menu
SAVE
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 63

and press
Service menu
SAVE
Service report
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 64
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 33
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
copying...
D:<file name>
to
A:<file name>
Service menu
SAVE
Service report
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 65

and press
Service menu
SAVE
Service report
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 66
3.7.4
Snapshot Logs
(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select this menu to copy a Snapshot log (compressed) on floppy.
the files are saved under A:\C25_<serial#>_<error code #>incrementing

id.zip, e.g. A:\C25_2046_2060B_2.zip
one, several or all snapshot log can be selected (tagged) by means of

the - keys
tagged files are marked with <>
if there are more files in the list than can be displayed a <> symbolizes
the scroll option
if there is not enough disk space another floppy is asked for
Info counter file

Service report
Snapshot log
Session files
CPF-File
Alert log file
Service menu
SAVE
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 67
(2)
Press
to go back to the menu save on floppy.
(3)
Press
to go to next screen.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 34
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
All Snapshot logs

2060B_2 04-Feb-04 11:26*
2060B_1 01-Feb-04 10:43*
247B0_1 23-Jan-04 17:08
Service menu
Save
Snapshot log
:cancel
:ok
:tag
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 68
copying...
D:<file name>
to
A:<file name>
Service menu
SAVE
Snapshot log
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 69
Floppy is full.
Please insert another
floppy and press
Service menu
SAVE
Snapshot log
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 70

and press
Service menu
SAVE
Snapshot log
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 71

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 35
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.7.5
Session Files
(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select this menu to copy session files (compressed) on floppy.
the files are saved under A:\C25_<serial#>\#.ses, e.g.

A:\C25_2046\143.ses
one, several or all session files can be selected (tagged) by means of

the - keys
tagged files are marked with <>
if there are more files in the list than can be displayed a <> symbolizes
the scroll option
if there is not enough disk space another floppy is asked for
leading signs 0 will be suppressed, e.g. 005.ses -> 5.ses
Info counter file

Service report
Snapshot log
Session files
CPF-File
Alert log file
Service menu
SAVE
Session files
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 72
All session files

1.ses*
2.ses*
3.ses
4.ses
5.ses
Service menu
SAVE
Session file
:cancel
:ok
:tag
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 73
copying...
D:<file name>
to
A:<file name>
Service menu
SAVE
Session file
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 74

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 36
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Floppy is full.
Please insert another
floppy and press
Service menu
SAVE
Session file
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 75
3.7.6
CPF File
(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select this menu to copy the customer parameter file (CPF) from
hard disk to floppy.
Info counter file

Service report
Snapshot log
Session files
CPF-File
Alert log file
Service menu
SAVE
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 76

and press
Service menu
SAVE
CPF File
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 77
copying...
D:<file name>
to
A:<file name>
Service menu
SAVE
CPF File
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 78

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 37
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E

and press
Service menu
SAVE
CPF File
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 79
3.7.7
Alert Log File

(1)
Select this menu to copy the alert log file to floppy.

-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
The file contains 50 entries.

The format of the file is like the service report.
The contents of the sent e-mail is logged.
Naming of the file: C25_<serial#>.ALR, e.g. C25_2046.ALR
Info counter file

Service report
Snapshot log
Session files
CPF-File
Alert log file
Service menu
SAVE
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 80

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 38
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.8
SHOW Error
(1)
Select this menu to

- display error codes in clear text
- display error hit list.
- display explanation of errors and warnings.
Layout
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
INFO
MAINTENANCE
SAVE on floppy
SHOW error
INSTALL from floppy
CONFIGURE
CHECKS
Service menu
OVERVIEW
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 81
3.8.1
Explain Error Code

(1)
Select this menu to get an explanation of the highlighted error (warning) code.
Date and time of occurrence is displayed.
(2)
Selected the code using the

keys.
The current device error or warning status is highlighted.

2 Error hit list
Service menu
SHOW error
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 82
Code
Occurred last
XXXXX 04-Feb-97 11:26

XXXXX 26-Jan-97 14:58
XXXXX
12-Jan-97 09:34
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
Service menu
SHOW error
Explain code
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 83
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 39
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Messages are sorted by date.
Text...
XXXXX
Service menu
Show error
Explain code
:cancel
:scroll
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 84
3.8.2
Error Hit List

(1)
Select this menu to get a list of the five most frequent errors.
(2)
Go to menu "Explain error code" to get an explanation of the error code.
(3)
Go back to error hit list with <cancel>.

2 Error hit list
Service menu
SHOW error
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 85
Code:
Frequency:
absolute
relative
00342
00541
95462
12124
99999
27
23
9
4
1
Service menu
SHOW error
6
4
4
3
1
Hit list
:cancel
:ok
:scroll
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 86

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 40
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.9
INSTALL from Floppy

(1)
Select this menu to copy selected files from floppy to hard disk and initializes
new software.
Layout
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
INFO
MAINTENANCE
SAVE on floppy
SHOW error
INSTALL from floppy
CONFIGURE
CHECKS
Service menu
OVERVIEW
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 87
3.9.1
Software
(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select this menu to copy device software from floppy to hard disk and initialize
the new software.
all concerning file names are displayed during the copy process
after software installation the user is prompted to create a new backup

floppy
an entry is made in the infocounter under SW modification history, date,

meter reading
Software
PMT settings (mfa/mfb)
Optic parameters
Scanner parameters
cpf-file
Language files
HW modification ID
Service menu
INSTALL
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 88
Please insert the first

floppy C252007_1_3
and press
Service menu
INSTALL
Software
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 89
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 41
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Checking
the volume label...
Volume is
<label>
Service menu
INSTALL
Software
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 90
If the volume label is not correct, a message Wrong or missing volume label pops up
(long beep).
copying...
A:<file name>
to
E:\temp\<file>
Service menu
INSTALL
Software
:cancel
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 91
(2)
Insert next floppy.
Please insert the

floppy C252007_2_3
And press
Service menu
INSTALL
Software
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 92
please wait ...

Extracting files from
E:\temp
Service menu
INSTALL
Software
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 93

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 42
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E

and press
Service menu
INSTALL
Software
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 94
To initialize the new SW

a reset is necessary
Press
to reset now
Service menu
INSTALL
Software
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 95
(3)
Press
to initialize new software.
(4)
After the first start-up of the new software press

a new backup.
New software detected.

You should refresh your
backup now.
Please insert the backup
floppy and press
and insert a floppy to create
Service menu
INSTALL
Software
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 96
(5)
Press
to go to Save machine specific data.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 43
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.9.2
Machine-specific Data
(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select this menu to restore machine-specific data (machine backup) from

floppy to hard disk.
the volume label is checked
the concerning file name C25_<serial#>.ZIP is displayed during the copy

process
the zip file is automatically unzipped
Software
Optic parameters
Scanner parameters
CPF-file
Language files
HW modification ID
Service menu
INSTALL
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 97

floppy and press
Service menu
INSTALL
Machine data
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 98
Please wait...
Extracting backup files
Service menu
INSTALL
Machine data
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 99

and press
Service menu
INSTALL
Machine data
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 100

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 44
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.9.3
PMT Settings mfa / mfb

(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select this menu to copy file with mfa / mfb from PMT floppy to
hard disk.
overwrites existing files
the concerning file name is displayed during the copy process
request to save changes on service exit
Software
Optic parameters
Scanner parameters
CPF-file
Language files
HW modification ID
Service menu
INSTALL
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 101
After
Photo multiplier change:
Please insert the
PMT-floppy and press
Service menu
INSTALL
Mfa/mfb
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 102
(2)
Verify if the serial number of the label is the same as the serial number of the
new part.
- The SN is displayed on the screen.
- The SN is automatically stored in the infocounter under
hardware replacement history
Service menu
copying <file name> ...
INSTALL
Mfa/mfb
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 103
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 45
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
If possible, the new value should be active immediately without reset.

and press
Service menu
INSTALL
Mfa/mfb
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 104
(3)
3.9.4
Refresh the backup when exiting the service menu.
Optic Parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Software
Optic parameters
Scanner parameters
CPF-file
Language files
HW modification ID
Service menu
INSTALL
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 105
After laser change:
Please insert the optic
Module floppy
and press
Service menu
INSTALL
Laser factor
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 106
(1)
new part.
copying <file name> ...
Service menu
INSTALL
Laser factor
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 107
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 46
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E

and press
Service menu
INSTALL
Laser factor
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 108
You introduced a new
component in the optical
Path
A new calibration is
necessary
Press
to calibrate...
Service menu
INSTALL
Laser factor
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 109
3.9.5
Scanner Parameters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Software
Optic parameters
Scanner parameters
CPF-file
Language files
HW modification ID
Service menu
INSTALL
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 110
After scanner
replacement:
Please insert the
scanner floppy
and press
Service menu
INSTALL
Scanner
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 111

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 47
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(1)
new part.
copying <file name>...
Service menu
INSTALL
Scanner
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 112

and press
Service menu
INSTALL
Scanner
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 113
You introduced a new
component in the optical
path.
A new calibration is
necessary.
Press
to calibrate...
Service menu
INSTALL
Scanner
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 114
(2)
Press
to go the calibration menu.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 48
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.9.6
CPF File
(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select this menu to copy the CPF file from floppy to hard disk.
overwrites the existing file
the concerning file name is displayed during the copy process
refers to the "configure local network ID" - screen
Software
Optic parameters
Scanner parameters
CPF-file
Language files
HW modification ID
Service menu
INSTALL
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 115
Please insert
the CPF-floppy
and press
Service menu
INSTALL
CPF-file
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 116
copying <file name>...
Service menu
INSTALL
CPF-file
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 117

and press
Service menu
COPY
CPF-file
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 118

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 49
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(2)
Press
to check if image queue is empty:
If the queue is not empty:
Image queue not empty!

Check the queue then
restart CONFIGURE Local network-ID
Press
to continue...
Service menu
INSTALL
CPF-file
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 119
If the queue is empty:
Confirm ID or
CR250xxxxxxx1
CR250xxxxxxx2
CR250xxxxxxx3
CR250xxxxxxx4
CR250xxxxxxx5
CR250xxxxxxx6
CR250xxxxxxx7
select new
.....201
.....202
.....203
.....204
.....205
.....206
.....207
Service menu
CONFIGURE
Local net ID
:cancel
:ok :more
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 120
the name CR250xxxxxxx1 is the AE-title of the digitizer
the current valid network ID is highlighted
ok- initializes the new settings
If the cpf file is corrupted, it is rejected by the digitizer and following message appears:
CPF-File is corrupted.
Repeat with a correct
one.
Service menu
CONFIGURE
Local net ID
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 121
(3)
Press
to go back to the installation menu.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 50
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(4)
After activation of the new CPF a new backup is requested.

Press to go to Save machine specific data.
Parameters have changed.

Backup now.
Floppy and press
Service menu
CONFIGURE
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 122
3.9.7
Language Files
(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select this menu to copy the language files from floppy to hard disk.
the concerning file names are displayed during the copy process
branches to the "configure user terminal language" - screen
request to save changes when exiting service
Software
Optic parameters
Scanner parameters
CPF-file
Language files
HW modification ID
Service menu
INSTALL
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 123
Please insert the

language floppy
C25_2007
and press
Service menu
INSTALL
Language files
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 124
it is checked whether the language floppy is compatible with the current

software version
if the language floppy does not fit, a warning is displayed

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 51
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
copying...
A:<file name>
to
C:<file name>
Service menu
INSTALL
Language files
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 125

and press
Service menu
INSTALL
Language files
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 126
Do you want me to change

my user terminal
language?
Service menu
INSTALL
Language files
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 127
(2)
If yes, go to menu "Configure user terminal language".

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 52
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.9.8
HW Modification ID
(1)
Select this menu to read the modification ID (service part no.)

from floppy.
(2)
Check if modification ID on the floppy label is the same as the modification ID

of the new part.
(3)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
the HW mod. ID with its description is displayed on the screen
the modification ID and description are automatically stored in the info

counter under hardware modification history
one floppy can contain several modification IDs
Save changes when exiting the menu.
Software
Optic parameters
Scanner parameters
CPF-file
Language files
HW modification ID
Service menu
INSTALL
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 128
Example:
Did you mount...?
CM+9 5155 xxxx 2
IP transport
Press
to confirm
Service menu
INSTALL
HW modific.
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 129

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 53
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.10
CONFIGURE
Selection of local station name or user terminal language.
Layout
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
INFO
MAINTENANCE
SAVE on floppy
SHOW error
INSTALL from floppy
CONFIGURE
CHECKS
Service menu
OVERVIEW
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 130
3.10.1
Local Network ID
(1)
Select this menu to get a list of possible station names

(out of the CPF).
(2)
Select desired name using
(3)
Press
(4)
1
2
3
4
-keys.
to initialize the new name.
Local network ID
User terminal language
Active Alert System
Direct ID
Service menu
CONFIGURE
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 131
Select from list
CR250xxxxxxx1 .....201
Service menu
CONFIGURE
Local net ID
:cancel
:ok :more
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 132
The name CR250xxxxxxx1 is the AE-title of the digitizer
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 54
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(5)
Press
to go back to the menu configure.
(6)
Press
to save settings and go back to the menu configure.
(7)
After confirmation with OK the screen to refresh the backup appears.

Press to go to menu Save machine specific data.

backup now.
floppy and press
Service menu
CONFIGURE
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 133
3.10.2
User Terminal Language

(1)
Select this menu to get a list of selectable languages.

Note, only HD resident language files can be selectable.
(2)
Select the desired language using the
(3)
Press
(4)
1
2
3
4
-keys.
to initialize the new name.
Local network ID
Active Alert System
Direct ID
Service menu
CONFIGURE
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 134
Select from list:
Dutch
English (default)
French
German
Italian
Dutch
Spanish
Service menu
CONFIGURE
Language
:cancel
:ok :more
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 135
(5)
Press
to go back to the menu configure.
(6)
Press
to save settings and go back to the menu configure.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 55
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(7)
After confirmation with OK the screen to refresh the backup appears.

Press to go to menu Save machine specific data.

backup now.
floppy and press
Service menu
CONFIGURE
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 136
NOTE:
3.10.3
Only the main language is displayed.
No distinction between regional language differences,

e.g. German for Austria, English for Australia is made.
Active Alert System

The alert system is able to monitor the status of the device. If certain thresholds are
reached a message (e-mail) is sent to a specified destination. The alert system is used
for preventive maintenance.
(1)
.Switch on/off the mechanism.
(2)
Configure destination.
1
2
3
4
Local network ID
Active Alert System
Direct ID
Service menu
CONFIGURE
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 137
(3)
Select the Active Alert System...

2 Alert destination
3 Send test alert
Service menu
CONFIGURE
Alert System
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 138
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 56
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.10.4
Alert System Status

2 Alert destination
3 Send test alert
Service menu
CONFIGURE
Alert System
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 139
Alert system status
disable
Change status with
Alert destination:
10.6.5.152
Alert sent: 0
Service menu
CONFIGURE
Alert System
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 140
3.10.5
Alert Destination
2 Alert destination
3 Send test alert
Service menu
CONFIGURE
Alert System
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 141
Current alert
destination:
010.006.005.152
change digit:
change position:
Service menu
CONFIGURE
Alert System
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 142
NOTE:
The IP address of the alert destination (mail host) can be entered manually with the
arrow keys.
Only valid addresses (< 255) are accepted.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 57
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.10.6
Send Test Alert

2 Alert destination
3 Send test alert
Service menu
Configure
Alert system
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 143
The function sends a predefined test email to the configured destination.
A successful delivery is confirmed with a message and a double beep.
Sending test alert to
192.9.200.250
Email successfully sent
Service menu
Configure
Alert system
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 144
In case the destination is not reachable the following message comes up with a long
beep:
Sending test alert to
192.9.200.250
Email delivery failure
Service menu
Configure
Alert system
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 145

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 58
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.10.7
Set up Direct ID
1
2
3
4
Local network ID
Active Alert System
Direct ID
Service menu
CONFIGURE
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 146
(1)
Select Direct-ID direct ID off or the ID-viewer you want to be connected to.
Select from list:

<direct ID off>
ID-viewer1-192.9.200.202
ID-viewer2-192.9.200.203
ID-viewer3-192.9.200.204
Service menu
Configure
:cancel
:ok :more
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 147
3.10.8
Add-on Application
(1)
Select this menu to enable/disable add-on applications for the digitizer.

A list of possible add-on applications will be offered.
(2)
Select the desired add-on application using the
-keys.
(3)
(4)
1
2
3
4
Refresh backup when exiting the menu.
Local network ID
Alert system
Add-on applications
Service menu
Configure
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 148

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 59
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Select from list:

1 Mammography (50m)
Service menu
Configure
Application
:cancel
:ok | :more
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 149
(5)
The second line displays the selected Add-on application.

Enable/disable mentioned add-application with the
keys.
(6)
Press
to initialize the add-on application.
(7)
Press
to jump back to the prior screen without saving.
This screen has to be built for each add-on application

Status of
Selected application
enabled
Change status with
Service menu
Configure
Application
:cancel
:ok |
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 150
3.11
(8)
Press
to save changes and exit menu.
(9)
Press
to jump back to the prior screen without saving.
CHECKS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
INFO
MAINTENANCE
SAVE on floppy
SHOW error
INSTALL from floppy
CONFIGURE
CHECKS
Service menu
OVERVIEW
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 151
(1)
Press
to go back to next higher level (service menu).
(2)
Press
to go to the next screen.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 60
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.11.1
System Check
The system check is a non interactive test that lists the current status of the digitizer
(voltages, stepper motor connections, light barrier status, nodes ...). The result of this
list is stored in a file on the hard disk of the digitizer.
1 System check
2 Send image
Service menu
Checks
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 152
3.11.2
(1)
Press
(2)
Press
to start system check.
Send Image
(1)
Select this menu to send images from the hard disk to the processing station.
1 System check
2 Send image
Service menu
Checks
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 153
(2)
Press
(3)
Press
to go to the next screen.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 61
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.11.2.1
Test Image (mosaic)

(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select this menu to send the test image to the processing station.
Test image (mosaic)

Flatfield calibration
Flatfield banding
Test sheet (jitter)
Blue LED test image
Mammo test image 1
Mammo test image 2
Service menu
Checks
Send image
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 154
3.11.2.2
(2)
Press
(3)
Press
to send test images.
Flatfield (calibration)
(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select this menu to send the flatfield (calibration) to the processing station.
Test image (mosaic)

Flatfield banding
Test sheet (jitter)
Blue LED test image
Mammo test image 1
Mammo test image 2
Service menu
Checks
Send image
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 155
(2)
Press
(3)
Press
to send flatfield.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 62
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.11.2.3
Flatfield (banding)
(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select this menu to send the flatfield (banding) to the processing station.
Test image (mosaic)

Flatfield banding
Test sheet (jitter)
Blue LED test image
Mammo test image 1
Mammo test image 2
Service menu
Checks
Send image
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 156
3.11.2.4
(2)
Press
(3)
Press
to send flatfield.
Test Sheet (jitter)

(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select this menu to send the test sheet (jitter) to the processing station.
Test image (mosaic)

Flatfield banding
Test sheet (jitter)
Blue LED test image
Mammo test image 1
Mammo test image 2
Service menu
Checks
Send image
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 157
(2)
Press
(3)
Press
to send test images.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 63
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.11.2.5
Blue LED Test Image

(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select this menu to send the blue LED test image to the processing station.
Test image (mosaic)

Flatfield banding
Test sheet (jitter)
Blue LED test image
Mammo test image 1
Mammo test image 2
Service menu
Checks
Send image
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 158
3.11.2.6
(2)
Press
(3)
Press
to send blue LED test image.
Mammo Test Image 1

(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select this menu to send the Mammo test image 1 to the processing station.
Test image (mosaic)

Flatfield banding
Test sheet (jitter)
Blue LED test image
Mammo test image 1
Mammo test image 2
Service menu
Checks
Send image
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 159
(2)
Press
(3)
Press
to send Mammo test image 1.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 64
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
3.11.2.7
Mammo Test Image 2

(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select this menu to send the Mammo test image 2 to the processing station.
Test image (mosaic)

Flatfield banding
Test sheet (jitter)
Blue LED test image
Mammo test image 1
Mammo test image 2
Service menu
Checks
Send image
:cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
figure 160
(2)
Press
(3)
Press
to send Mammo test image 2.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.2 / 65
Chapter 3.3
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Troubleshooting
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN 6000)

This document describes how to locate errors and make checks by means of the
Service menu of the Digitizer.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.0
12-2006

Document
Service Bulletin
Title

DD+DIS407.06E



eq_03-3_troubleshooting_e_template_v02
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS219.06E
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
on the product.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.3 / 2
DD+DIS219.06E
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
LIST OF CONTENTS
GENERAL PROCEDURE.........................................................................................................4
1.1
Show Error ................................................................................................................................5
1.2
Checks ......................................................................................................................................6

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.3 / 3
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS219.06E
General Procedure
Error occurrs
Error code is
displayed
Select
<Show Error>
Function
see 1.1
Select
<System Check>
see 1.2
Error is located
Corrective
Measures
5155_reg3.3_001.cdr
figure 1
NOTE:
Additionally check Infocounter: see Chapter 9, Maintenance, "How to evaluate the
infocounter"
Evaluate diagnostic images for deficiencies (e.g. jitter)

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.3 / 4
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS219.06E
1.1
Show Error
(1)
Enter the Service menu
(2)
Select
4 Show error
(3)
Select in error code history

corresponding entry
Code
Occurred last
22570
20605
04-Feb-99 15:45
09-Jan-99 11:32
Service menu
Show error
: cancel
: ok
5155_reg3.3_002.cdr
figure 2
(4)
Reason, meaning and cure of

error are listed
22570 detected
Reason: Cassette module
1. Power supply test of
stepper node roll
failed
Meaning: No Power supply
on stepper node
Service menu
Show error
Explain code
: cancel
: scroll
5155_reg3.3_003.cdr
figure 3
Service menu
Show error
Explain code
22570 detected
- Power supply not
connected
- Fuse blown
- Power supply
defective
: cancel
: scroll
5155_reg3.3_004.cdr
figure 4
(5)
Carry out the checks listed at

cure.
To verify that error is not
sporadic, also a quick check can
be carried out.
22570 detected
Cure: - Check cables
and connectors
- Check replace fuse
- Check replace power
supply
Service menu
Show error
Explain code
: cancel
: scroll
5155_reg3.3_005.cdr
figure 5

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.3 / 5
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS219.06E
1.2
Checks
(1)
Enter the Service menu
(2)
Select
8 Checks
1 System check
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
System check
Check laser
Check destinations
Check disk
Send flatfield
Send jitter pattern
Check I/O-bus
Send Mammo Testimage
Service menu
Checks
: cancel
: ok
5156_reg3.3_006.cdr
figure 6
(3)
System check is starting.

All actions are executed in
same order as during normal
operation.
(4)
The file Snapshot.txt is

generated on partition d:\
which informs you about the
status of the machine.
You can use e.g. notepad to
view it.
NOTE:
As an alternative, you can connect your Service PC to the serial port and enter "diag" at
the prompt to start the diagnostic tool.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.3 / 6
Chapter 3.4
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN 6000)

This document describes Electrical and Mechanical Codes, Fuses and LEDs of the
Digitizer.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.0
12-2006

Document
Title
Service Bulletin

DD+DIS407.06E



eq_03-4_codings_e_template_v02
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
on the product.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.4 / 2
DD+DIS219.06E
Repair and Service

LIST OF CONTENTS
CODING OF THE STEPPER MOTOR CONTROL BOARDS ..................................................4
I/O-BUS ADDRESSES OF BOARDS .......................................................................................5
JUMPER CONFIGURATION OF THE HARD DISK .................................................................5

3.1
SCSI Hard Disk .........................................................................................................................5
FUSES OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................6
OVERVIEW OF DIAGNOSTIC LEDS.......................................................................................6

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.4 / 3
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Coding of the Stepper Motor Control Boards

GS IOB-SIN-STEP Boards:
CM+9 9499 8140 x
GS
Designation
IO-Bus
Address
Switch
410
Scan Unit
Scan rolls lift board
37H
JL1
Jumper Settings
JL1
1
JLGS410.cdr
ST 10
2A 4A
ST10
ST10_2.cdr
412
Scan Unit Slowscan board 36H
JL1
JL1
1
JLGS412.cdr
ST 10
2A 4A
ST10
ST10_2.cdr
602
IP Transport Unit IP
transport board
27H
JL1
JL1
1
JLGS602.cdr
ST 10
2A 4A
ST10
ST10_4.cdr
712
Cassette Unit IP
alignment board
26H
JL1
JL1
1
JLGS712.cdr
ST 10
2A 4A
ST10
ST10_4.cdr
GS IOB-SIN-5Step Board:
CM+9 9499 8120 x
GS
Designation
IO-Bus Address
Switch
710
Cassette Unit
22H
JL1
5fold-stepper
motor board
Jumper Settings
JL1
1
JLGS710_1.cdr
21H
JL 2
JL2
8
JLGS710_2.cdr

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.4 / 4
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
I/O-Bus Addresses of Boards

IO-Bus
Address
GS
Board
21
710
Cassette unit (JL2) 5fold stepper motor board
22
710
Cassette unit (JL1) 5fold stepper motor board
26
712
Cassette unit IP alignment board
27
602
IP Transport Unit IP transport board
36
412
Scan Unit Slowscan board
37
410
Scan Unit Scan rolls lift board
70
230
75
210
Erasure control board
85
116
Emergency-node
80
306
cPCI adapter board
Jumper Configuration of the Hard Disk
3.1
SCSI Hard Disk

Two equally designed SCSI hard disks are used. They only differ in the configuration of
their jumper settings.
SCSI-hard disk Quantum Atlas IV, V, 10KII Remove all jumpers
SCSI-hard disk IBM Ultrastar (DDYST09170, IC35L009UWD)
figure 1
correct jumper configuration

at jumper 6 jumper block:
figure 2

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.4 / 5
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Fuses Overview
Ass.
Location
Fuse
Quality
Protection
200
Power unit
SI 201
T 2.0A
GS300
200
Stepper motor transformer
SI202
T 2.0A
TR206
200
SI 1
T 2.5A
GS410
SI 2
T 2.5A
GS602
SI 3
T 2.5A
GS712
SI 4
T 2.5A
GS412
SI 5
T 6.25A
GS710
NOTE:
All fuses are slowblow fuses.
Overview of Diagnostic LEDs

Ass.
Location
LED
Indicates
200
D9, green
SI 4 is OK.
D9, yellow
SI 3 is OK.
D9, red
SI 5 is OK.
D10, green
SI 2 is OK.
D10, yellow
SI 1 is OK.
D10, red
+5 V voltage is OK.
D11, green
(not used)
D11, yellow
(not used)
D11, red
+24 V voltage is OK.
GS306,
voltage indicators
(3 x 3 LEDs)
The voltage at corresponding

position (see labeling) is OK.
GS312,
Ethernet and
FPGA indicators
(2 x 3 LEDs)
Indicate the signaling related

to software (service connector
side) and hardware (RESET
switch side).
300
cPCI Rack

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.4 / 6
Chapter 3.5
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Replacements / Repair Procedures
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN 6000)

This document describes replacements relevant for the Field Service Engineer.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.0
12-2006

Document
Title
Service Bulletin

DD+DIS407.06E



eq_03-5_replacements_e_template_v02
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
on the product.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 2
DD+DIS219.06E
Repair and Service

LIST OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................5
SAFETY NOTE.........................................................................................................................5
REMOVAL OF PANELS ...........................................................................................................6
REPLACEMENTS AT TRANSPORT UNIT ..............................................................................7
4.1
Removing Transport Unit from Digitizer....................................................................................7
4.2
Replacing Vacuum Unit ............................................................................................................8
4.3
Replacing Suction Cups............................................................................................................9
4.4
Replacing Stepper Motor Board................................................................................................9
4.5
Remounting Transport Unit.....................................................................................................10
REPLACEMENTS AT ERASURE UNIT .................................................................................11

5.1
Removing Erasure Unit from Digitizer ....................................................................................11
5.2
Replacing Erasure Lamps.......................................................................................................12
5.3
Remounting Erasure Unit to Digitizer .....................................................................................13
REPLACEMENTS AT POWER UNIT.....................................................................................14

6.1
Removing Power Unit from Digitizer .......................................................................................14
6.2
Removing Power Integration Board........................................................................................17
6.3
Installing new Power Integration Board ..................................................................................18
6.4
Removing 24 V Power Supply ................................................................................................19
6.5
Replacing Erasure Control Board ...........................................................................................20
REPLACEMENTS AT CASSETTE UNIT ...............................................................................22

7.1
Removing Cassette Unit from Digitizer...................................................................................22
7.2
Replacing 5-fold Stepper Motor Board ...................................................................................25
7.3
Replacing Stepper Motor Board..............................................................................................26
7.4
Replacing Cassette Opener Mechanism ................................................................................27

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 3
DD+DIS219.06E
10
Repair and Service

REPLACEMENTS AT SCAN UNIT ........................................................................................31

8.1
Safety Note .............................................................................................................................31
8.2
Replacing the Optic Module....................................................................................................32
8.3
Putting the new Optic Module in Operation ............................................................................34
8.4
Replacing Photomultiplier Module (PMM) with Light Collector...............................................35
8.5
Putting the new Photomultiplier in Operation..........................................................................38
8.6
Removing Scan Unit from Digitizer .........................................................................................38
8.7
Replacing Pin Diode Board.....................................................................................................44
REPLACEMENTS AT THE CPCI-RACK................................................................................48

9.1
Replacing the Hard Disk .........................................................................................................48
9.2
Start up of a new Hard Disk ....................................................................................................50
REPLACEMENTS AT THE FRAME .......................................................................................52

10.1
Replacing the Display .............................................................................................................52
10.2
Replacing the Emergency Node Board ..................................................................................53
10.3
Removing the Erasure Unit Fan..............................................................................................53
10.4
Installing new Erasure Unit Fan ..............................................................................................56

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 4
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Introduction
CR 35-X 5158 / 100 and CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 make use of parts employing
machine-specific parameters.
These are:
Laser
Photomultiplier
Pin-Diodes.
The corresponding spare parts kits comprise the new spare part as well as a floppy
disk containing necessary parameters/values/data. The floppy disks are assigned
clearly to the spare part and cannot be mistaken. After the new part has been installed,
you have to load these parameters from floppy drive via service menu of the user
terminal. Finally, you are asked to renew the backup. (See detailed description in the
replacement section of this chapter.)
Together with date and counter stamp the serial number of the exchanged part is
automatically registered in the info counter file under the item hardware modification
history.
Safety Note
CAUTION:
Danger of cutting!
Due to changed production methods, all parts of metal frame can be sharp-edged.
Take special care when servicing the interior of the digitizer

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 5
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Removal of Panels
1
3
4
figure1
5156_reg3.5_001.cdr
Cover: Open two screws (Philips screw driver, medium size) and remove cover.
Left Side Panel: Open two screws (screw driver, medium size) and lift side panel
off.
Right side panel: Press two latches and lift side panel off.
Top Front Panel: Loosen six Phillips screws and lift front panel off (the cover has
to be removed before).
Bottom Front Panel: Press two latches to open the door.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 6
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Replacements at Transport Unit
4.1
Removing Transport Unit from Digitizer

(3)
Unplug digitizer from the mains.
(4)
Remove right side panel.
(5)
Disconnect plugs (1) and (2).
(6)
Untie the four fasteners (3).
(7)
Remove complete transport unit from

digitizer and put it down.
figure 2
5156_reg3.5_002.jpg
figure 3
5156_reg3.5_003.jpg

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 7
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
4.2
Replacing Vacuum Unit

Socket wrench (5.5 mm)
(1)
To prevent from loosing screws in

the digitizer, first take out complete
transport unit from digitizer.
(2)
Unplug two hoses, including plastic

angles, from suction cups (1).
(3)
Unplug 4-pin and 5-pin plugs.
(4)
Unscrew three screws (2) to loosen

vacuum unit
(5)
(6)
figure 4
5156_reg3.5_004.jpg
figure 5
5156_reg3.5_005.jpg
figure 6
5156_reg3.5_006.jpg
Take out complete vacuum unit.
Check if there are dust caps on the

new spare part and remove all of
them.
(7)
Install new vacuum unit in reverse order.
(8)
Be aware of guide slot at suctions cups, to plug plastic angles in correct position.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 8
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
4.3
Replacing Suction Cups

4.4
(1)
To prevent from loosing screws in

the digitizer, first take out complete
transport unit from digitizer.
(2)
Unplug hose, including plastic

angle, from metal bolt of suction
cup.
(3)
Unscrew mounting screw.
(4)
Turn metal bolt of suction cup about

90 by hand and take out suction
cup.
(5)
Install new suction cup in reverse

order.
figure 7
5156_reg3.5_007.jpg
figure 8
5156_reg3.5_008.jpg
Replacing Stepper Motor Board

(1)
For replacing stepper motor board,

take out complete transport unit
from digitizer.
(2)
Place transport unit stable and

protect against tilting.
(3)
Move transport robot upwards.
(4)
Unplug both cables.
(5)
Press out plastic pins from metal

plate side and remove stepper
motor board.
(6)
Take out plastic pins from old

stepper motor board and attach
them on the new one.
(7)
Install new stepper motor board in reverse order.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 9
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
4.5
Remounting Transport Unit

NOTE:
Before remounting transport unit in digitizer check that cassette opener of cassette unit
is in hidden position. Otherwise a conflict with suction cups may appear.
(1)
Remount transport unit.
(2)
Tie the four fasteners.
(3)
Plug in the two cables and check

that power supply cable cannot be
clamped with side panel.
figure 9
5156_reg3.5_009.jpg

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 10
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Replacements at Erasure Unit
5.1
Removing Erasure Unit from Digitizer

(1)
Unplug the machine from the mains.
(2)
Open front door.
(3)
Push lock (1) downwards.
(4)
Pull out erasure unit to have easy

access to the cable.
(5)
Unplug cable of erasure unit.
(6)
figure 10
5156_reg3.5_010.jpg
figure 11
5156_reg3.5_011.jpg
figure 12
5156_reg3.5_012.jpg
Pull the erasure unit cautiously out

of the rail.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 11
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
5.2
Replacing Erasure Lamps
(1)
Open the two latches beside the

glass.
(2)
Swing up the glass covering the

lamps.
figure 13
5156_reg3.5_013.jpg
NOTE:
Always replace all 10 lamps at the same time!
Pull the lamps carefully out of their sockets.
NOTE:
The glass bulb of the new lamps must be clean. Use a soft cloth, do not touch with bare
fingers.
(3)
Insert the new lamps carefully in their sockets.
(4)
Close glass covering and the two latches.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 12
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
5.3
Remounting Erasure Unit to Digitizer

(1)
Put erasure unit carefully on the rail and move it into the digitizer.
(2)
Connect cable of erasure unit.
NOTE:
When re-inserting erasure unit, make sure that lock engages again.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 13
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Replacements at Power Unit
6.1
Removing Power Unit from Digitizer

Socket wrench (5.5 mm,
7 mm)
(1)
Switch off digitizer and unplug

mains cable on the rear side.
(2)
Open the front door.
(3)
Loosen two screws at the frame (7

mm socket wrench).
figure 14
5156_reg3.5_014.jpg
figure 15
5156_reg3.5_015.jpg

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 14
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(4)
Unplug two cables on right hand

side.
(5)
Pull out power unit maximum 2 cm

out of the digitizer.
figure 16
(6)
5156_reg3.5_016.jpg
Remove metal plate, see circles

(5.5 mm socket wrench), where four
cable clamps are mounted.
figure 17
5156_reg3.5_017.jpg

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 15
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(7)
Mark similar cables before

disconnecting. They could be
mistaken afterwards as only length
difference could help.
(8)
Disconnect all plugs.
figure 18
5156_reg3.5_018.jpg
NOTE:
Unplug the black cable only by touching the plug.
Never pull at the cable itself!
(9)
Remove power unit carefully from

digitizer.
figure 19
5156_reg3.5_019.jpg

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 16
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
6.2
Removing Power Integration Board

(1)
Loosen three screws (socket

wrench 5.5 mm) (1).
figure 20
(2)
5156_dis368.05_001.cdr
Unscrew (1, four screws) and

unplug (2) power supply (A) to get
easy access to plugs of the power
integration board.
A
1
figure 21
(3)
Pinch three plastic pins (1) and

push out of metal plate.
(4)
Unplug five cables off the power

integration board and remove it.
5156_dis368.05_002.cdr
figure 22
5156_reg3.5_024.cdr

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 17
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
6.3
Installing new Power Integration Board

NOTE:
Be aware that board is very sensitive to bending.
(1)
Establish which type of erasure unit fan is installed.

Note: The new fan (CM+9 5146 3620 0) has the type designation "RG 12519/14N/2" on its label.
(2)
Set the jumpers on the power integration board depending on the fan type (see
figure 23).
For the new fan, set jumpers to the upper two pins at ST7 and ST8.
For the old fan, set jumpers to the lower two pins at ST7 and ST8.
figure 23
5156_dis073.05_001.cdr
(3)
Install new power integration board in reverse order (see sections 6.2 and 6.1).
(4)
Connect digitizer to the mains.
(5)
Switch on the digitizer and wait for successful completion of the self test.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 18
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
6.4
Removing 24 V Power Supply

Small screw driver,
socket wrench (5.5 mm)
(1)
Unplug two cables (1).
(2)
Unscrew two screws at power

supply of power unit, one at each
side (5.5 mm socket wrench).
(3)
Take out power supply.
(4)
figure 24
5156_reg3.5_020.jpg
figure 25
5156_reg3.5_021.jpg
Install new power supply in reverse

order.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 19
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
6.5
Replacing Erasure Control Board

(1)
For replacing erasure control board

take out power unit from digitizer.
(2)
Unplug connections to transformers.
(3)
(4)
figure 26
5156_reg3.5_025.jpg
figure 27
5156_reg3.5_026.jpg
figure 28
5156_reg3.5_027.jpg
Unplug three cables at left side.
Unscrew three screws (1) at metal

plate.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 20
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(5)
Turn board and unplug cables at

right side.
(6)
If new board was delivered without

metal plate, remove this from old
board and mount it to new one.
figure 29
5156_reg3.5_028.jpg
Install new erasure control board in

reverse order.
(7)
(8)
Be aware that board is very

sensitive to bending.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 21
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Replacements at Cassette Unit

NOTE:
For all actions at cassette unit, first remove transport unit.
7.1
Removing Cassette Unit from Digitizer

Phillips screwdriver,
socket wrench (7 mm)
(1)
Loosen the screws (1) on the rear

side of digitizer.
(2)
Push back top cover a little.
(3)
Remove both side panels.
(4)
figure 30
5156_reg3.5_029.jpg
figure 31
5156_reg3.5_030.jpg
Open front door.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 22
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(5)
Loosen six screws 1, three at each

side, at front cover.
(6)
Remove the front cover.
(7)
(8)
figure 32
5156_reg3.5_031.jpg
figure 33
5156_reg3.5_032.jpg
figure 34
5156_reg3.5_033.jpg
Disconnect cables of cassette unit.

Two of them can only be reached
from the front.
Loosen screw with a socket

wrench (5.5 mm) to unfasten
energy chain from frame.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 23
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(9)
Loosen three screws 1 of spindle

carriage with socket wrench (7
mm) for about two turns.
figure 35
5156_reg3.5_034.jpg
figure 36
5156_reg3.5_035.jpg
figure 37
5156_reg3.5_036.jpg
(10) Turn spindle carriage off the

thread. Mind that it is a left-handed
thread.
(11) Move up IP transport robot by

means of red handle.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 24
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(12) Pull out cassette unit cautiously with

a straight movement, as bearings
do not guide all along. Mind position
of the hands as shown beside.
Put cassette unit down.
figure 38
5156_reg3.5_037.jpg
(13) Reinstall in reverse order. When reinserting, do not cant bearings and do not
push in with force.
7.2
Replacing 5-fold Stepper Motor Board

(1)
Unplug all cables, if necessary

unscrew cable clamps.
(2)
Push plastic clips and take board off

the pins.
figure 39
5156_reg3.5_038.jpg
(3)
Install new board in reverse order.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 25
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
7.3
Replacing Stepper Motor Board

Socket wrench (5.5 mm),
pliers
(1)
Unscrew energy chain to have free

access to stepper motor board.
(2)
Unplug all cables.
(3)
(4)
figure 40
5156_reg3.5_039.jpg
figure 41
5156_reg3.5_040.jpg
Take board off the plastic pins, if

necessary by means of a pliers.
Install new board in reverse order.


12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 26
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
7.4
Replacing Cassette Opener Mechanism

NOTE:
If the light barrier flag of the cassette
opener is broken then you need not
replace the complete cassette opener
mechanism. The light barrier flag is a
separately available spare part. Order
number: CM+9 5146 .5911 x.
The light barrier flag can brake when it
touches the frame of cassette opener
while it is moved down.
figure 42
5156_reg3.5_041.jcdr
Screw driver,
socket wrench (7 mm)
(1)
For replacing cassette opener mechanism first take out complete

cassette unit from digitizer.
(2)
Remove spring washers

at both sides of shaft.
Pay attention that shaft
is not scratched during
replacement as it
touches IP directly in
normal operation.
figure 43
5156_reg3.5_042.jpg

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 27
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(3)
(4)
Remove deflector plate

by unscrewing three
screws by a socket
wrench (7 mm).
figure 44
5156_reg3.5_043jpg
figure 45
5156_reg3.5_044.jpg
figure 46
5156_reg3.5_045.jpg
Remove I/O slot opener

by unscrewing two
screws by a socket
wrench (7 mm).

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 28
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(5)
(6)
Remove light barrier mount by

unscrewing two adjoining screws
by a socket wrench (7 mm).
figure 47
5156_reg3.5_046.jpg
figure 48
5156_reg3.5_047.jpg
figure 49
5156_reg3.5_048.jpg
Remove black plastic frame of

opener by unscrewing four screws,
two on both sides, by a socket
wrench (7 mm).
(7)
Remove spring washer at right

side of shaft.
(8)
Push black plastic crank carefully

to right side. It can be moved by
red handle to loosen contact to
shaft.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 29
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(9)
Remove alignment plate by means

of a Phillips screwdriver.
figure 50
5156_reg3.5_049.jpg
(10) Turn complete cassette unit and swing up 5fold stepper motor board to have
access to the rear side.
(11) Unplug connector to cassette detection switch (ST 8) at 5fold stepper motor
board of cassette unit.
(12) Unscrew two nuts at rear side
which mount cassette opener.
figure 51
5156_reg3.5_050.jpg
figure 52
5156_reg3.5_051.jpg
(13) Take out toothed belt and remove

cassette opener.
(14) Install new cassette opener in reverse order.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 30
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Replacements at Scan Unit
8.1
Safety Note
WARNING:
Risk of electric shock!
Make sure that the digitizer is switched off, before you remove the optic module.
There are no serviceable parts inside the

optical module.
Do not open sealed parts of the optical
module.
figure 53
5156_reg3.5_089.jpg

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 31
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
8.2
Replacing the Optic Module

CAUTION:
Risk of injury when removing the scan unit!
To remove the scan unit safely, use the digitizer ramp.
Check that both adjustable feet are touching the ground before removal of the scan
unit.
Allen key (4 mm),

socket wrench (5.5 mm),
(1)
Unplug activation plug of the optic

module
(Sub-D plug, 25 pins).
5158_reg3.5_001.cdr
figure 54
(2)
Undo the shielding clamp (A), (5.5

mm socket wrench).
Unplug the polygon plug (B) (the
connection is unmistakable).
5158_reg3.5_002.cdr
figure 55

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 32
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(3)
For easier handling, unplug flat

cable on left side of PMM.
5158_reg3.5_006.cdr
figure 56
(4)
Loosen four Allen screws (4 mm).
5158_reg3.5_003.cdr
figure 57
(5)
Pull out optic module cautiously by

using the T-handle and one hand
down left.
The rails guide the optic module
and avoid that the PMM is being
damaged.
However, take care to pull out the
optic module straightforward.
5158_reg3.5_004.cdr
figure 58
(1)
Install the new optic module in reverse order.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 33
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
8.3
Putting the new Optic Module in Operation

(1)
Switch on the Digitizer.
(2)
Install the optics specific data from the enclosed floppy disk via the Service
Menu at the user terminal.
(3)
Select <5 INSTALL from floppy>

<4 Optics parameters>.
The system requests:
a. to compare the S/N on the optic module and the S/N stored on the
floppy disk. After confirmation the parameters are loaded.
The serial number of the exchange part is automatically entered in the
info counter file under "HW Replacement history" together with
date and counter stamp
b. to update the backup
.
(4)
Make an IP center calibration (see chapter 3.6).
(5)
Make a shading calibration of all formats (see chapter 3.6)
(6)
Update the backup to save the calibration data.
(7)
Select <3 Save on floppy>

<2 Machine specific data>
(8)
Follow the online instructions.
(9)
Enter the serial number of the Digitizer on the label of the optic modul floppy
disk.
(10) Check the image quality with flatfield exposures (if available, also with test
sheet), see chapter 3.6

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 34
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
8.4
Replacing Photomultiplier Module (PMM) with Light Collector

CAUTION:
Risk of damage!
Photomultiplier and light collector are glued and must be treated as one component.
Allen key, 3 mm
Socket wrench, 7 mm
(1)
Remove the optic module as

described in section 8.2
(2)
Undo the Allen screw (3 mm) at the

light well (right hand side).
(3)
Lift up the light well.
5158_reg3.5_005.cdr
figure 59
(4)
Unplug cable on left side of the

PMM.
5158_reg3.5_006.cdr
figure 60

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 35
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(5)
Loosen the two knurled screws by

pressing the blue foam.
5158_reg3.5_007.cdr
figure 61
(6)
Loosen the four Allen screws at the

light collector (7 mm socket wrench)
5158_reg3.5_008.cdr
figure 62
(7)
Move the black aluminum plate at

the far end of the light collector
gently to and fro; this eases the
removal
(8)
Tip over and pull out the PMM

carefully.
5158_reg3.5_009.cdr
figure 63

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 36
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
NOTE:
Hold one hand to the PMM and the other
to the light collector to avoid tearing apart
the module.
5158_reg3.5_010.cdr
figure 64
(9)
Put down the PMM carefully.
(10) Install in reverse order.
NOTE:
Check the functionality of the dust brush after the installation of the PMM!

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 37
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
8.5
Putting the new Photomultiplier in Operation

(1)
Switch off the digitizer.
(2)
Install the mfa / mfb parameters from the enclosed floppy disk via the Service
Menu at the user terminal.
(3)
Select <5 INSTALL from floppy>

<3 PMT settings (mfa/mfb)>
The system requests:
a. to compare the serial number on the photomultiplier module and the
serial number stored on the floppy disk. After confirmation the
parameters are loaded.
The serial number of the exchange part is automatically entered in the
info counter file under "HW Replacement history" together with date
and counter stamp
b. to update the backup
8.6
(4)
Calibrate all formats, see chapter 3.6
(5)
Update the backup to save the calibration data
(6)
Select <3 Save on floppy>

<2 Machine specific data>
(7)
Follow the on-line instructions
(8)
Enter the serial number of the Digitizer on the label of the

photomultiplier floppy disk
(9)
Check the image quality with flatfield exposures (if available, also with test
sheet), see chapter 3.6
Removing Scan Unit from Digitizer

The following preparations have to be carried out:
Disconnect mains cable.
Open front door.
Remove both side panels.
Remove IP-transport Unit.
Remove Erasure Unit.
Remove Optical Modul as descriebed in section 8.2
Remove the Photomultiplier with light collector 8.4

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 38
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Phillips screwdriver,
Allen key (5 mm),
open-end wrench (13 mm)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Tip over cPCI-Rack.
figure 65
5156_reg3.5_052.jpg
figure 66
5156_reg3.5_053.jpg
Loosen Allen screw (5 mm); there

may be perceptible resistance due
to Locktite saved connection.
Unscrew two screws (A) (openend wrench 13 mm) to loosen

scan unit from frame.
5158_reg3.5_011.cdr
figure 67

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 39
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(4)
(5)
Pull out scan unit a little.
figure 68
5156_reg3.5_088.jpg
figure 69
5156_reg3.5_055.jpg
figure 70
5156_reg3.5_056.jpg
Remove grounding clamp (socket

wrench 5.5 mm) at the right side of
the boards.
(6)
Mark cables before disconnecting.

They could be mistaken.
(7)
Disconnect all plugs (1) at both

sides from boards.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 40
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(8)
(9)
Loosen screw (socket wrench 5.5

mm) and unplug flat cable on left
side of scan unit.
figure 71
5156_reg3.5_057.jpg
figure 72
5156_reg3.5_017.jpg
figure 73
5156_reg3.5_018.jpg
Remove metal plate, see circles

(socket wrench 5.5 mm), where
four cable clamps are mounted.
(10) Mark similar cables before

disconnecting. They could be
mistaken afterwards as only length
difference could help.
(11) Disconnect all plugs.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 41
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
NOTE:
Unplug the black cable only by touching the plug.
Never pull at the cable itself!
(12) Put cables over the front door to

have easy access to the scan unit.
figure 74
5156_reg3.5_060.jpg
Wear safety shoes while removing scan unit.
(13) Push slightly to left side to avoid

getting caught.
(14) Pull out the scan unit a little.
figure 75
5156_reg3.5_061.jpg

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 42
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(15) Push slightly to right side to avoid

canting of the rubber pad in the
rail.
figure 76
5156_reg3.5_062.jpg
figure 77
5156_reg3.5_063.jpg
(16) To pull out the scan unit

completely use hand hold on the
left side.
(17) Bring scan unit on a safe place

and take care that it can not tilt.
(18) Install new scan unit in reverse order.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 43
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
8.7
Replacing Pin Diode Board

Socket wrench (5.5 mm),
Open-end wrench (7 mm, 10 mm),
Screw driver
(1)
Unplug cables at pin diode board.
(2)
Mark position (1) of motor. The

mark is necessary to reproduce
belt tension afterwards.
(3)
Unscrew two screws (2) by

positioned under toothed belt.
(4)
(5)
figure 78
5156_reg3.5_070.jpg
figure 79
5156_reg3.5_071.jpg
figure 80
5156_reg3.5_072.jpg
Loosen two screws open-end

wrench 10 mm, for moving
motor.
Move motor from right to left and

take away toothed belt.
Afterwards take out complete
metal angle with motor.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 44
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Remove spring washers on both

sides of gear.
figure 81
5156_reg3.5_073.jpg
figure 82
5156_reg3.5_074.jpg
figure 83
5156_reg3.5_075.jpg
Unscrew two nuts at upper

mounting open-end wrench 7
mm.
Move two bearings away from

each other by means of a small
screw driver.
Unscrew c-clips protection at scan roller and remove scan roller carefully.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 45
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(10) Take out springs at aluminum

bracket and bracket itself.
figure 84
5156_reg3.5_076.jpg
figure 85
5156_reg3.5_077.jpg
figure 86
5156_reg3.5_078.jpg
(11) Remove worm wheel.

(12) Remove spring washers at both
sides of drive shaft and take out
drive shaft itself by moving
backwards.
(13) Unplug connection to diode.

(14) Unscrew two screws (socket
wrench 5.5 mm), to dismount
metal bracket.
(15) Move board to left side until it stops.

(16) To take out the board you have to pass two screws on the right side.
Therefore bend board very carefully, turn it into a horizontal position and take
it out.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 46
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(17) After reinserting the new pin diode board, make sure that board engages
properly.
(18) Push the board to the very right side, hold it in place and mount the metal
bracket. Check that the board cannot move.
(19) Connect plugs. Only plug for motor is connected later.
(20) Insert drive shaft. Make sure that its ends engage in correct position and that
light barrier flag is in functional position.
(21) Mount aluminum angle and springs.
(22) Mount motor and toothed belt.
(23) Screw loose-fitting two 5.5 mm screws under belt.
(24) Mount motor by two screws with
open-end wrench 10 mm, at
position marked before.
(25) Check and resp. adjust tension
of toothed belt by pressing
moderate with two fingers.
Distance should be approx. 1.5
cm (0.6 inch).
(26) Fix screws under belt.
figure 87
5156_reg3.5_079.jpg
(27) Wind cable around feed line of motor and connect plug of light barrier to
motor.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 47
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Replacements at the cPCI-Rack
9.1
Replacing the Hard Disk

NOTE:
In order to avoid any damage at the storage board, replace the hard disk very
cautiously.
Phillips screwdriver, medium size

(1)
Tip over cPCI-Rack.
(2)
Disconnect the white connector of

the power supply from the storage
board (1).
(3)
Loosen the two terminal rails (2).
(4)
Disconnect the ribbon cables (3)

and (4) from floppy disk drive and
hard disk.
figure 88
5156_reg3.5_080
figure 89
5156_reg3.5_081

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 48
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(1)
(2)
figure 90 shows the storage board

with the inserted hard disk.
5156_reg3.5_082
figure 91
5156_reg3.5_083
figure 92
5156_reg3.5_084
Loosen four round-head screws at

the rear of the storage board to
separate the hard disk from the
storage board.
(3)
Disconnect the connector of the

power supply (circle) from the hard
disk.
(4)
Remove the hard disk from the

storage board.
(5)
figure 90
Install the new hard disk in reverse order.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 49
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
9.2
Start up of a new Hard Disk

Service PC
NOTE:
The following floppies are needed for installation:
Hard disk formatter floppy
CR 35 Portex Installer Disk 2/2
CR 35 Software Release Disk 1/3
Floppy Portex Installer 1/2 is not needed for this procedure.
(1)
Disconnect the digitizer from the network.
(2)
Connect Service PC to service port and start a terminal program.
(3)
Take the Hard disk formatter floppy and insert it into the floppy disk drive of
the digitizer.
(4)
Disconnect the digitizer from the network (since a default IP-Address &
hostname is configured).
(5)
Connect Service PC with terminal program (e.g. Hyper Terminal) to RS232 port
of CR35.
(6)
Press the Reset button on CPU-Board or turn power off/on at digitizer.
(7)
Confirm partitioning/formatting of the hard disk with y.
(8)
Wait until you get the final message on a terminal connected to the service
RS232 port or wait until control LED of floppy disk drive is off.
(9)
Insert the floppy ACP Portex Installer 2/2 into the disk drive of the digitizer.
(10) Press the Reset button on CPU-Board or turn power off/on at digitizer.
(11) Wait until you get the final message on a terminal connected to the service
RS232 port or wait until control LED of floppy disk drive is off.
(12) Remove floppy (don't insert any other floppy).
(14) Wait until you get the final message on a Terminal connected to the service
RS232 port, or wait approximately 2 minutes.
(15) Insert the floppy CR35 Software Release Disk 1/3 into the disk drive of the
digitizer.
(17) Wait until you get the final message on a terminal connected to the service
RS232 port, or wait until control LED of floppy disk drive is off.
(18) Proceed the same way with the CR35 Software Release Disk 2/3 and 3/3.
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 50
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(19) Press the Reset button on CPU-Board or turn power off/on at digitizer and wait
until software is inflated completely.
(21) Restore the machine-specific data.
(22) Restore the CPF-file.
(24) Write machine-specific data on floppy.
(25) Reconnect network cable.
NOTE:
Without restoring the device-specific parameters, operation is not possible.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 51
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
10
Replacements at the Frame
10.1
Replacing the Display

Socket wrench (5.5 mm), Philips screw
driver
(1)
Remove cover.
(2)
Remove top front panel.
(3)
Unscrew four screws

(5.5 mm).
(4)
Loosen screw (5.5 mm) at the right

side of the display.
(5)
Unplug cable on the board.
(6)
figure 93
5156_reg3.5_085
figure 94
5156_reg3.5_086
Install the new display in reverse order.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 52
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
10.2
Replacing the Emergency Node Board

Pliers, Philips screw driver
(1)
Remove cover.
(2)
Remove top front panel.
(3)
Take board off the four plastic pins

(1), if necessary by means of
pliers.
(4)
Unplug flat cable (2).
figure 95
(5)
10.3
5156_reg3.5_087
Install the new emergency node board in reverse order.
Removing the Erasure Unit Fan

(1)
Switch off digitizer and disconnect mains plug.
(2)
Open lower front door and remove both side panels.
(3)
Remove transport unit from digitizer (see section 4.1).
(4)
Tip over cPCI-Rack.
figure 96
5156_reg3.5_052

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 53
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(5)
Loosen Allen (5 mm) screw at

front side; there may be
perceptible resistance due to
Locktite-saved connection.
(6)
Unscrew two Allen screws (5 mm)

(1, see figure 98) at left side to
loosen scan unit from frame.
(7)
Pull out scan unit by about 10 cm.
(8)
Remove screw (1, see figure 99)

which fixes fan assembly (A) at
right side.
(9)
Unplug fan assembly at left side.
figure 97
5156_reg3.5_053
figure 98
5156_reg3.5_054
A
1
figure 99
5156_dis369.05_001

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 54
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(10) Slide fan assembly (A) out of holder

(1, see figure 100) and remove from
device.
1
figure 100
(11) Unscrew 4 Allen screws (1) and
unmount plug (2) to release fan.
5156_dis369.05
1
figure 101
5156_dis369.05

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 55
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
10.4
Installing new Erasure Unit Fan

NOTE:
This erasure unit fan can only be used in combination with the power integration board
with jumpers (CM+9 5156 6450 1).
(1)
Check if the power integration board with jumpers (CM+9 5156 6450 1) is installed
(For the removal of the board from the digitizer,
see section 6.2).
NOTE:
The jumpers (see figure 102) must be set to the upper pins.
figure 102
5156_dis073.05_001.cdr
(2)
Check the jumper settings on the power integration board.
(3)
Proceed in reverse order to install new fan.

See section 10.3.
(4)
Connect digitizer to the mains.
(5)
Switch on and wait for the successful completion of the self test.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.5 / 56
Chapter 3.6
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
CR 35-X
Type 5158/100
CR 25.0
Type 5156/105
(as of SN 6000)

This document describes adjustments and calibration procedures for the digitizer.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
compared to previous version 2.0
2.1
08-2008
Updated information on the IP-center calibration and

the shading calibration.
Details see section 2.2 and section 2.3.
Added calibration with mammography X-ray source.

Details see section 2.2 and section 2.3.
Document
Title
DD+DIS171.08E
CR 35-X Service Bulletin # 06: Announcement of Digitizer

Software C25_3007


eq_03-6_adjustments_e_template_v06
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications
=> Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance
task on the equipment.
(2)
on the product.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type Order List in the GSO library.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 2
DD+DIS219.06E
Repair and Service

LIST OF CONTENTS
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT OF THE SCANNER POSITION ..............................................4

1.1
Adjustment Procedure of the Scanner Position ........................................................................5
1.2
Verification for the Adjustment of the Scanner Position ...........................................................8
CALIBRATIONS .......................................................................................................................9
2.1
Possible Reasons for a Calibration...........................................................................................9
2.2
IP-Center Calibration ..............................................................................................................10
2.2.1
Erase the Cassette .................................................................................................................11
2.2.2
Expose the Cassette...............................................................................................................12
2.2.3
Start the IP-Center Calibration................................................................................................16
2.2.4
Failed IP-Center Calibration....................................................................................................17
2.3
Shading Calibration.................................................................................................................20
2.3.1
Erase the Cassette .................................................................................................................21
2.3.2
Expose the Cassette...............................................................................................................21
2.3.3
Start the Shading Calibration ..................................................................................................23
2.3.4
Failed Shading Calibration......................................................................................................30
2.4
Verification of the Calibration ..................................................................................................35
BACKUP .................................................................................................................................38

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 3
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Mechanical Adjustment of the Scanner Position

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 45 min.
IMPORTANT:
This adjustment is critical!
Perform it only if you are familiar with the adjustment procedure.
When?
Perform this adjustment if:
Geometric or material properties of the clamping elements in general have

been changed.
The scanner has been exchanged.
Frequent IP jams are present after the transport from the scan unit.
NOTE:
Carry out this adjustment only with digitizers showing the above described
problems frequently!
PREREQUISITES/REQUIRED TOOLS:
Open-end socket wrench, 13 mm
Floppy for storing the machine specific data

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 4
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
1.1
Adjustment Procedure of the Scanner Position

(1)
Get a 15 x 30 cm cassette or a 18 x 24 cm cassette.
(2)
Remove both side panels and bridge the interlock switch with a service key.
(3)
For adjusting the scanner, the

fastening at the left side of the digitizer
has to be modified
(see circle in figure 1).
Mark the fastening nut and the
fastening plate with a permanent
marker or a scriber.
The mark makes it easier to count the
turns of the nut.
figure 1
(4)
Turn the marked nut one complete turn counterclockwise, with the open-end
socket wrench.
The scanner tilts to the left side, with view from the input slot.
(5)
Tighten the nut behind the fastening plate, mounted on the thread of
the clamper.
(6)
Switch on the digitizer.
(7)
Enter the service menu.
(8)
Select <2 MAINTENANCE>

<3 Test cycle>
<4 Handling cycle>.
(9)
Set number of cycles to 2 and start test cycle with the prepared cassette
(see step (1)).
(10) Switch off the digitizer.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 5
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(11) Repeat steps (4) to (10) until the image plate (IP) is no more or only partly
sucked or transported into the cassette.
(12) Loosen the nut behind the fastening plate.
(13) Turn the marked nut one complete turn clockwise.
(14) Tighten the nut behind the fastening plate.
(15) Remove the IP by hand.
If the IP is clamped turn the lift motor (M401) by hand counterclockwise to get
the IP released.
(16) Switch on the digitizer.
(17) Enter the service menu.
(18) Select <2 MAINTENANCE>
<3 Test cycle>
<4 Handling cycle>.
(19) Set number of cycles to 2 and start test cycle with the prepared cassette
(see step (1)).
(22) Turn the marked nut one complete turn counterclockwise.
(24) Remove the IP by hand.
If the IP is clamped turn the lift motor (M401) by hand counter-clockwise to get
the IP released.
(26) Enter the service menu.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 6
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E

<3 Test cycle>
<4 Handling cycle>.
(28) Set number of cycles to 2 and start test cycle with the prepared cassette
(see step (1)).
(30) Repeat steps (21) to (29) until the IP is sucked and transported into the
cassette correctly.
(33) Turn the marked nut one complete turn counter-clockwise.
(36) Perform the verification (see section 1.2).

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 7
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
1.2
Verification for the Adjustment of the Scanner Position

NOTE:
Avoid that direct sun light shines into the digitizer.
(1)
Result
Properly observe, while performing a test cycle with a small cassette

(18 x 24 cm or 15 x 30 cm), if:
The IP performs a constant movement.
The IP is not jerking.
(2)
Perform more test cycles with the small cassette, if necessary.
(3)
Adjust the scanner position, if the IP is not sucked and transported correctly.
Therefore proceed with step (4) of section 1.1.
(4)
Remove the service key at the interlock switch.
(5)
Mount both side panels.
The adjustment has been successful, if the IP is sucked and transported correctly.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 8
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Calibrations
NOTE:
Make sure that the used IPs are dry, clean and do not have artifacts such as
scratches or contamination.
2.1
Possible Reasons for a Calibration

IMPORTANT:
If an IP-center calibration is necessary, always perform a shading calibration
afterwards.
Calibration
Details
see
When
IP-Center Calibration
Shading Calibration
The optic module has been

exchanged.
The pin diode board (GS440) and/or

the light barrier IR Receiver (GS446)
have been replaced.
White borders on the Mammo

diagnostic images are present.*
IP-Center Calibration has been

performed.
The optic module has been

exchanged.
The LISA module (photomultiplier

with light collector) has been
exchanged.
The scan unit has been replaced.
Unacceptable line artifacts (stripes)

in slow scan direction are still visible
on the diagnostic image after
cleaning the scan area.
2.2
Approx.
30 min.
2.3
Approx.
1 h.
* only on 24 x 30 cm and 18 x 24 cm cassette formats. The white border is present only on one side of the image.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 9
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
2.2
IP-Center Calibration
REQUIRED TIME:
PREREQUISITES / REQUIRED TOOLS:
X-ray source (GenRad recommended)

If a GenRad X-ray source is available, this should be used for all applications:
the GenRad, Mammo and Extremity.
For a pure Mammo site use a Mammography X-ray source with the
largest available bucky.
Cassette:
o
GenRad (24 x 30 cm or smaller),
Mammo (18 x 24 cm):

Always expose the smallest cassette format used in the hospital.
If the cassette format 18 x 24 cm is not available, the calibration can also be
performed with a 24 x 30 cm cassette.
For a GenRad X-ray source:

Cu-filter which has the spare part number*: CM+9 5155 1015 2
For a Mammography X-ray source:

Al-filter which has the spare part number*: CM+9 5148 1090 0
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of this
document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
NOTE:
The GenRad X-ray source and the Mammography X-ray source require
different prerequisites.
Do not use GenRad X-ray source with Al-filter or Mammography X-ray source
with Cu-filter!
NOTE:
For Mammography X-ray source, in order to fix the Al-filter below the collimation
window, a reliable adhesive tape is necessary. Depending on the adhesive tape,
a solvent may be required for the cleaning of the X-ray source. Make sure the tape
is not getting in the optical path of the X-rays.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 10
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
The IP-center calibration procedure consists of the following steps:

How?
Procedure
Erase cassette
2.2.1
Expose cassette
2.2.2
Start IP center calibration
2.2.3
Verification
2.2.1
Details see
2.4
Erase the Cassette

(1)
on the
Press the Erase key
local keypad of the digitizer and
the following screen appears:
BUSY
ERASURE
WARNING
The next cassette(s) will be erased
Enter number of cassettes to erase:
Put cassette in input buffer or
press X to quit
CR85B
5148_Chap03.6_039.cdr
figure 2
(2)
Place the cassette in the input buffer of the digitizer.
(3)
Wait for the erased cassette at the output buffer.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 11
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
2.2.2
Expose the Cassette
2.2.2.1
Exposure of the Cassette for a GenRad X-ray source

(1)
Place the cassette in length direction to

the X-ray tube as shown
in figure 3.
Rotating
Anode
x-ray tube
Cathode
51
48
_3
. 6.c
dr
O.K.
Not O.K.
figure 3
(2)
Ensure that the entire image plate is

fully exposed! The collimated field must
be larger than the image plate!
figure 4
(3)
Place the Cu-filter below the collimation window.
(4)
Select the following exposure parameters to obtain a dose of 10 Gy:

- 12 mAs,
- 75 kV,
- 1.3 m (51,2) distance,
- Large focus.
NOTE:
Best use a dosimeter to measure the dose!
(5)
Expose the cassette.
(6)
Turn the cassette 180.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 12
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
2.2.2.2
(7)
Expose the cassette again.

After the second exposure the cassette has been exposed in total
with a dose of 20 Gy.
(8)
Remove the Cu-filter.
Exposure of the Cassette for a Mammography X-ray source

NOTE:
The exposure of the Mammo cassette with a Mammography X-ray source is only
applicable for the Mammography IP-center calibration.
Goal
Expose at least the half of the cassette (tube side up), which lies opposite to the
chestwall side, see figure 5.
Exposed area
(= 1/2 of cassette)
(chestwall side)
cassette
(with tube side up)
figure 5
(1)
Remove the compression paddle.
(2)
Check that the appropriate window is selected according to the bucky size.
If both, the 18 x 24 cm and the 24 x 30 cm, buckies are available, the smallest cassette
format (18 x 24 cm) has to be used with the largest bucky size (24 x 30 cm). For this
purpose refer to column 1 of the following table.
If only one bucky size is available (cassette format is then identical to the bucky size)
refer to column 2 of the following table.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 13
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(3)
(4)
(5)
Column 1:
Column 2:
Select the following exposure

parameters:
Select the following exposure

parameters:
- 20 mAs
- 28 kV
- Molybdenium source / Molybdenium
filter (Mo/Mo)
- Large focus
- 2 x 10 mAs
- 28 kV
- Molybdenium source / Molybdenium
filter (Mo/Mo)
- Large focus
Insert a dummy Mammography

cassette in the bucky to activate the
X-ray modality.
Insert a dummy Mammography

cassette in the bucky to activate the
X-ray modality.
Place the cassette on the bucky:
Place the cassette on the bucky:
- With tube side up

- Horizontally centered
- With tube side up

- With a slight offset in horizontal
direction.
Move the cassette vertically towards

the bucky chestwall, so that the rear
half (opening side) of the cassette is
in the middle of the collimation
window.
Move the cassette vertically towards

bucky chestwall, so that the rear half
(opening side) of the cassette is in
the collimation window.
The marked area
in figure 7 must be within the
collimation window.
bucky
cassette 18 x 24 cm
collimation window
collimation window
cassette
bucky 24 x 30 cm
(chestwall)
figure 7
figure 6
(6)
(chestwall)
Fix the Al-filter below the collimation

window and make sure the tape is
not getting in the optical path of the
X-rays.

X-rays.
(7)

Perform one single exposure!
Rotation of cassette is not required.
(8)
n.a.
Remove the Al-filter.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 14
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(9)
Column 1:
Column 2:
n.a.
Leave the cassette on the bucky with

tube side up.
Move the cassette horizontally to the
other side of the bucky and vertically
towards bucky chestwall, so that the
rear half (opening side) of the cassette
is in the collimation window.
The marked area
in figure 8 must be within the
collimation window.
bucky
collimation window
cassette
(chestwall)
figure 8
(10)
n.a.

X-rays.
(11)
n.a.
(12)
(13)
Clean the X-ray source with a solvent. Clean the X-ray source with a solvent.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 15
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
2.2.3
Start the IP-Center Calibration

NOTE:
Close the doors of the digitizer during calibration.
(1) Enter the Service menu.
<2 Calibration>
<1 IP center calibration>.
After the application has been
chosen the exposure parameters
for the cassette are shown on
the display.
These parameters are only valid
for a GenRad X-ray source. If a
Mammography X-ray source is
used, refer to the exposure
parameters in step (3) of section
2.2.2.2.
Service menu
Filter: 1.5 mm Cu
Maintenance
2 exposures a 10 microGy Calibration
turn 180 degree
(Approx. FFEDist 1.3 m, X :cancel
12 mAs, 75 kVp)
Insert cassette 24x30 cm
or smaller
5148_Chap03.6_008.cdr
figure 9
(3) Insert the exposed cassette in the digitizer.

(4) In case the cassette has been
identified by mistake the following
screen will be displayed:
- Press the escape key
, if you
want to scan the cassette: the
name of the patient will be
shown.
- Press the confirm key
, if you
want to start the calibration.
with patient data.
Press
to calibrate
or X to scan.
Service menu
Maintenance
Calibration
X
:cancel
:ok
5148_Chap03.6_030.cdr
figure 10
(5) If the right format is detected the calibration starts automatically and you
can skip step (6).
(6) If the wrong format is detected a warning message will be displayed.
to start the calibration with the wrong format, or
to stop calibration.
.
Remove the cassette and press confirm key
The calibration main screen will be displayed.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 16
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(7) The IP-center calibration has been

successful, if the message
Calibration successful pops up.
If the calibration has not been
successful, continue with section
2.2.4.
...press
Service menu
Maintenance
Calibration
to continue
:ok
5148_Chap03.6_038.cdr
figure 11
(8) Press confirm key
(9) Perform a shading calibration (see section 2.3) and finally a verification
(see section 2.4).
2.2.4
Failed IP-Center Calibration

Find the possible results of a failed IP-center calibration below:
Information on
the Display
Details
see
Reason
Check
collimation and
optics
Flatfield was not used.
A defective IP was used (with scratches in slowscan direction).
Underexposed
The exposure conditions were wrong

(e.g. the dose was too low).
The filter was not positioned correctly.
The photomultiplier floppy was not installed properly

after a photomultiplier (PMT) replacement.
The backup floppy was not installed properly after a

software installation including hard disk formatting.

(e.g. the dose was too high).

after a PMT replacement.

Overexposed
2.2.4.1
2.2.4.2
2.2.4.3

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 17
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
NOTE:
The Scan Average Level (SAL) is the digital 12 bit value (gray scale) of a pixel and is
one of the criteria for a successful calibration. The SAL values during a calibration
must be in a range of approximately 730 to 4095.
2.2.4.1
Check collimation and optics (dynamic range bigger than 1:2)

(1) A failure message pops up with
a long beep.
Service menu
Maintenance
Calibration
...press
to repeat
:cancel
:ok
5148_Chap03.6_035.cdr
figure 12
(2) Press the confirm key

.
Make sure that the IP was exposed without collimation.
Check the IP for scratches in slow scan direction.
Redo calibration.
(3) Otherwise, press the escape key
to cancel the calibration.
(4) Redo calibration.
2.2.4.2
Underexposed (SAL < 730)

(1) A failure message pops up.
.
Increase the exposure dose.
Check the exposure conditions and the filter alignment.
Redo the calibration.
(3) If the failure message pops up again, press the escape key
.
Check if the the photomultiplier floppy was installed properly after a PMT
replacement.
Check if the backup floppy was installed properly after a software installation
including hard disk formatting.
Install the corresponding floppy if necessary.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 18
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
2.2.4.3
Overexposed (SAL > 4095)

.
Decrease the exposure dose.
.
replacement.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 19
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
2.3
Shading Calibration
REQUIRED TIME:
PREREQUISITES / REQUIRED TOOLS:
X-ray source (GenRad recommended)

If a GenRad X-ray source is available, this should be used for all applications:
the GenRad, Mammo and Extremity.
For a pure Mammo site use a Mammography X-ray source with the
largest available bucky.
Cassette format (GenRad: 35 x 43 cm or Mammo:24 x 30 cm):
Always expose the largest cassette format used in the hospital.
If the cassette format 18 x 24 cm is used, the calibration is not valid for
24 x 30 cm cassette formats or higher!
For a GenRad X-ray source:

Cu-filter which has the spare part number*: CM+9 5155 1015 2
For a Mammography X-ray source:

- Al-filter which has the spare part number*: CM+9 5148 1090 0
- CR Mammography calibration kit which has the spare part number*:
10+7 9820 0424 0
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of this
document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
NOTE:
The GenRad X-ray source and the Mammography X-ray source require
different prerequisites.
Do not use GenRad X-ray source with Al-filter or Mammography X-ray source
with Cu-filter!
NOTE:
For Mammography X-ray source, in order to fix the Al-filter below the collimation
window, a reliable adhesive tape is necessary. Depending on the adhesive tape, a
solvent may be required for the cleaning of the X-ray source. Make sure the tape is not
getting in the optical path of the X-rays.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 20
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
The shading calibration procedure consists of the following steps:

How?
Procedure
Details see
Erase cassette
2.3.1
Expose cassette
2.3.2
Start shading calibration
2.3.3
Verification
2.3.1
2.4
Erase the Cassette

(1)
Press the Erase key

on the local keypad of the
digitizer and the following
screen appears
(see figure 13).
BUSY
ERASURE
WARNING
The next cassette(s) will be erased
Enter number of cassettes to erase:
Put cassette in input buffer or
press X to quit
CR85B
5148_Chap03.6_039.cdr
figure 13
2.3.2
(2)
Place the cassette in the input buffer of the digitizer.
(3)
Wait for erased cassette at the output buffer.
Expose the Cassette

NOTE:
The GenRad X-ray source can be used for both, the GenRad and the Mammo,
calibration procedure.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 21
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
2.3.2.1
Exposure of the Cassette for a GenRad X-ray source

(1)
Place the largest cassette in length

direction to the X-ray tube as shown in
figure 14.
Rotating
Anode
x-ray tube
Cathode
51
48
_3
. 6.c
dr
O.K.
Not O.K.
figure 14
(2)
Ensure that the entire image plate is

fully exposed! The collimated field
must be larger than the image plate!
figure 15
(4)
Place the Cu-filter below the collimation window.
(5)
Select the following exposure parameters to obtain a dose of 10 Gy:

- 12 mAs,
- 75 kV,
- 1.3 m (51,2) distance,
- Large focus.
NOTE:
(6)
(7)
Turn the cassette 180.
(8)
Expose the cassette again.

After the second exposure the cassette has been exposed in total with a dose
of 20 Gy.
(9)
Remove the Cu-filter.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 22
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
2.3.2.2
Exposure of the CR Mammo Calibration Kit Cassette for a Mammography

X-ray source
NOTE:
The exposure of the CR Mammo Calibration Kit cassette with a Mammography
X-ray source is only applicable for the Mammography shading calibration.
(1)
Remove the compression paddle.
(2)
Fix the Al-filter below the collimation window and check that the appropriate
window is selected according to the bucky size.
Make sure the tape is not getting in the optical path of the X-rays.
(3)
Select the following exposure parameters:

- 200 mAs,
- 28 kV,
- Molybdenium source / Molybdenium filter (Mo/Mo),
- large focus.
(4)
Put the cassette in the bucky.
(5)
NOTE:
Perform one single exposure!
Rotation of cassette is not required.
2.3.3
(6)
(7)
Clean the X-ray source with a solvent.
Start the Shading Calibration

NOTE:
Close the doors of the digitizer during calibration.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 23
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(1)
Enter the Service menu.
(2)
Select <2 MAINTENANCE>

<2 Calibration>.
<2 Shading Calibration>.
(3)
Choose one of 4 possible applications

for shading calibration (details see
table below).
When an application has been
calibrated successfully, the remark
o.k. will be shown next to the
application on the display (see
figure 16).
Selection
Exposure
on the
Application
Type
User
(X-ray source)
Interface
GenRad
1 GenRad
fast*
2 GenRad
slow
Mammo
Extremity
3 Mammo
4 Extremity
GenRad
(default
selection)
Which application
shall be calibrated?
1
2
3
4
GenRad fast
GenRad slow
Mammo
Extremity
o.k.
Service menu
Calibration
Shading
X
:cancel
:ok
5148_Chap03.6_001.c
figure 16
Remarks
Details
see
- Use the biggest GenRad

cassette available (35x43 cm)
- Use Cu-filter
2.3.3.1
GenRad
(recommended cassette available (35x43 cm)
if available) - Use Cu-filter.
2.3.3.2
Mammo
- Choose a X-ray source with

the smallest heel effect.**
- Use the biggest Mammo
- Use Al-filter.
GenRad
(default
selection)

- Use Cu-filter.
2.3.3.1
* The GenRad formats 35 x 35 cm and 35 x 43 cm are always scanned in Fast Scan Mode.
** In general modalities of Siemens are known to have a low heel effect.
NOTE:
If the Mammo application is not activated:
- A Mammo shading calibration with a GenRad cassette can be performed, anyway.
- A Mammo shading calibration with a Mammo Cassette can not be performed.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 24
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
2.3.3.1
Application GenRad or Extremity

After the application has been chosen Exposure parameters:
Service menu
Filter: 1.5 mm Cu
the exposure parameters for the
Calibration
2 exposures a 10 microGy Shading
cassette are shown on the display.
turn 180 degree
12 mAs, 75 kVp)
:cancel
5148_Chap03.6_009.cdr
figure 17
(1) Insert the exposed cassette.

with patient data.
, if you Press
to calibrate
or X to scan.
shown.
, if you figure 18
Service menu
Maintenance
Calibration
X
:cancel
:ok
5148_Chap03.6_030.cdr
can skip step (4).
(4) If the wrong format is detected a
warning message will be
displayed.
to
start the calibration with the
wrong format, or

recommended!
Service menu
Calibration
Shading

X
only be valid for
smaller ones.
:cancel
:ok
5148_Chap01_027.cdr

to
stop calibration.
Remove the cassette and
press confirm key
.
figure 19
The calibration main screen will

be displayed. Continue with
section 2.3.2.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 25
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(5) If the shading calibration has

been successful the message
Calibration successful pops up
(e. g. GenRad fast).
2.3.4.
Service menu
Calibration
Shading
GenRad fast
...press
to continue
:ok
5148_Chap03.6_037.cdr
figure 20
(7) Redo the calibration for the next application, shown on the display. Continue with
section 2.3.2.
When an application has been calibrated successfully, the remark o.k. will be
shown next to the application on the display (see figure 16)
When all 3 applications (GenRad fast, GenRad slow and Extremity) have been
performed continue with the Mammo application (see section 2.3.3.2).
(8) Perform verification (see section 2.4), after all applications have
been calibrated.
2.3.3.2
Application Mammo
Two possible exposure types can be chosen:
(1)
GenRad, if a GenRad X-ray source is available,
Mammo , if only a Mammography X-ray source is available.
Choose one of the 2 possible

exposure types.
Select exposure type.

1 GenRad
2 Mammo
Service menu
Calibration
Shading
X
:cancel
:ok
5148_Chap03.6_025.cdr
figure 21

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 26
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Exposure Type GenRad chosen

Service menu
Filter: 1.5 mm Cu
Calibration
2 exposures a 10 microGy Shading
turn 180 degree
12 mAs, 75 kVp)
:cancel
5148_Chap03.6_009.cdr
figure 22

with patient data.
, if you Press
to calibrate
or X to scan.
shown.
, if you figure 23
Service menu
Maintenance
Calibration
X
:cancel
:ok
5148_Chap03.6_030.cdr
can skip step (4).
displayed.
to
wrong format, or

recommended!
Service menu
Calibration
Shading

X
only be valid for
smaller ones.
:cancel
:ok
5148_Chap01_027.cdr

to
stop calibration.
Remove the cassette and
press confirm key
.
figure 24

section 2.3.2.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 27
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E

(e. g. Mammo).
2.3.4.
Service menu
Calibration
Shading
Mammo
...press
to continue
:ok
5148_Chap03.6_007.cdr
figure 25
(7) Perform verification (see section2.4), after all applications have

been calibrated.
Exposure Type Mammo chosen

IMPORTANT:
Ensure that the "CR Mammography calibration kit" cassette is used for
the following steps!
Filter: 2 mm Al
Exp. Technique: Mo/Mo
200mAs, 28 kVp
No compression paddle
Service menu
Calibration
Shading
X
:cancel

5148_Chap03.6_026.cdr
figure 26

with patient data.
, if you Press
to calibrate
or X to scan.
shown.
, if you figure 27
Service menu
Maintenance
Calibration
X
:cancel
:ok
5148_Chap03.6_030.cdr

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 28
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
can skip step (4).
displayed.
to
wrong format, or

recommended!
Service menu
Calibration
Shading

X
only be valid for
smaller ones.
:cancel
:ok
5148_Chap01_027.cdr

to
stop calibration.
Remove the cassette and press
the confirm key
.
figure 28

section 2.3.2.
(e. g. Mammo).
2.3.4.
Service menu
Calibration
Shading
Mammo
...press
to continue
:ok
5148_Chap03.6_007.cdr
figure 29
(7) Perform verification (see section 2.4), after all applications have
been calibrated.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 29
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
2.3.4
Failed Shading Calibration

Find the possible reasons for a failed shading calibration below:
Information on
the Display
Underexposed

(e.g. the dose was too low).

after a photomultiplier (PMT) replacement.
Overexposed
Details
see
Reason

(e.g. the dose was too high).

after a PMT replacement.
Dust is present on the IP.
Collimation was used.
A defective IP was used (with scratches in slowscan direction).
Modality is
vignetting
GenRad:
- Flatfield was not used.
- A defective IP was used.
- The collimation was used.
(Warning
message only)
Mammography:
- Flatfield was not used.
- A defective IP was used.
Dust detected
Check coll. and
optics
2.3.4.1
2.3.4.2
2.3.4.3
2.3.4.4
2.3.4.5
NOTE:
The Scan Average Level (SAL) is the digital 12 bit value (gray scale) of a pixel and is
one of the criteria for a successful calibration. The SAL values during a calibration
must be in a range of approximately 730 to 4095.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 30
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
2.3.4.1
Underexposed (SAL < 730)

Service menu
Calibration
Shading
GenRad fast
Failure - underexposed!
SAL: 1648, try 2x mAs
...press
to repeat
:ok
5148_Chap03.6_006.cdr
figure 30

.
Increase the exposure dose.
.
replacement.
2.3.4.2
Overexposed (SAL > 4095)

Service menu
Calibration
Shading
GenRad fast
Failure - overexposed!
SAL: 4096, try half mAs
...press
to repeat
:ok
5148_Chap03.6_004.cdr
figure 31

.
Decrease the exposure dose.
IMPORTANT:
For Mammography X-ray source, even if the dose has to be
decreased due to overexposure, the settings must not fall below
50 mAs and 0.5 s.
08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 31
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
.
replacement.
2.3.4.3
Dust detected
(1) A failure message pops up with a long beep.
(3) Check if the exposure parameters have been the same as shown on the display.
(4) Clean the optics with the built-in brush.
(5) Check on the IP the presence of scratches in slow scan direction and of dust.
Look for another IP which is dry, clean and immaculate.
2.3.4.4
Check collimation and optics (dynamic range bigger than 1:2)

(1) A failure message pops up (e. g.
GenRad fast) with a long beep.
Service menu
Calibration
Shading
GenRad fast
Calibration failed!
...press
to repeat
:ok
5148_Chap03.6_003.cdr
figure 32

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 32
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E

.
Make sure that the IP was exposed without collimation and with the exposure
parameters shown on the display.
Check the IP for scratches in slow scan direction.
Redo calibration.
In case the Mammo exposure type was selected and the above actions do not
show success:
- Look for the Mammography X-ray source with the smallest heel effect.
- Redo the calibration with this X-ray source and use the same bucky size
as for the first exposure.
(3) Otherwise, press the escape key
to cancel the calibration.
2.3.4.5
Modality is vignetting (warning message only)

(1) A Calibration successful screen
(e. g. Mammo) pops up.
Service menu
Calibration
Shading
Mammo
...press
to continue
:ok
5148_Chap03.6_007.cdr
figure 33
(3) A warning message pops up if the Warning:

Service menu
Calibration
signal dropped below the
Modality is vignetting. Shading
acceptable limit within a range of
Please inform customer.
3 mm at the left or right border.
Calibration is accepted.
:ok
5148_Chap03.6_002.cdr
figure 34

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 33
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(5) Check if:

- The exposure parameters have been the same as shown on the display.
- The collimation was used properly (if the exposure type is GenRad).
- The IP has no scratches in slow scan direction or has no dust.
- The photomultiplier floppy was properly installed after a PMT replacement.
- The backup floppy was properly installed after a software installation including
hard disk formatting.
(6) Redo the calibration.
(7) If the above actions do not show success and in case the Mammo exposure type
was selected:
- Look for the Mammography X-ray source with the smallest heel effect.
- Redo the calibration with this X-ray source and use the same bucky size
as for the first exposure.
(8) If the warning message still pops up, and still in case the Mammo exposure type
was selected, the following workaround is possible:
- Take a flatfield as evidence that the collimation area of the X-ray source does
not fit with the IP position in the bucky.
- Explain the problem to the customer and ask him to call the X-ray supplier for
a service intervention.
- Carry out a final calibration after the service intervention on the X-ray source.
NOTE:
In this workaround the left and the right 3 mm of the image are not shading
calibrated. It is the customers responsibility to use this workaround and to handle
the mismatch of cassette position and beam collimation.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 34
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
2.4
Verification of the Calibration

NOTE:
The calibration verification is always taking place after the shading calibration was
performed. There is no sense to perform the IP-center calibration verification before
the shading calibration procedure is done.
(1) Expose a cassette with a regular flatfield, to check the image quality of each used
application as described in the following table:
Application
Required Cassette
Procedure
GenRad fast
GenRad
35 x 43 cm
2.3.2.1
GenRad slow (1)
any GenRad cassette beside

35 x 43 cm and 35 x 35 cm
2.3.2.1
Mammography
largest format available
2.3.3.2 (2)
Extremity
Extremity
35 x 43 cm (3)
2.3.2.1
(1)
Only if digitizer is in slow mode.
(2)
If a Mammo X-ray modality is used, select 40 mAs instead 200 mAs for the Flatfield exposure.
(3)
You can also temporarily re-initialize a GenRad 35 x 43 cm cassette.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 35
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
(2) Identify the cassette as follows:

For GenRad application:
On CR QS Processing Station:
- Select Study type:
<System Diagnosis>.
- Select Substudy: <Flatfield>.
- Confirm Exposure class: <200>.
figure 35
- Select Exam Group:
<System Diagnosis>.
- Select Exposure Type: <FlatField>.
- Confirm Detector Sensitivity: <200>.
figure 36

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 36
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
For Mammo application:

On CR QS Processing Station:
- Select Study type:
<System Diagnosis>.
- Select Substudy:
<Flat field Mammo>.
- Confirm Exposure class: <50>.
figure 37
- Select Exam Group:
<System Diagnosis>.
- Select Exposure Type:
<FlatField Mammo>.
- Confirm Detector Sensitivity: <50>.
figure 38
(3) Insert the cassette into the Digitizer.

(4) Print the image with a window setting of 1.2 (level setting leaves unchanged).
(5) Check the image quality of the flatfield for absence of any stripes and large area
inhomogenities (shading calibration) and for absence of lateral borders (IP-center
calibration).
(6) Start the backup to save the new calibration parameters (see section 3).

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 37
Repair and Service

DD+DIS219.06E
Backup
(1)
Update the backup storage media to save the new machine specific data
(calibration, PD-factor).
(2)
Enter the Service Menu.
(3)
Select <3 Save data>

<2 Machine specific data>.
(4)
Follow the on-line instructions.

08-2008
CR 35-X - Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.6 / 38
Chapter 3.7
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Software Menus, Settings
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.7 is intentionally left blank.



eq_03-7_menus-setting_e_template_v02
Chapter 3.8
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Software Releases and Patches
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.8 is intentionally left blank.



eq_03-8_release-patch_e_template_v02
Chapter 3.9
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN 6000)
Chapter 3.9 is in preparation and will be made available via MedNet.



eq_03-9_faq_e_template_v02
HEALTHCARE
Chapter 4
Imaging Services
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN 6000)

This document contains:
reference diagrams for identification and location of assemblies inside the

machine including an alphanumeric reference list
block diagrams and overall diagrams
circuit diagrams of printed circuit boards, if necessary
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.0
12-2006

Document
Title
Service Bulletin

DD+DIS407.06E



eq_04_diagrams_e_template_v02
DD+DIS219.06E
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
on the product.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 2
DD+DIS219.06E
LIST OF CONTENTS
IDENTIFICATION DIAGRAMS .................................................................................................5
OVERVIEW OF UNITS.............................................................................................................5
LIST OF COMPONENTS .........................................................................................................6
FRAME (ASSEMBLY NO. 100) ..............................................................................................12
3.1
Diagram...................................................................................................................................12
3.2
Table of Components..............................................................................................................13
POWER UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 200)....................................................................................14

4.1
Diagram A Part 1 .................................................................................................................14
4.2
Table of Components / Diagram A Part 1............................................................................15
4.3
Diagram A Part 2 .................................................................................................................16
4.4
Table of Components / Diagram A Part 2............................................................................17
4.5
Diagram B Part 1 .................................................................................................................18
4.6
Table of Components / Diagram B Part 1............................................................................19
4.7
Diagram B Part 2 .................................................................................................................20
4.8
Table of Components / Diagram B Part 2............................................................................21
CPCI RACK (ASSEMBLY NO. 300) .......................................................................................22

5.1
Diagram...................................................................................................................................22
5.2
SCAN UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 400) .......................................................................................24

6.1
Diagram...................................................................................................................................24
6.2
ERASURE UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 500)................................................................................26

7.1
Diagram...................................................................................................................................26
7.2

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 3
DD+DIS219.06E
IP TRANSPORT UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 600).......................................................................28

8.1
Diagram...................................................................................................................................28
8.2
CASSETTE UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 700) ..............................................................................30

9.1
Diagram A ...............................................................................................................................30
9.2
Table of Components / Diagram A..........................................................................................31
9.3
Diagram B ...............................................................................................................................32
9.4
Table of Components / Diagram B..........................................................................................33
9.5
Diagram C ...............................................................................................................................34
9.6
Table of Components / Diagram C .........................................................................................35
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS .............................................................................................................35

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 4
DD+DIS219.06E
Identification Diagrams
Overview of Units
100
700
600
500
400
300
200
100 Frame
200 Power Unit
300
cPCI Rack
400 Scan Unit

500 Erasure Unit
600 IP Transport Unit
5156_reg04_001.cdr
700 Cassette Unit
figure 1
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 5
DD+DIS219.06E
List of Components
Component
Designation
Function
Refer to
(also used by Diagnosis mode)

100
BU319
Socket for Service PC
figure 2
100
BU122
Socket for Transport unit power

supply
figure 2
100
BU353
Socket for Erasure unit fan
figure 2
100
GS112
LCD-TERMINAL-BD
LCD terminal board
figure 2
100
GS114
IOBUS-DISTRIB
I/O-bus distributor board
figure 2
100
GS116
EMERGENCY-NODE
Status and Emergency node
figure 2
100
GS118
LCD-DISPLAY
LCD display
figure 2
100
M101
POWER-UNIT-FAN
Power unit fan
figure 2
500
M501
ERASURE-UNIT-FAN
Erasure unit fan
figure 2
100
S101
INTERLOCK-RIGHT
Interlock switch right hand side
figure 2
100
ST22
Plug for Transport unit
figure 2
100
ST319
Adapter Ethernet
figure 2
200
BU1
Socket on GS210
figure 3
200
BU2
Socket on GS210
figure 3
200
BU3
Socket on GS210
figure 3
200
BU3
Socket on GS230
figure 3
200
BU4
Socket on GS210
figure 3
200
BU5
Socket on GS210
figure 3
200
BU5
Socket on GS230
figure 3
200
BU6
Socket on GS210
figure 3
200
BU8
Socket on GS230
figure 3
200
BU235
Socket Power unit fan
figure 3
200
BU283
Socket for Power integration

board
figure 3
200
BU289
Socket for Erasure unit
figure 3
200
BU306
Socket for cPCI Power board

(230 V)
figure 3
200
BU312
figure 3

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 6
DD+DIS219.06E
Component
Designation
Function
Refer to

200
D9
LED indicator
figure 3
200
D10
LED indicator
figure 3
200
D11
LED indicator
figure 3
200
GS210
ERASURE-CTRL-BD
Erasure control board
figure 3
200
GS230
POWER-INTEGR-BD
figure 3
200
S201
MAINS-SWITCH
Mains switch with overload

protection
figure 3
200
S202
INTERLOCK-FRONT
Interlock switch front side
figure 3
200
S203
LINE-SELECTOR
Line selector
figure 3
200
SI201
POW-FUSE
Power Unit fuse T2.0A
figure 3
200
SI202
SM-TRANSF-FUSE
Stepper motor transformer fuse

T2.0A
figure 3
200
ST1
Plug on GS210
figure 4
200
ST1
Plug on GS230
figure 4
200
ST2
Plug on GS210
figure 4
200
ST2
Plug on GS230
figure 4
200
ST3
Plug on GS210
figure 4
200
ST4
Plug on GS210
figure 4
200
ST5
Plug on GS210
figure 4
200
ST7
Jumper on GS230
(CM+9 5156 6450 1)
figure 4
200
ST8
Jumper on GS230
(CM+9 5156 6450 1)
figure 4
200
ST309
Plug Interlock switch right hand

side
figure 4
200
ST310
Plug I/O-bus power unit
figure 4
200
ST337
Plug on BU289, connection to

erasure unit
figure 4
200
ST338

erasure unit
figure 4
200
BU1
Socket for Current sense board
figure 5
200
BU2
Socket for Current sense board
figure 5
200
BU311
Socket for Transformer
figure 5

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 7
DD+DIS219.06E
Component
Designation
Function
Refer to

200
GS220
CURRENT-SENSE
Current sense board
figure 5
200
GS240
POWER-SUPPL
Power supply 24 V
figure 5
200
MC201
LINE-FILTER
Line filter
figure 5
200
PE1
Ground
figure 5
200
ST1
Plug Current sense board
figure 5
200
ST229
Mains plug
figure 5
200
TR206
Stepper motor transformer 30 V
figure 5
200
30V-TRANSFORMER
ERASURE-TRANSF-UNIT
figure 6
200
TR 201
Transformer erasure lamps 1, 6
figure 6
200
TR 202
figure 6
200
TR 203
figure 6
200
TR 204
figure 6
200
TR 205
Transformer erasure lamps 5, 10 figure 6
200
GS230
POWER-INTEGR-BD
SI 1
figure 6
200
SI 2
figure 6
200
SI 3
figure 6
200
SI 4
figure 6
200
SI 5
figure 6
Ground
figure 7
300
300PE1
300
M301
CPCI-RACK-FAN
cPCI-Rack: Fan motor
figure 7
300
GS300
BACKPLANE
cCPI-Rack: Backplane
figure 7
300
GS302
HARDDISK
cCPI-Rack: Harddisk drive
figure 7
300
GS304
FLOPPY
cCPI-Rack: Floppy drive
figure 7
300
GS306
CPCI-POWER-BD
cCPI-Rack: Power unit
figure 7
300
GS310
SCAN-CTRL-M-BD
Scan Master Board
figure 7
300
GS312
CPU-ARIEL-BD
CPU-Ariel Board
figure 7

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 8
DD+DIS219.06E
Component
Designation
Function
Refer to

400
M401
ROLLER-LIFT-MOT
Roller lift motor
figure 8
400
M402
SLOWSCAN-MOTOR
Slowscan drive motor
figure 8
400
GS410
SCAN-ROLLS-LIFT
Stepper motor board of roller lift

motor M401
figure 8
400
GS412
SLOWSCAN-BD
Stepper motor board of slow

scan motor M402
figure 8
400
GS420
OPTIKMODUL
Optic Module
figure 8
400
GS422
PM-TUBE 1
figure 8
400
GS436
POLYGON_CTRL
Polygon control board
figure 8
400
GS440
PIN-DIODE-BD
Pin diode board
figure 8
400
GS442
IP-ALIGNMENT-LS
IP alignment light barrier sender
figure 8
400
GS444
IP- ALIGNMENT -LS
IP alignment light barrier receiver figure 8
400
GS446
IP-DET-LS
Scanner IP detection light barrier figure 8
400
GS448
ROLLER-LIFT-LS
Scan roller lift 0-position light

barrier
figure 8
400
ST14
Plug for scan roller lift motor
figure 8
400
ST351
Plug for I/O-bus scan
figure 8
500
BU358
figure 9
500
ST349

power unit
figure 9
500
LA1 + LA6
ERASURE-LAMPS
Erasure lamps 1 and 6
figure 9
500
LA2 + LA7
ERASURE-LAMPS
figure 9
500
LA3 + LA8
ERASURE-LAMPS
figure 9
500
LA4 + LA9
ERASURE-LAMPS
figure 9
500
LA5+ LA10 ERASURE-LAMPS
figure 9

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 9
DD+DIS219.06E
Component
Designation
Function
Refer to

600
GS602
IP-TRANSPORT-BD
IP transport board
figure 10
600
GS604
IP-TRANSP-0-LS
IP transport 0-position light

barrier
figure 10
600
GS606
SOLENOID-VALVE
Solenoid valve
figure 10
600
GS608
VACUUM-PUMP
Vacuum pump
figure 10
600
M601
IP-TRANSPORT-MOT
IP transport motor
figure 10
600
ST123
Plug and socket for power supply figure 10

stepper motor
600
ST350
Plug and socket for solenoid

valve and vacuum pump
figure 10
700
GS716
CASS-OPEN-0-LS
Cassette opener
0-position light barrier
figure 11
700
GS720
CASS-SWITCH
Cassette detection switch
figure 11
700
GS722
CASS-CLAMP-0-LS
Cassette clamp
figure 11
700
GS726
CASS-POS-DET-LS
Cassette position detection light

barrier
figure 11
700
GS728
ALIGN-0-POS-LS
IP alignment 0-position light

barrier
figure 11
700
GS730
IP-POS-DET-LS
IP position detection light barrier
figure 11
700
GS732
CASS-IN-DET-LS
Cassette input detection light

barrier sender
figure 11
700
GS734
CASS-IN-DET-LS
Cassette input detection light

barrier receiver
figure 11
700
GS736
RF-TAG-READER
RF-tag serial reader
figure 11
700
GS738
RF-TAG-ANTENNA
RF-tag antenna
figure 11
700
M702
CASS-OPENER-MOT
Cassette opener motor
figure 11
700
GS714
CASS-BELT-0-LS
Cassette belt 0-position light

barrier
figure 12
700
GS718
CASS-LIFT-0-LS
Cassette lift 0-position light

barrier
figure 12
700
GS724
CASS-CLAMP-LS
Cassette clamp light barrier
figure 12
700
M701
CASS-ROLLER-MOT
Cassette roller motor
figure 12
700
M703
CASS-LIFT-MOT
Cassette lift motor
figure 12

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 10
DD+DIS219.06E
Component
Designation
Function
Refer to

700
M704
CASS-BELT-MOT
Cassette unit belt motor
figure 12
700
M705
CASS-CLAMP-MOT
Cassette clamping motor
figure 12
700
M706
IP-ALIGNMENT-MOT
IP alignment stepper motor
figure 12
700
BU170
Socket for 40 V cassette power

supply
figure 13
700
BU377
Socket for RF-tag serial reader
figure 13
700
GS710
Fivefold stepper motor board,

jumper JL1
jumper JL2
figure 13
IP alignment board
figure 13
5FOLD-STEP-BD
5FOLD-STEP-JL1
5FOLD-STEP-JL2
700
GS712
IP-ALIGNMENT-BD
700
ST5
Plug for I/O-bus cassette unit
figure 13
700
ST21
Plug and Socket for cassette

opener motor
figure 13

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 11
DD+DIS219.06E
Frame (Assembly No. 100)
3.1
Diagram
BU353
M501
BU319
ST22
5158_reg04_001.cdr
figure 2

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 12
DD+DIS219.06E
3.2
Table of Components
Ass.
Abbreviation
Designation
Function
Circuit
diagram
page/
coord.
7 / B1
(also used by
Diagnosis mode)
100
BU319
Socket for Service PC
100
BU122
Socket for Transport unit 6 / A1-B1

power supply
100
BU353

fan
5 / A4-B4
100
GS112
LCD-TERMINAL-BD
LCD terminal board
7 / D1-D2
100
GS114
IOBUS-DISTRIB
I/O-bus distributor board 7 / B2-B3
100
GS116
EMERGENCY-NODE Status and Emergency

node
7 / C3-D3
100
GS118
LCD-DISPLAY
LCD display
7 / E1-F2
100
M101
POWER-UNIT-FAN
Power unit fan
7 / B1
500
M501
ERASURE-UNITFAN
Erasure unit fan
5 / B4
100
S101
INTERLOCK-RIGHT
Interlock switch right

hand side
7 / B4
100
ST22
Plug for Transport unit
6 / A3
100
ST319
Adapter Ethernet
7 / A3-B3

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 13
DD+DIS219.06E
Power Unit (Assembly No. 200)
4.1
Diagram A Part 1
ST5
ST4
BU1
BU2
BU3
BU4
BU5
BU8
BU3
BU6
ST3
GS210
ST2
ST1
GS230
ST2
BU5
D9
D10
D11
ST1
ST7
ST8
S203
ST309
SI201
SI202
BU283
S201
ST310
S202
BU289
BU235
BU306
BU312
5155_reg04_008.cdr
figure 3

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 14
DD+DIS219.06E
4.2
Table of Components / Diagram A Part 1

Ass.
Abbreviation
Designation
Function
Circuit
diagram
page/
coord.
(also used by
Diagnosis mode)
200
BU1
Socket on GS210
4 / A2
200
BU2
Socket on GS210
4 / A2/3
200
BU3
Socket on GS210
4 / A3
200
BU3
Socket on GS230
4 / D2
200
BU4
Socket on GS210
4 / A4
200
BU5
Socket on GS210
4 / A4
200
BU5
Socket on GS230
4 / E2
200
BU6
Socket on GS210
4 / A1
200
BU8
Socket on GS230
4 / D2
200
BU235
Socket Power unit fan
4 / E1
200
BU283
Socket for Power

integration board
4 / E1
200
BU289
4 / E3
200
BU306
Socket for cPCI Power

board (230 V)
4 / D1
200
BU312
4 / E4
200
D9
LED indicator
4 / E2/3
200
D10
LED indicator
4 / E2
200
D11
LED indicator
4 / E2
200
GS210
ERASURE-CTRL-BD Erasure control board
200
GS230
POWER-INTEGR-BD Power integration board 4 / D2-E2
200
S201
MAINS-SWITCH
200
S202
INTERLOCK-FRONT Interlock switch front

side
4 / B1
200
S203
LINE-SELECTOR
Line selector
4 / A/B1
200
SI201
POW-FUSE
Power Unit fuse T2.0A
4 / D1
200
SI202
SM-TRANSF-FUSE
Stepper motor
transformer fuse T2.0A
4 / B19
Mains switch with

overload protection
4 / A1-A4
4 / C1

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 15
DD+DIS219.06E
4.3
Diagram A Part 2
ST5
ST4
BU1
BU2
BU3
BU4
BU5
BU8
BU3
BU6
ST3
GS210
ST2
ST1
GS230
ST2
BU5
D9
D10
D11
ST1
ST7
ST8
S203
ST309
SI201
SI202
BU283
S201
ST310
S202
BU289
BU235
BU306
BU312
5155_reg04_008.cdr
figure 4

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 16
DD+DIS219.06E
4.4
Table of Components / Diagram A Part 2

Ass.
Abbreviation
Designation
Function
Circuit
diagram
page/
coord.
(also used by
Diagnosis mode)
200
ST1
Plug on GS210
4 / A4
200
ST1
Plug on GS230
4 / E3
200
ST2
Plug on GS210
4 / A4
200
ST2
Plug on GS230
4 / E2/3
200
ST3
Plug on GS210
4 / A1
200
ST4
Plug on GS210
4 / A1
200
ST5
Plug on GS210
4 / A1
200
ST7
Jumper on GS230
(CM+9 5156 6450 1).
--
For settings, see

chapter 3.5.
200
ST8
Jumper on GS230
(CM+9 5156 6450 1).
--
For settings, see

chapter 3.5.
200
ST309
Plug Interlock switch

right hand side
4 / E3
200
ST310
Plug I/O-bus power unit
4 / E3
200
ST337
Plug on BU289,
connection to erasure
unit
4 / E3
200
ST338
Plug on BU312,
connection to erasure
unit
4 / E1

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 17
DD+DIS219.06E
4.5
Diagram B Part 1
MC201
GS230
SI1 - SI4
SI5
ST229
TR202
TR201
PE1
TR204
TR205
BU1
ST1
GS220
BU2
TR206
TR203
GS240
BU311
5156_reg04_009.cdr
figure 5

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 18
DD+DIS219.06E
4.6
Table of Components / Diagram B Part 1

Ass.
Abbreviation
Designation
Function
Diagram
(in Diagnosis mode)
page/coord.
200
BU1
Socket for Current

sense board GS220
4 / C3
200
BU2
Socket for Current

sense board GS220
4 / C3
200
BU311
Socket for Transformer 4 / C3
200
GS220
CURRENT-SENSE
Current sense board
4 / C3-C4
200
GS240
POWER-SUPPL
Power supply 24 V
4 / C1-C2
200
MC201
LINE-FILTER
Line filter
4 / D1
200
PE1
Ground
4 / E4
200
ST1
Plug Current sense

board GS220
4 / C4
200
ST229
Mains plug
4 / E1
200
TR206
Stepper motor
transformer 30 V
4 / B1-C1
30VTRANSFORMER

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 19
DD+DIS219.06E
4.7
Diagram B Part 2
MC201
GS230
SI1 - SI4
SI5
ST229
TR202
TR201
PE1
TR204
TR205
BU1
ST1
GS220
BU2
TR206
TR203
GS240
BU311
5156_reg04_009.cdr
figure 6

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 20
DD+DIS219.06E
4.8
Table of Components / Diagram B Part 2

Erasure Transformer Unit
Ass.
Abbreviation
200
Designation
Function
Diagram
page/coord.
ERASURETRANSF-UNIT
4 / B2-B4
200
TR 201
Transformer erasure
lamps 1, 6
4 / B2
200
TR 202
Transformer erasure
lamps 2, 7
4 / B2-B3
200
TR 203
Transformer erasure
lamps 3, 8
4 / B3
200
TR 204
Transformer erasure
lamps 4, 9
4 / B3-B4
200
TR 205
Transformer erasure
lamps 5, 10
4 / B4
GS230 Fuses
Ass.
Abbr.
Designation
Fuse
Quality
200
GS230
POWER-INTEGR-BD SI 1
T 2.5 A
200
SI 2
T 2.5 A
200
SI 3
T 2.5 A
200
SI 4
T 2.5 A
200
SI 5
T 6.25 A

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 21
DD+DIS219.06E
cPCI Rack (Assembly No. 300)
5.1
Diagram
M301
GS302
GS304
GS300
GS310
GS312
GS306
figure 7

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 22
DD+DIS219.06E
5.2
Table of Components
Ass.
Abbreviation
Designation
Function
Circuit
diagram
page/
coord.
Ground
2 / B2
(also used by
Diagnosis mode)
300
300PE1
300
M301
CPCI-RACK-FAN
cPCI-Rack: Fan motor
2 / A/B1/2
300
GS300
BACKPLANE
cCPI-Rack: Backplane
2 / B/C1-4
300
GS302
HARDDISK
cCPI-Rack: Harddisk
drive
2 / A3-A4
300
GS304
FLOPPY
cCPI-Rack: Floppy drive
2 / A3
300
GS306
CPCI-POWER-BD
cCPI-Rack: Power unit
2 / C1
300
GS310
SCAN-CTRL-M-BD
Scan Master Board
2 / C2-C3
300
GS312
CPU-ARIEL-BD
CPU-Oberon Board
2 / C3-C4

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 23
DD+DIS219.06E
Scan Unit (Assembly No. 400)
6.1
Diagram
figure 8

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 24
DD+DIS219.06E
6.2
Table of Components
Ass.
Abbreviation
Designation
Function
(also used by
Diagnosis mode)
Circuit
diagram
page/
coord.
400
M401
ROLLER-LIFT-MOT Roller lift motor
3/C4
400
M402
SLOWSCANMOTOR
3/E4
400
GS410
SCAN-ROLLS-LIFT Stepper motor board of

roller lift motor M401
3/C2D3
400
GS412
SLOWSCAN-BD
Stepper motor board of

slow scan motor M402
3/E2-F3
400
GS420
OPTIKMODUL
Optic Module
3/A4
400
GS422
PM-TUBE1
3/A2
400
GS436
POLYGON_CTRL
Polygon control board
3/A3
400
GS440
PIN-DIODE-BD
Pin diode board
3/E1-F1
400
GS442
IP-ALIGNMENT-LS
IP alignment light barrier

sender
3/D1-E1
400
GS444
IP- ALIGNMENT LS
IP alignment light barrier

receiver
3/E1
400
GS446
IP-DET-LS
Scanner IP detection light 3/F1

barrier
400
GS448
ROLLER-LIFT-LS
Scan roller lift 0-position

light barrier
3/C1-D1
400
ST14
Plug for scan roller lift

motor
3 / C3/4
400
ST351
Plug for I/O-bus scan
3 / C2
Slowscan drive motor

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 25
DD+DIS219.06E
Erasure Unit (Assembly No. 500)
7.1
Diagram
BU358
LA1
LA2
LA3
LA4
LA5
LA6
LA7
LA8
LA9
LA10
5156_reg04_007.cdr
figure 9

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 26
DD+DIS219.06E
7.2
Table of Components
Ass.
Abbreviation
Designation
Function
Circuit
diagram
page/
coord.
5 / B2-B3
(also used by
Diagnosis mode)
500
BU358
500
ST349
Plug on BU358,
5 / B2-B3
connection to power unit
500
LA1 +
LA6
ERASURE-LAMPS
5 / B2-F2
500
LA2 +
LA7
ERASURE-LAMPS
5 / B2-F2
500
LA3 +
LA8
ERASURE-LAMPS
5 / B2-F2
500
LA4 +
LA9
ERASURE-LAMPS
5 / B2-F2
500
LA5+
LA10
ERASURE-LAMPS
Erasure lamps 5 and 10 5 / B2-F2
NOTE:
Erasure unit fan M501 is part of the frame (Assembly No. 100)!

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 27
DD+DIS219.06E
IP Transport Unit (Assembly No. 600)
8.1
Diagram
ST350
ST123
JL1
1
GS608
GS602
GS604
GS606
M 601
5155_reg04_005.cdr
figure 10

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 28
DD+DIS219.06E
8.2
Table of Components
Ass.
Abbreviation
Designation
Function
Circuit
diagram
page/
coord.
600
GS602
IP-TRANSPORT-BD
IP transport board
6 / B2-B3
600
GS604
IP-TRANSP-0-LS
IP transport 0-position
light barrier
6 / C2-D3
600
GS606
SOLENOID-VALVE
Solenoid valve
6 / E1-F1
600
GS608
VACUUM-PUMP
Vacuum pump
6 / E2-F2
600
M601
IP-TRANSPORTMOT
IP transport motor
6 / C/D3
600
ST123
Plug and socket for

power supply stepper
motor
6 / B2
600
ST350
Plug and socket for

solenoid valve and
vacuum pump
6 / C1
(also used by
Diagnosis mode)

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 29
DD+DIS219.06E
Cassette Unit (Assembly No. 700)
9.1
Diagram A
GS736
M702
GS738
GS728
GS716
GS726
GS720
GS730
GS732
GS734
GS722
5155_reg04_010.cdr
figure 11

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 30
DD+DIS219.06E
9.2
Table of Components / Diagram A

Ass.
Abbreviation
Designation
Function
Circuit
diagram
page/
coord.
700
GS716
CASS-OPEN-0-LS
Cassette opener
1 / C5-D6
700
GS720
CASS-SWITCH
Cassette detection
switch
1 / D5-D6
700
GS722
CASS-CLAMP-0-LS
Cassette clamp
1 / B5-B6
700
GS726
CASS-POS-DET-LS
Cassette position
detection light barrier
1 /E5-E6
700
GS728
ALIGN-0-POS-LS
IP alignment 0-position 1 / G5-G6

light barrier
700
GS730
IP-POS-DET-LS
IP position detection
light barrier
1 / G5-G6
700
GS732
CASS-IN-DET-LS
Cassette input
sender
1 / F5-F6
700
GS734
CASS-IN-DET-LS
Cassette input
receiver
1 / E5-F6
700
GS736
RF-TAG-READER
RF-tag serial reader
1 / G1-G2
700
GS738
RF-TAG-ANTENNA
RF-tag antenna
1 / H1
700
M702
CASS-OPENER-MOT
Cassette opener motor 1 / D1
(also used by
Diagnosis mode)

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 31
DD+DIS219.06E
9.3
Diagram B
GS714
GS718
GS724
M703
M705
M704
M701
M706
figure 12
5155_reg04_011.cdr

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 32
DD+DIS219.06E
9.4
Table of Components / Diagram B

Ass.
Abbreviation
Designation
Function
Circuit
diagram
page/
coord.
700
GS714
CASS-BELT-0-LS
Cassette belt 0position light barrier
1 / A5-A6
700
GS718
CASS-LIFT-0-LS
Cassette lift 0-position

light barrier
1 / A5-B6
700
GS724
CASS-CLAMP-LS
Cassette clamp light

barrier
1 / C5-C6
700
M701
CASS-ROLLER-MOT
Cassette roller motor
1 / E1
700
M703
CASS-LIFT-MOT
Cassette lift motor
1 / C1
700
M704
CASS-BELT-MOT
Cassette unit belt

motor
1 / B1
700
M705
CASS-CLAMP-MOT
Cassette clamping
motor
1 / A1
700
M706
IP-ALIGNMENT-MOT
IP alignment stepper
motor
1 / F1
(also used by
Diagnosis mode)

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 33
DD+DIS219.06E
9.5
Diagram C
GS712
BU377
ST21
JL1
1
ST5
BU170
JL2
8
5156_reg04_005.cdr
GS710
figure 13

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 34
DD+DIS219.06E
9.6
Table of Components / Diagram C

Ass.
Abbreviation
Designation
Function
Circuit
diagram
page/
coord.
(also used by
Diagnosis mode)
700
BU170
Socket for 40 V
cassette power supply
1 / G3
700
BU377
Socket for RF-tag

serial reader
1 / G2
700
GS710
1 / A3-F4
5FOLD-STEP-JL1
5FOLD-STEP-JL2
Fivefold stepper motor

board,
jumper JL1
jumper JL2
IP-ALIGNMENT-BD
IP alignment board
1 / F3-F4
5FOLD-STEP-BD
700
GS712
700
ST5
Plug for I/O-bus

cassette unit
1 / G4
700
ST21
Plug and Socket for

cassette opener motor
1 / D2
Circuit Diagrams
F1.5158.4003.0 (sheet 1-7)
(see the following pages)

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 4 / 35
GS738-RFTAG-ANTENNA
GS736-RFTAG-READER
1
BU1
*6/6
ST1
#11/20
2/2
1/2
F8.5155.4502.X
2/2
ST377
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
700MA8
700MA2
F8.5156.4622.X
RF_READER
/PCI_RACK_300.2F
100MA
700MA3
1/5
2/5
3/5
4/5
5/5
*4/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
2/2
1/2
ST5
1
2
3
4
ST157
F8.5156.4506.X
-ST360
700C1
BU1
4
4/4
1/2
10000F/63V
+
*4/4
ST14
1
2
3
1/4
2/4
3/4
ST15
*4/4
ST18
1
2
3
4
L8.7674.8820.0
F8.5145.4574.X
F8.5145.4524.X
-BU371
BU377
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
B1
B3
B2
B4
A4
F8.5158.4690.X
1
2
3
4
A3
700MA6
700MA10
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
ST17
*4/4
ST24
1
2
3
4
ST23
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
4
4/4
*4/4
ST33
1
2
3
1/4
2/4
3/4
ST32
*4/4
700MA7
700MA12
700MA16
1
2
3
4
A1
A2
ST21
F8.5120.5165.X
F8.5120.5165.X
F8.5145.4574.X
700MA14
1
700MA11
ST34
YE
700MA9
700MA1
700MA15
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
RD
ST35
YE
GS736/ST1
1
2
3
4
F8.5145.4574.X
700MA13
OR
*2/2
BR
M
RD
YE
F8.5155.4508.X
-M706-IP-ALIGNMENT-MOT
OR
RD
GN
GN
OR
YE
GNWT
YEWT
YE
RD
BR
BK
M701-CASS-ROLLER-MOT
*6/6
5/20
6/20
7/20
8/20
9/20
OR
BR
BU1
*6
5
6
7
8
9
M702-CASS-OPENER-MOT
M703_CASS-LIFT-MOT
RD
RDWT
BKWT
BK
GNWT
YEWT
YE
BR
ST1
1/20
2/20
3/20
4/20
M704-CASS-BELT-MOT
M705-CASS-CLAMP-MOT
RD
RDWT
BKWT
F7.0486.1316.X
F7.0486.1351.X
#4/6
1
F8.5155.4502.X
ST170
BU170
1
2
3
4
ST4
40v_cass
1
2
3
4
F8.5155.4612.X
/POWER_UNIT_200.2
3
JL1
*2/2
5678
1/2
ST10
4A 2A
ST1
#4/6
ST421
GS712/BU1
*26/26
*26
F8.5155.4629.X
#26
*26
F8.5155.4504.X
#4/6
ST5
*26
*26 *26
BU349
#4/6
*4/4
GS712-IPALIGNMENT-BD
F8.9499.8140.X
#4/6
IO-BUS_CASS
/FRAME_100.2A
F8.5155.4636.X
#2
700MA5
JL2
SUBNODE1
*4/4
F8.9499.8120.X
JL1
12 34 5 67 8
SUBNODE2
#4/6
8 76 5 43 21
1234
GS710-5FOLDSTEP-BD
*2/2
#4/6
ST3
#4/6
#4/6
ST2
#4/6
*26/26
ST3
6/6
5/6
4/6
3/6
2/6
1/6
ST51
#4/6
ST19
#4/6
#4/6
ST8
#4/6
ST11
*26/26
#4/6
ST39
#4/6
ST40
#4/6
#4/6
ST2
#4/6
#4/6
ST38
*4
*4
#4/6
F8.9889.0615.X
#4/6
*26
GS710/BU3
*4
F8.9889.0570.X
F8.5156.4518.X
*4
*4
*4
F8.9889.0585.X
F8.9889.0585.X
F8.9889.0555.X
*4
*4
F8.9889.0560.X
F8.9889.0540.X
*4
F8.9889.0555.X
F8.5155.4504.X
F8.5155.4510.X
5
*4
ST1
#4/6
*4
#4/6
ST1
1
2
3
4
1/6
2/6
3/6
4/6
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
ST1
ST1
1
2
3
4
*4
ST1
#4/6
*3
*3/3
ST1
ST1
#4/6
*4
*4
#4/6
ST1
*4/4
ST1
#4/6
ST1
#4/6
ST1
*4
*4
*4
X
X
X
X
GS718-CASSLIFT-0-LS
F8.9499.6540.X
GS714-CASSBELT-0-LS
GS724-CASSCLAMP-LS
F8.9499.6540.X
GS716-CASSOPEN-0-LS
F8.9499.6540.X
GS720-CASSSWITCH
F8.5156.7000.X
GS734-CASSIN-DET-LS
F8.5100.7460.X
GS726-CASSPOS-DET-LS
F8.9499.6540.X
GS732-CASSIN-DET-LS
F8.9499.4630.X
VDE/UL/CSA
- Teil Aenderungen
nur mit
Zustimmung
von
GS730-IP-POSDET-LS
F8.9499.6770.X
GS728-ALIGN0-POS-LS
F8.9499.6540.X
FT-LPS
USER
APPR.
AGFA
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information

contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to
third parties without explicit authorisation is strictly forbidden.
F8.9499.6540.X
GS722-CASSCLAMP-0-LS
F8.9499.5880.X
NAME
20.04.06
Leith.
General Schematic
CR 35-X
Project
5158
0B
39324
4.09.06
Leith.
Sheet name: CASSETTE_UNIT_700
/ 100
0A
39251
14.07.06
Leith.
F1.5158.4003.0
Sheet 1
DATE
NAME
Replacement for
37889
A
DATE
IDX
Change-NR
NORM
of
7 SH
CPCI-RACK-FAN
3J4
#135/137
-M300
BU1
*3/3
3J1
#135/137
ST429
M
2
BU5
*3/3
1
BU875
1
2
ST427
1
2
1
2
BU1
BU6
#48/50
ST1
#48/50
1/2
2/2
1
GS306
F8.5146.1430.X
F8.5155.4670.X
CPCI-POWER-BD
MC301
BU883
L
L1
BU876
1
BU870
1
3A
250VAC
PE
/POWER_UNIT_200.1F
BU877
1
BU313
1
ST3
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
N1
POWER
300PE1
2J4
#135/137
BU4
1/17
2/17
8/17
9/17
10/17
15/17
3/17
4/17
7/17
11/17
12/17
14/17
5/17
6/17
13/17
16/17
17/17
GS310/ST4
1
bk
2
br
8
rd
9
or
10
ye
15
gn
3
bk
4
br
7
rd
11
or
12
ye
14
gn
5
bk
6
br
13
rd
16
17
BU6
#10/11
GS310/ST6
#10
BU2
#135/137
2J1
#135/137
BU1
#135/137
10/11
GS304
BU317
*34
BU3
#9/10
ST1
#34/36
SCAN-CTRL-M-BD
ST1
1/4
2/4
BU314
*34
BU315
1
2
BU5
#25/27
26/27
ST1
#25/27
/SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_400.1B
POLYGON_CTRL
F7.0477.1084.X
GS310/BU2
#9
RF_READER
F8.5156.4622.X
/CASSETTE_UNIT_700.2I
10
GS310/ST3
#9
GS310/ST5
#25
26
F8.5156.4640.X
LCD
F8.5156.4570.X
IO_Bus_PCI
F8.5156.4646.X
LD-MODUL
F7.0477.1070.0
ethernet
F8.5156.4610.X
service
/FRAME_100.1A
/FRAME_100.2A
GS310/BU1
#25
26
F8.5146.1460.X
GS310
ST1
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
BU316
1
2
3
4
BU318
ST428
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
ST2
#68/70
ST318
1
2
3
4
BU3
1/4
2/2
3/4
4/4
ST2
#68/70
1J4
#135/137
P4
#135/137
1J2
#135/137
P8
#135/137
1J1
#135/137
P10
#135/137
GS302
ST1
*8/8
BU1
*11/11
HARDDISK
F7.0486.1354.X
GS312/BU1
*8
GS312/ST1
*10
/FRAME_100.3A
/FRAME_100.1A
F8.5146.1440.X
F7.0486.1342.0
BACKPLANE
GS300
CPCI-RACK
AGFA

PM_1
L7.0460.9089.0
26/27
FLOPPY
L7.0486.1365.X
F8.5158.4636.X
L7.0460.9074.0
ST2
#9/11
ST2
#34/36
L7.0460.9089.0
USER
F8.5146.1500.X
CPU-OBERON-BD
GS312
F8.5156.1400.X
APPR.
NAME
20.04.06
Leith.
General Schematic
CR 35-X
Sheet name:
PCI_RACK_300
0B
39324
4.09.06
Leith.
0A
39251
14.07.06
Leith.
F1.5158.4003.0
DATE
NAME
Replacement for
37889
A
DATE
IDX
Change-NR
NORM
Project
5158
/ 100
Sheet 2
of
7 SH
ST1
#4/6
ST1
#4/6
ST1
#8/10
F8.5155.4432.X
*10
*4
GS440/BU1
*4
GS446/BU1
#8
GS444/BU1
ST3
#10/12
ST1
#4/6
BU1
#6/7
GS440/BU3
*4
GS448/BU1
SCAN-IP-DET-LS
F8.9889.0580.X
400MA2
ST2
#12/14
IR-Send
D7
GS440-PIN-DIODE-BD
f1-5155-4963-0a.dfs
GS440/BU2
*12
F8.5158.4636.X
*4
GS442/BU1
F8.9889.0520.X
GS446
F8.9499.4640.X
IP-Alignment-LS
ST1
#4/6
S5
GS448 ROLLER-LIFT-LS
F8.9499.6540.x
GS444
f1-5155-2233-0a.df
IP-Alignment-LS
F8.5155.4628.X
F8.5155.4638.X
L7.0460.9089.0
F8.5155.4434.X
St10
4A
7 8
ST8
#4/6
2A
JL1
1 2 3 4
GND
GND
ST2
#4/6
ST3
#4/6
St10
2A
JL1
1 2 3 4 5 6
5 6
ST11
#4/6
7 8
ST10
*3/3
ST10
*3/3
ST9
ST5
*4/4
ST7
1/4
2/4
3/4
4
3
2
1
GS412/BU7
4
ST5
4/4
GS412/BU5
4
GS410/BU7
F8.5145.4592.X
4/4
F8.9499.8140.X
GS412-SLOWSCAN-BD
4/4
3/4
2/4
1/4
ST7
4
3
2
1
1
400MA4
+
GND
GND
2/4
1/4
4A
3/4
ST1
*26/26
ST3
#4/6
4
5
F8.9499.8140.X
GS410-SCAN-ROLLS-LIFT
400MA7
GS436/BU1
ST11
#4/6
ST4
1/5
2/5
3/5
4/5
5/5
2
1
4
5
GS412/BU4
1
2
ST4
1/5
2/5
3/5
4/5
5/5
ST2
#4/6
ST8
#4/6
ST1
*26/26
F8.5156.4646.X
F7.0477.1084.X
1/17
2/17
8/17
9/17
10/17
15/17
3/17
4/17
7/17
11/17
12/17
14/17
5/17
6/17
13/17
16/17
17/17
ST1
L7.0460.9074.0
GS410/BU4
1
2
400MA3
*8
GS412/BU2
2
3
ST1
*8/8
S1
GS412/ST3
*4
GS412/BU1
400MA1
-GS422-PM-Module
F8.5148.2250.X
*4
GS410/ST3
*26
*26
GS410/BU2
*4
F8.5155.4436.X
GS410/BU1
1
2
ST351
*26
*4
BU351
*26
400MA2
GS422/BU1
1 bk
2 br
8 rd
9 or
10 ye
15 gn
3 bk
4 br
7 rd
11 or
12 ye
14 gn
5 bk
6 br
13 rd
16
17
E
GS442
f7-5155-2221-0.dfb
IO-BUS_SCAN
40V_SCAN
LD-MODUL
/FRAME_100.2A
/PCI_RACK_300.3F
/PCI_RACK_300.2F
POLYGON_CTRL
PM_1
1
/POWER_UNIT_200.2F
B
/PCI_RACK_300.2F
ST2
#25/27
F8.5145.4760.X
YE
1
400MA6
OR
26
F8.5145.4578.X
26/27
400MA5
Shielding
BL
RD
M401-ROLLER-LIFT-MOT
USER
APPR.
NAME
20.04.06
Leith.
General Schematic
CR 35-X
Sheet name:
SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_400
39324
4.09.06
Leith.
0A
39251
14.07.06
Leith.
F1.5158.4003.0
DATE
NAME
Replacement for
37889
C
DATE
0B
(IP-Clamp)
A
ORWT
BKWT
BK
M402-SLOWSCAN-MOTOR
YE WT
GS420 OPTIKMODUL
F8.5156.2700.X
GS420/BU2
#25
AGFA

4
3
2
1
BU421
YEWT
RDWT
RD
A4
A3
A2
A1
B4
B3
B2
B1
ST14
-GS436-Polygon-Driver-BD
IDX
Change-NR
NORM
Project
5158
/ 100
Sheet 3
of
7 SH
F8.5155.4130.X
1/5
2/5
3/5
4/5
5/5
1/3
-ST237
1
F8.5158.4142.X
-BU292
BU272
BU271
100VAC
BU333
1
1
BU332
F8.5155.4120.X
Si202
*3
200PE1
BU335
-XK13
14
0V
/15
TR206-30VTRANFORMER
GS240-24V-
0V
sw (bk)
15
13.0
VAC
BU311
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
sw (bk)
8
1
2
3
120.1VAC
(rd) rt
100VAC
(bk) sw
3.2AT
0V
bl
12.4
VAC
13
15
sw (bk)
ST310
sw (bk)
BU317
*20
BU342
*26
F8.5156.6480.X
TR205-ERASURE-TRANSF
230VAC
9
rt (rd)
br
8
120.1VAC
(rd) rt
100VAC
(bk) sw
3.2AT
F8.5155.4180.X
0V
12.4
VAC
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
SI1
SI4
rt (rd)
sw (bk)
sw
SI3
-BU341
11
GN
D9 RT
-ST352
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
1
2
3
4
40V_SCAN
2
/SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_4
40v_cass
F8.5155.4612.X
ST2
D9 GE
-BU308
T2,5A
F8.5155.4190.X
F8.5155.4140.X
F8.5155.4632.X
ST310
2
BU314
-ST309 BU309
-BU2
4/12
3/12
12/12
6/12
2/12
11/12
9/12
1/12
7/12
10/12
4
3
12
6
2
11
9
1
7
10
IO-BUS_LE
F8.5155.4170.X
200MA5
Interlock
F8.5155.4642.X
/FRAME_100.4A
3
ST337
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
F8.5155.4170.X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
F8.5156.4680.X
( Erasure_drilled )
Loesch_verdrillt
F8.5156.4680.X
BU312
ST338
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
F8.5156.4680.X
DATE
NAME
20.04.06
Leith.
/ERASURE_UNIT_500.3A
-BU318/AR
13
15
BU5
F8.5155.4170.X
4/12
3/12
12/12
6/12
2/12
11/12
9/12
1/12
7/12
10/12
GS220CURRENT-SENSE
F8.5155.6440.X
F8.5155.4638.X
*10
/FRAME_100.2A
USER
ERASURETRANSF-UNIT
(bk) 17
APPR.
Sheet name:
POWER_UNIT_200
39324
4.09.06
Leith.
0A
39251
14.07.06
Leith.
F1.5158.4003.0
DATE
NAME
Replacement for
37889
C
General Schematic
CR 35-X
0B
bl
B
/FRAME_100.1A
ST235
D10 GE
D9
T2,5A
GS230-POWERINTEGR-BD
F8.5156.6450.X
ST291
BU1
4
3
12
6
2
11
9
1
7
10
rt (rd)
12.4
VAC
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
*20/20
ST2
*26/26
ST1
-ST230
( fan_LE )
Luefter-LE
F8.5155.4660.X
T2,5A
sw (bk) 15
17
BU5
D10
BU289
12.4
VAC
0V
13
sw (bk) 17
bl
9
11
230VAC
rt (rd)
br
F8.5156.6480.X
AGFA

1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
3.2AT
11
F8.5156.6480.X
BU4
-ST231
F8.5155.6420.X
100VAC
(bk) sw
D10
T6,25A
F8.5156.6480.X
13.0
VAC
F8.5156.6480.X
GS210-ERASURECTRL-BD
SI2
rt
gn
*3/3
-BU293
15
sw (bk)
rt (rd)
BU235
*10/10
SI5
13
12.4
VAC
-ST232
1
2
3
4
200MA3
1
2
D11
T2,5A
+5V
ST5
*3
rt (rd)
230VAC
9
br
rt (rd)
rt
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
1
2
3
4
F8.5155.4140.0
+24VDC
GND24
BU8
-ST8
17
120.1VAC
(rd) rt
1/3
2/3
3/3
*20/20
0V
bl
1
2
17
ST1
3.2AT
/IP_TRANSPORT_UNIT_600
*20
100VAC
(bk) sw
Transport
F8.5155.4614.X
BU3
-ST266
F8.5156.4150.B
F8.5155.4180.X
-BU288
-XK12
F7.0460.9079.0
F8.5155.4120.X
12.4
VAC
-ST233
3
4
1/14
2/14
3/14
4/14
5/14
6/14
7/14
8/14
9/14
10/14
11/14
12/14
13/14
14/14
12.4
VAC
13
sw (bk)
120.1VAC
(rd) rt
/ERASURE_UNIT_500.4A
F8.5155.4614.X
1
11
rt (rd)
1
2
/PCI_RACK_300.1A
( fan_erasure )
Luefter-Loesch
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
F8.5155.4160.X
*26/26
3.2AT
1
2
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
ST308
ST1
100VAC
(bk) sw
F8.5156.6480.X
BU3
BU306
BU330
1
2
3
BU336
bl
9
230VAC
11
rt (rd)
br
T2A
BU369
IN
-ST313
120.1VAC
(rd) rt
12.4
VAC
-ST234
1
2
3
4
F8.5156.6480.X
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
1
2
3
F8.5158.4120.X
/11
-ST283
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
BU304
ST6
230VAC
rt (rd)
br
BU2
Netz_Rack
F8.5155.4670.X
POWER-SUPPL
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
10
230VAC
120VAC
SI201
T2A
1
BU331
F8.5155.4190.X
4/4
BU273
N
( Power_Rack )
BU303
50/60 Hz
PE
BU302
BU334
3/4
BU299
PE
N1
100/120/230V
F8.5158.4110.X
BU283
-XK11
2/4
BU1
BU322
S201-MAINS-SWITCH
-XK14
-BU267
1/4
*3/3
F8.5155.4120.X
21 BU323
22
ST229
BU229
BU305
3/3
ST3
ST5
F7.0460.9064.0
BU298
L1
S202-INTERLOCK-FRONT
F8.5158.4120.X
MC201-LINE-FILTER
BU320
Netz
BU326
BU321
LAST
F8.5155.4120.X
Netz
11
( LINE )
12
BU325
-ST237
1/3
2/3
3/3
30.8VAC
ST4
BU328
S203-LINE-SELECTOR
-BU6
BU324
Last
5
4
3
2
1
2 120V
240V
1 230V
-BU266
BU230
BU327
( LOAD )
100V
IDX
Change-NR
NORM
Project
5158
/ 100
Sheet 4
of
7 SH
ERASURE-LAMPS
LA1
LA2
LA3
LA4
LA5
LA6
LA7
LA8
LA9
LA10
2
F8.5155.3585.X
9/9
8/9
7/9
6/9
5/9
4/9
3/9
2/9
1/9
8/9
7/9
6/9
5/9
4/9
3/9
2/9
1/9
-BU350
( Erasure_drilled )
/POWER_UNIT_200.4F
12/12
11/12
10/12
9/12
8/12
7/12
6/12
5/12
4/12
3/12
2/12
1/12
Loesch_verdrillt
F8.5156.4680.X
-BU358
-ST350
12/12
11/12
10/12
9/12
8/12
7/12
6/12
5/12
4/12
3/12
2/12
1/12
-ST349
F8.5155.4614.X
100MA12
ST353
F8.5155.3620.X
3
2
1
3
2
1
(fan_erasure )
Luefter-Loesch
BU353
USER
APPR.
NAME
20.04.06
Leith.
General Schematic
CR 35-X
Sheet name:
ERASURE_UNIT_500
39324
4.09.06
Leith.
0A
39251
14.07.06
Leith.
F1.5158.4003.0
DATE
NAME
Replacement for
37889
A
DATE
0B
AGFA

/POWER_UNIT_200.1F
M501-ERASUREUNIT-FAN
IDX
Change-NR
NORM
Project
5158
/ 100
Sheet 5
of
7 SH
BU122
/POWER_UNIT_200.1F
1
2
3
4
5
6
Transport
F8.5155.4614.X
ST350
F8.5155.4212.X
1
2
3
4
5
6
BU365 1
2
4
5
600MA1
100MA10
ST122
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
1
2
BU361
BU360
1
1
1/4
+24V
2/4
BU362
F8.5155.4216.X
4
5
ST1
600MA2
3/4
1
2
3
4
B1
B2
B3
B4
BU363
A1
A2
A3
A4
ST123
S1535
BU366
GS606SOLENOID-VALVE
F7.0424.2164.0
ST1
1/4
1
2
3
4
2/4
PUMP
2
GS608VACUUM-PUMP
F7.0431.7210.0
600MA4
1
2
4
5
BU359
3/4
ST4
BU364
600MA3
1/5
2/5
4/5
5/5
F8.5155.4214.X
BU123
PUMP+24V
ST2
JL1
1234
*4/4
BU70
BU71
*4
*4
F8.9889.0535.X
5678
ST3
*4/4
ST10
4A 2A
ST1
*4/4
GS604-IPTRANSP-0-LS
F8.9499.6770.X
ST7
*4/4
M601-IPTRANSPORT-MOT
F8.5156.4626.X
IO-BUS_TRANS
/FRAME_100.3A
3
BU148[V]
ST22[L]
*26
BU22[V]
*26
*26
ST1
*26/26
F8.5155.4210.X
100MA11
BU347
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
1
2
3
4
BR
OR
F8.5155.6140.X
3
RD
YE
USER
APPR.
NAME
20.04.06
Leith.
General Schematic
CR 35-X
Sheet name:
IP_TRANSPORT_UNIT_600
39324
4.09.06
Leith.
0A
39251
14.07.06
Leith.
F1.5158.4003.0
DATE
NAME
Replacement for
37889
A
DATE
0B
AGFA

GS602-IPTRANSPORT-BD
F8.9499.8140.X
ST5
IDX
Change-NR
NORM
Project
5156
/ 100
Sheet 6
of
7 SH
F8.5156.4610.X
2
/PCI_RACK_300.4F
Service
*25
-BU319
service
100MA8
M101-POWERUNIT-FAN
F8.5155.4660.X
Luefter-LE
/POWER_UNIT_200.1F
1
*8/8
ST4
BU419
*2/2
*2
ST12
ST375[A]
F8.5156.4570.X
3
4
5
6
7
8
BU2
#25
*25/25
GND
BU350[K]
F8.5155.4629.X
ST1
*26
IO-BUS_CASS
F8.5155.4628.X
14
12
BU348[K]
ST3
*26
IO-BUS_LE
*26/26
3
2
1
100MA5
BU356[F]
*26
F8.5156.4626.X
IO-BUS_TRANS
11
10
9
6
*20/20
100MA4
F8.5155.4632.X
/IP_TRANSPORT_UNIT_600.3A
GS118-LCD
DISPLAY
F8.8377.3202.X
ST10
*26/26
/SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_400.1C
/POWER_UNIT_200.3F
BU418
ST1
ST2
*26
ST1
*20/20
100MA7
GS114/BU2
IO-BUS_SCAN
BU417
*20/20
*26/26
100MA3
ST5
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
GS112/BU12
IO_Bus_PCI
J1
F8.5156.4640.X
/PCI_RACK_300.3F
/PCI_RACK_300.3F
*20/20
L7.0460.9074.0
LCD
ST9
BU1
( fan_LE)
ST4
GS112LCD-TERMINAL-BD
*26/26
F8.8377.1450.X
100MA6
ST6
*26/26
ST5
*26/26
GS114-IOBUSDISTRIB.
F8.9499.6020.X
F8.5156.4634.X
ST7
*26/26
BU356[K]
BU357[K]
*26
9 10 11 12 14
ST1
*26/26
100MA1
100MA2
ST319/RJ45
/PCI_RACK_300.3F
ethernet
F7.0477.1070.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
GS116EMERGENCY-NODE
F7.0486.1318.X
Adapter
ETHERNET
KEYPAD
/POWER_UNIT_200.3F
F7.5155.1623.0
Interlock
BU344
1
BU345
1
BU346
BU343
USER
S101-INTERLOCK-RIGHT
APPR.
NAME
20.04.06
Leith.
General Schematic
CR 35-X
Sheet name:
FRAME_100
39324
4.09.06
Leith.
0A
39251
14.07.06
Leith.
F1.5158.4003.0
DATE
NAME
Replacement for
37889
A
DATE
0B
AGFA

F8.5155.4642.X
IDX
Change-NR
NORM
Project
5158
/ 100
Sheet 7
of
7 SH
Spare Parts List

CR35-X
Document No: DD+DIS268.08M
Type 5158 / 100
CR25.0
Type 5156 / 100 (up to SN < 6000)
Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
CR 25.0
Type 5156/100/105
CR 35-X
Type 5158/100
Internal update: 5

spare_parts_e_template_v07
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.
WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper
operation.
INSTRUCTION:

Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of
compatible accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or
www.agfa.com
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type Order List in the GSO library.

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
Type
TYPE5156/0100/0105/5158/0100
5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 2
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Document History
Edition,
Edition,
Revision
Revision
2.2
2.2
Release
Release
Date
Date
11-2008
11-2008
Changescompared
comparedtotoprevious
previousversion
version2.1
2.1
Changes
Device
Device
CR25.0
(up
SN
< 6000)
added.
CR25.0
(up
to to
SN
< 6000)
added.
Index
adaption
of
Spare
Parts
numbers
to current
Index adaptation of Spare Parts numbers
to
stock.
current stock.
Rack
added.
Revive
Revive
Rack
added.
Contact
Spare Parts ordering
Europe
orderprocessing-europe.matrium@eads.com
Overseas
orderprocessing-overseas.matrium@eads.com
Spare Parts returns

Worldwide
returns.matrium@eads.com
NOTE:
For Recycling Information please refer to:
http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
Type
TYPE5156/0100/0105/5158/0100
5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 3
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Contents
FRONTVERKLEIDUNG, OBEN
FRONT PANELING; TOP
REVETEMENT AVANT, EN HAUT
PAGES 08-09
KASSETENEINHEIT
CASETTE UNIT
UNITE DE CASSETTES
PAGES 12-21
TRANSPORTEINHEIT
TRANSPORT UNIT
UNITE DE TRANSPORT
PAGES 22-25
LOESCHEINHEIT
ERASURE MODULE
UNITE DEFFACEMENT
PAGES 26-27
VERKLEIDUNG
PANELING
REVETEMENT
PAGES 06-07
SCAN-EINHEIT
SCAN UNIT
UNITE SCANNER
PAGES 28-39
LEISTUNGSEINHEIT
POWER SUPPLY
BLOC DE PUISSANCE
PAGES 44-45
CPCI-RACK / REVIVE RACK

PAGES 40-43
ADC - KASSETTEN
ADC CASSETTES
CASSETTES ADC
PAGES 48-67
MODIFIKATIONSBAUGRUPPEN, ZUBEHR
MODIFICATION KITS, ACCESSORIES
KIT DE MODIFICATION, ACCESSOIRE
SEITEN / PAGES 46-47
GESTELL
FRAME
CHASSIS
PAGES 10-11
5158_CHAP05_INDEX.CDR

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
Type
TYPE5156/0100/0105/5158/0100
5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 4
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
How to navigate the spare parts list online with the

Acrobat Reader
(1)
(2)
Open Bookmarks
(3)
(4)
See overview of the modules
(5)
Appropriate page opens
(6)
Click on green arrow to
Click on "CONTENTS"
Click on requested module
navigate back to the overview

of the modules

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
Type
TYPE5156/0100/0105/5158/0100
5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 5
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
01
02*
03*
05
06*
04*
07*
5158_CHAP05_01_M.CDR
PANELING
11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 6
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.

Item no. Part No.
Pos. no. Nr. de Ref.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9033175050
VERSCHLUZAPFEN
STUD
PIVOT DE VERROUILLAGE
CM+9515512704
SEITENWAND LINKS
SIDE WALL, LHS
PAROI LATERALE A GAUCHE
CM+9515512501
DECKEL
COVER
COUVERCLE
CM+9515812600
FRONTVERKLEIDUNG UNTEN
FRONT PANEL, BOTTOM
PANNEAU AVANT, EN BAS
CM+9515512631
CM+9515612100
FRONTVERKLEIDUNG OBEN
FRONT PANEL, TOP
PANNEAU AVANT, EN HAUT
CM+9515512403
SEITENWAND RECHTS
SIDE WALL, RHS
PAROI LATERALE A DROITE
FOLIENSCHARNIER
PLASTIC HINGE
CHARNIERE A MEMBRANE
=Assembly
D =Standard part. For order please refer to the separate spare parts list for standard parts "DD+DIS011.93M"
* =No wearing part.
PANELING
11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 7
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
01*
02*
D3188
05
04*
D3188
D3188
03
FRONT PANELING, TOP

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 8
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.

Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9515612100
FRONTVERKLEIDUNG OBEN
FRONT PANEL, TOP
PANNEAU AVANT, EN HAUT
CM+9515551500
KLAPPE MONTIERT
FLAP INSTALLED
VOLET INSTALLER
CM+9515551480
CM+9515551901
CM+9515512171
ZUGFEDER
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
*
VERRIEGELUNG MONTIERT
LOCK INSTALLED
VERROUILLAGE INSTALLER
SCHAUMSTOFFSTREIFEN
FOAM PLASTIC STRIPE
BANDES EN MOUSSE
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
FRONT PANELING, TOP

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 9
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List

01
(GS 114)
11
03
02
04
(S101)
12
05
(M501)
11
D969
10
(GS 116)
D333
09
D2222
D21
D85
D372
08
(M 101)
07
06
D86
D2771
5158_CHAP05_03_M.cdr
FRAME
11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 10
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.

Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9949960202
GS 8FACH IO-VERTEILER (GS114)

GS 8-FOLD IO DISTRIBUTOR (GS114)
DISTRIBUTION OCTUPLE I / O (GS114)
CM+9515546280
KABEL FL/RD 26POL (GS114/BU2 - BU351)

CABLE, FLAT AND ROUND 26POLE (GS114/BU2 - BU351)
CABLE PLAT ET CYLINDRIQUE (GS114/BU2 - BU351)
CM+9047190280
ETHERNET ADAPTER
ETHERNET ADAPTER
ADAPTATER ETHERNET
CM+9042663040
TR, DECKELSCHALTER (S101)

CASSETTE UNIT SAFETY SWITCH (S101)
PORTE, INTERRUPTEUR DE COUVERCLE (S101)
CM+9514636200
LFTER 24V VERDRAHTET (M501)

FAN 24V (M501)
VENTILATEUR 24V (M501)
CM+9037095110
RAD 65X12,1 (1 STCK.)

WHEEL 65X12,1 (1 PIECE)
ROUE 65X12,1 (1 PICE)
CM+9037095090
LENKROLLEN (1 STCK.)
GUIDE ROLLER (1 PIECE)
ROUE GUIDE (1 PICE)
CM+9515546600
LFTER 24V LE VERDR (M101)

FAN 24V LE (M101)
VENTILATEUR 24V LE (M101)
CM+9515516200
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
AFFICHEUR
10
CM+9515548200
GS STATUS EMERGENCY NODE (GS116)

PCB STATUS EMERGENCY NODE (GS116)
CI ETAT NOEUD URGENCE (GS116)
11
CM+9047910140
ABSTANDSHALTER (10 STCK.)

SPACER (10 PIECES)
ECARTEUR (10 PICES)
12
CM+9515846001
KABELBAUM GESTELL CR35-X

CABLE HARNESS FRAME CR35-X
FAISCEAU DE CABLE CHASSIS CR35-X
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
FRAME
11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 11
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
08
01
09*
02
03
04
(GS714)
(M704)
05 (GS718)
07
06
(GS728)
05
12
11
10 (M701)
CASSETTE UNIT PART 1

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 12
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.

Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9515550800
WINKEL
BRACKET
EQUERRE
CM+9038960000
ZAHNRIEMEN, DIN7721-6T5X200
TOOTHED BELT, DIN7721-6T5X200
COURROIE CRANTEE, DIN7721-6T5X200
CM+9515552400
KASSETTENHEBER
CASSETTE LIFT
ELEVATEUR DE CASSETTE
CM+9515552311
LEISTE
BAR
REGLETTE
CM+9514590100
LICHTSCHRANKE 1 (GS718, GS728)

LIGHT BARRIER 1 (GS718, GS728)
BARRIERE LUMINEUSE 1 (GS718, GS728)
CM+9988905600
KABEL FL 4POL (GS710/ST2 - GS718/ST1)

FLAT CABLE 4POL (GS710/ST2 - GS718/ST1)
CABLE PLAT 4POL (GS710/ST2 - GS718/ST1)
CM+9037110110
KUGELBCHSE - 16X26X36
SPHERICAL LINER - 16X26X36
DOUILLE SPHERIQUE - 16X26X36
CM+9514551952
ZAHNRIEMEN 18,5T5/860
TOOTHED BELT 18,5T5/860
COURROIE CRANTEE, 18,5T5/860
CM+9515550900
10
CM+9514551351
RLLCHENMOTOR (M701)
ROLLER MOTOR (M701)
MOTEUR DES GALETS (M701)
11
CM+9514591000
RLLCHEN
ROLLER
ROULEAU
12
CM+9988905550

RIEMENUMLENKUNG
CROSSOVER BELT
COUDAGE DE LA COURROIE
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 13
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
01
05
(GS720)
04
02
03
06
08
07
(GS730)

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 14
DD+DIS268.08M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Spare Parts List

Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9515690500
FFNER
OPENER
LOUP
CM+9515550424
FOLIENAUSRICHTUNG LINKS
FOIL ALIGNMENT, LHS
ALIGNEMENT A GAUCHE
CM+9515645181
KABEL FL CASSETTENANSCHL. 950MM (GS720/ST1 - GS710/ST8)

FLAT CABLE CASSETTE STOP 950MM (GS720/ST1 - GS710/ST8)
CABLE PLAT BUTEE CASSETTE 950MM (GS720/ST1 - GS710/ST8)
CM+9514659110
LICHTSCHRANKENFAHNE
LIGHT BARRIER LUG
CAVALIER DE PHOTO CELLULE
CM+9515670000
KASSETTENEINZUG ANSCHLAG LINKS (GS720)

CASSETTE FEED STOP, LHS (GS720)
INTRODUCTION DES CASSETTE A GAUCHE (GS720)
CM+9515550251
LICHTSCHRANKENHALTER
LIGHT SENSOR HOLDER
SUPPORT BARRIERE LUMINEUSE
CM+9515590100
LICHTSCHRANKE (GS730)
LIGHT BARRIER (GS730)
BARRIERE LUMINEUSE (GS730)
CM+9988906150

=Assembly
* =No wearing part.

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 15
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
02 (GS736)
01
04
03
05
(M702)
(GS738)
14
06
08
(GS716)
07
10
02
09
13
11
12
(GS726)

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 16
DD+DIS268.08M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Spare Parts List

Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9515590301
ANTENNENMECHANIK
ANTENNA MECHANISM
MACANISM DE L'ANTENNE
CM+9515552700
READER MIT ANTENNE (GS736, GS738)

READER WITH ANTENNA (GS736, GS738)
SUPPORT AVEC ANTENNE (GS736, GS738)
CM+9515645061
KABEL 20AWG28 TAGREADER

CABLE, 20AWG28 TAGREADER
CABLE, 20AWG28 TAGREADER
CM+9515551200
MOTORWINKEL
MOTOR BRACKET
EQUERRE DU MOTEUR
CM+9514575501
SCHRITTMOTOR VOLLSTNDIG (M702)

STEPPER MOTOR COMPLETE (M702)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS COMPLET (M702)
CM+9038961230
CM+9038960010
CM+9514590100
LICHTSCHRANKE 1 (GS716)
LIGHT BARRIER 1 (GS716)
BARRIERE LUMINEUSE 1 (GS716)
CM+9988905850
KABEL FL 4POL
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
10
CM+9510055030
SCHENKELFEDER
LEG SPRING
RESSORT A BRANCHES
11
CM+9515555800
SCHWENKPLATTE
SWIVEL PLATE
PLAQUE PIVOTANTE
12
CM+9515590401
GS LICHTSCHRANKE HIGH-AKTIV (GS726)

LIGHT BARRIER BOARD HIGH-ACTIVE (GS726)
CI BARRIERE PHOTOELECTRIQUE ACTIF PLUS (GS726)
13
CM+9988905700

14
CM+9515545080
KABEL 6POL (GS736/BU1 - GS738/BU1)

CABLE 6POL (GS736/BU1 - GS738/BU1)
CABLE 6POL (GS736/BU1 - GS738/BU1)
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 17
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
01
(M705)
03
(GS724)
04
05
02
17
(M703)
15
14*
16
(GS734)
07
08
(GS722)
09
13
12
11
(M706)
06
(GS732)
10

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 18
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.

Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9515650002
KASSETTENEINHEIT
CASSETTE UNIT
UNITE CASSETTES
CM+9515653700
UMLENKEINHEIT
GUIDE UNIT
UNIT DE RENVOI
CM+9033500860
ZUGFEDER
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
CM+9514590100
CM+9988905550

CM+9515591201
LICHTSCHRANKENHALTER
LIGHT SENSOR HOLDER
SUPPORT BARRIERE LUMINEUS
CM+9514590200
CM+9988905850

CM+9515545100
KABEL FL 6/4/4POL (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)

FLAT CABLE 6/4/4PIN (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)
CABLE PLAT 6/4/4POLAIRE (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)
10
CM+9515690201
SPINDELANTRIEB MIT MOTOR

SPINDLE DRIVE WITH MOTOR
COMMANDE VIS SANS FIN AVEC MOTEUR
11
CM+9514575501

STEPPER MOTOR COMPLETE (M706)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS COMPLET (M706)
12
CM+9038965490
13
CM+9515650300
HALTERUNG SPINDEL
HOLDER
FIXATION
14
CM+9514551651
15
CM+9038961180
16
CM+9514651450
MOTORWINKEL MONTIERT
MOTOR BRACKET ASSEMBLED
EQUERRE DU MOTEUR ASSEMBLE
17
CM+9514672200

STEPPER MOTOR ASSY (M703)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS COMPL. (M703)
ACHSE
SHAFT
AXE
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 19
DD+DIS268.08M
10
(GS710)
09
Spare Parts List
08
06
04
02
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
(GS712)

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 20
DD+DIS268.08M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Spare Parts List

Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9949981406
GS IOB-SIN-STEP (GS712)
PCB IOB-SIN-STEP (GS712)
CI IOB-SIN-STEP (GS712)
CM+9515545042
KABEL BUS 26POL (GS710/ST3 - GS712/BU1)

BUS CABLE 26POL (GS710/ST3 - GS712/BU1)
CABLE BUS 26POL (GS710/ST3 - GS712/BU1)
CM+9988906150

CM+9988905550

CM+9988905700

CM+9988905850

CM+9515545100
KABEL FL 6/4/4POL (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)

FLAT CABLE 6/4/4PIN (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)
CABLE PLAT 6/4/4POLAIRE (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)
CM+9988905600

CM+9988905400

10
CM+9949981300
GS IOB-SIN-5STEP - (GS710)
PCB IOB-SIN-5STEP
CI IOB-SIN-5STEP
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 21
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
01
03
02
D631
14
04
(M 601)
05
06
D38
05
16
13
12
D40
11
(GS 602)
05
15
06
07
09
10
08
D631
12
17
(GS 604)
D4340
TRANSPORT UNIT
11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 22
DD+DIS268.08M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Spare Parts List

Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9515560002
TRANSPORTEINHEIT
TRANSPORT UNIT
UNITE'DE TRANSPORT
CM+9515561155
LEITBLECH
GUIDE PLATE
TOLE DE GUIDAGE
CM+9515561101
LEITBLECH HINTEN
GUIDE PLATE, BACK
TOLE DE GUIDAGE ARRIERE
CM+9515560901
SCHRITTMOTOR (M601)
STEPPER MOTOR (M601)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS (M601)
CM+9037170040
ROHRSCHELLE
PIPE CLAMP
AGRAFE
CM+9515542120
KABEL 8POL (BU122 - ST123)

CABLE 8POL (BU122 - ST123)
CABLE 8POL (BU122 - ST123)
CM+9033175390
VERSCHLUZAPFEN
STUD
PIVOT DE VERROUILLAGE
CM+9036270020
SICHERUNGSRING
RETAINING RING
BAGUE DE SECURITE
CM+9037170070
ROHRSCHELLE
PIPE CLAMP
AGRAFE
10
CM+9515542141
KABEL 4POL (GS602/ST4 - ST123)

CABLE 4POL (GS602/ST4 - ST123)
CABLE 4POL (GS602/ST4 - ST123)
11
CM+9949981406
GS IOB-SIN-STEP (GS602)
PCB IOB-SIN-STEP (GS602)
CI IOB-SIN-STEP (GS602)
12
CM+9988905350

13
CM+9047913100
ABSTANDSHALTER
SPACER
ECARTEUR
14
CM+9515542102
KABEL BUS FL 26AWG28 (GS602/ST1 - ST22(L))

FLAT CABLE 26AWG28 (GS602/ST1 - ST22(L))
CABLE PLAT 26AWG28 (GS602/ST1 - ST22(L))
15
CM+9515590700
ZAHNRIEMENRAD
TOOTHED BELT WHEEL
POULIE A COURROIE CRANTEE
16
CM+9038961030
ZAHNRIEMEN, DIN 7721-10T2,5X145

TOOTHED BELT, DIN 7721-10T2,5X145
COURROIE CRANTEE, DIN 7721-10T2,5X145
17
CM+9515590800
LICHTSCHRANKE (GS604)
LIGHT BARRIER (GS604)
BARRIERE LUMINEUSE (GS604)
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
TRANSPORT UNIT
11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 23
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
01
02
02
06
(L=90mm)
05
06
(L=27mm)
08
03
02
Detail X
06
(L=100mm)
06
(L=27mm)
06
(L=65mm)
07
04 ONLY FOR DEVICES WHICH ARE LOCATED

HIGHER THAN 2000M ABOVE SEE LEVEL
(SEE SB DD+DIS276.07E)
TRANSPORT UNIT
11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 24
DD+DIS268.08M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Spare Parts List

Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9515560002
TRANSPORTEINHEIT
TRANSPORT UNIT
UNITE'DE TRANSPORT
CM+9515592402
SAUGER KOMPLETT
SUCTION CUP COMPLETE
VENTOUSE COMPLET
CM+9515561304
PUMPENWINKEL
PUMP BRACKET
EQUERRE DE POMPE
CM+9515861301
PUMPENWINKEL (HI), VOLLSTNDIG

PUMP BRACKET (HI) COMPLETE
EQUERRE DE POMPE (HI) COMPLET
CM+9037170040
ROHRSCHELLE
PIPE CLAMP
AGRAFE
CM+0000064155
SILIKONSCHLAUCH (INNENDURCHMESSER 3MM)

SILICON TUBE (INNER DIAMETER 3MM)
TUYAU SLICONE (DIAMTRE INTRIEUR 3MM)
CM+9515561480
DSE
NOZZLE
BUSE
CM+9036260940
FILTER MIT MIKROSIEB

FILTER WITH MICRO INSERT
FILTRE A MICRO-ORIFICES
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
TRANSPORT UNIT
11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 25
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
01*
D221
02
03
D353
D81
D2756
08
04
07
06
05
ERASURE UNIT
11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 26
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.

Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
*
CM+9515635000
LSCHEINHEIT
ERASURE UNIT
UNITE D'EFFACEMENT
CM+9515635430
ARRETIERBLECH
RETAINING PLATE
PLAQUE DE RETENUE
CM+9515635600
HALTER, LAMPEN KOMPLETT

LAMP HOLDER COMPLETE
SUPPORT LAMPES COMPLET
CM+9514535440
KG2-FILTER
FILTER
FILTRE
CM+9515635851
FASSUNGSLEISTE VERKABELT
SOCKET BAR WITH CABLE
BARRETTE AVEC CABLE
CM+9045065740
FASSUNG 6,35 24V

SOCKET 6,35 24V
SOCLE 6,35 24V
CM+9045065530
HALOGENLAMPE, 12V 100W

HALOGEN LAMP, 12V 100W
LAMPE HALOGEN, 12V 100W
CM+9515535650
DISTANZLEISTE
SPACER RAIL
LITEAU DECARTEMENT
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
ERASURE UNIT
11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 27
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
01
03
02
04
05
06
CR35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR25.0
Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
SCAN UNIT PART 1

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 28
DD+DIS268.08M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Spare Parts List

Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9515524451
BOWDENZUG
BOWDEN CABLE TRACTION
CABLE SOUS-GAINE
CM+9515627003
OPTIKBAUGRUPPE
LENS ASSEMBLY
ENSEMBLE OPTIQUE
CM+9515824251
BRSTENHALTEBLECH KOMPLETT
BRUSH STRIP COMPLETE
BAGUETTE A BROSSES COMPLET
CM+9515526502
ANDRUCKWELLE
PRESSURE SHAFT
ARBRE DE PRESSION
CM+9515821000
SCAN-EINHEIT VOLLST.
SCAN UNIT COMPLETE
UNITE SCANNER COMPLETE
CM+9514822806
LISA BG KOMPLETT
ACRYLIC LIGHT GUIDE ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLAGE CONDUIT DE LUMIRE
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
SCAN UNIT PART 1

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 29
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
(GS 442)
02
01
(GS 444)
03
04
D707
05
CR25.0
Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000)
5156_chap05_13.CDR
SCAN UNIT PART 1

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100
Chapter 5 / 30
DD+DIS268.08M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Spare Parts List

Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9515621000
SCAN-EINHEIT VOLLST.
SCAN UNIT COMPLETE
UNITE SCANNER COMPLETE
CM+9515591402
IR 2-FACH LICHTSCHRANKENSATZ
IR 2-WAY LIGHT BARRIER SET
JEU PHOTOCELLULE DOUBLE IR
CM+9515691300
ABLAGEBLECH OHNE LICHTSCHRANKEN

TRAY WITHOUT LIGHT BARRIER
RECEPTACLE SANS PHOTOCELL
CM+9515526502
ANDRUCKWELLE
PRESSURE SHAFT
ARBRE DE PRESSION
CM+9515621060
FEDERBLECH
SPRING METAL SHEET
TOLE ELASTIQUE A RESSORT
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
SCAN UNIT PART 1

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100
Chapter 5 / 31
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
01
08
(GS 410)
02
07
03
04 (M 401)
08
(GS 412)
02
05
06
CR35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR25.0
Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
SCAN UNIT PART 2

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 32
DD+DIS268.08M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Spare Parts List

Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9988905200
KABEL FL 4POL (GS440/BU1 - GS442/BU1)

FLAT CABLE 4POL (GS440/BU1 - GS442/BU1)
CABLE PLAT 4POL (GS440/BU1 - GS442/BU1)
CM+9514526680
BUCHSE
BUSHING
DOUILLE
CM+9515526701
ANTRIEBSWELLE
DRIVE SHAFT
ARBRE D'ENTRAINEMENT
CM+9515526801
ABHEBEMOTOR KOMPLETT (M401)

LIFT MOTOR COMPLETE (M401)
MOTEUR DE LEVAGE COMPLET (M401)
CM+9515526600
SCHNECKENLAGER VOLLSTNDIG
WORM SHAFT BEARING COMPLETE
PALIER CONIQUE COMPLET
CM+9961124560
ZAHNRIEMEN 6T2.5X177.5
TOOTHED BELT 6T2.5X177.5
COURROIE CRANTEE 6T2.5X177.5
CM+9515544362
KABEL BUS 26POL OPTIK (GS410/BU1 - GS412/BU1)

BUS CABLE 26POL OPTIC (GS410/BU1 - GS412/BU1)
CABLE BUS 26POL OPTIQUE (GS410/BU1 - GS412/BU1)
CM+9515521251
SM-KARTE (GS410, GS412)

STEPPER MOTOR CONTROL BOARD (GS410, GS412)
CARTE MOTEUR PAS A PAS (GS410, GS412)
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
SCAN UNIT PART 2

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 33
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
10
01
(GS 450)
02
08
(GS 410)
03
09
08
(GS 412)
04
05
(M 401)
03
06
07
CR25.0
Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000)
5156_chap05_15.CDR
SCAN UNIT PART 2

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100
Chapter 5 / 34
DD+DIS268.08M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Spare Parts List

Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9514622504
PMT-MODUL (GS450)
PMT MODULE (GS450)
MODULE PMT (GS450)
CM+9514622550
PMT-MODUL - ANTI-REFLEX (GS450)

PMT MODULE - ANTI-REFLEX (GS450)
MODULE PMT - ANTI-REFLEX (GS450)
CM+9988905200
KABEL FL 4POL
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
CM+9514526680
BUCHSE
BUSHING
DOUILLE
CM+9515526701
ANTRIEBSWELLE
DRIVE SHAFT
ARBRE D'ENTRAINEMENT
CM+9515526801
ABHEBEMOTOR KOMPLETT (M401)

LIFT MOTOR COMPLETE (M401)
MOTEUR DE LEVAGE COMPLET (M401)
CM+9515526600
SCHNECKENLAGER VOLLSTNDIG
WORM SHAFT BEARING COMPLETE
PALIER CONIQUE COMPLET
CM+9961124560
ZAHNRIEMEN 6T2.5X177.5
TOOTHED BELT 6T2.5X177.5
COURROIE CRANTEE 6T2.5X177.5
CM+9515521251
SM-KARTE (GS410, GS412)

STEPPER MOTOR CONTROL BOARD (GS410, GS412)
CARTE MOTEUR PAS A PAS (GS410, GS412)
CM+9515544362
KABEL BUS 26POL OPTIK

BUS CABLE 26POL OPTIC
CABLE BUS 26POL OPTIQUE
10
CM+9515627002
OPTIKBAUGRUPPE
LENS ASSEMBLY
ENSEMBLE OPTIQUE
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
SCAN UNIT PART 2

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100
Chapter 5 / 35
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
06
(M402)
05
01
07 08
(GS 448)
(GS444)
02
03
(GS440)
04
CR35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR25.0
Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
SCAN UNIT PART 3

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 36
DD+DIS268.08M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Spare Parts List

Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9514526190
FHRUNG
GUIDE
GUIDE
CM+9515590902
PIN-DIODEN
PIN DIODES
PLOTS DIODES
CM+9515544341
KABEL FL 12/4/4/4POL (GS410/ST3 - GS412/ST3)

FLAT CABLE 12/4/4/4POL (GS410/ST3 - GS412/ST3)
CABLE PLAT 12/4/4/4POL (GS410/ST3 - GS412/ST3)
CM+9515544321
KABEL FL 10/8/4POL (GS440/BU3 - GS444/BU1 - GS446/BU1)

FLAT CABLE 10/8/4POL (GS440/BU3 - GS444/BU1 - GS446/BU1)
CABLE PLAT 10/8/4POL (GS440/BU3 - GS444/BU1 - GS446/BU1)
CM+9514525900
KUPPLUNG VOLLSTNDIG
CLUTCH COMPLETE
ACCOUPLEMENT COMPLET
CM+9514625100
SCHRITTMOTOR ST5709S2608-A (M402)

STEPPER MOTOR ST5709S2608-A (M402)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS ST5709S2608-A (M402)
CM+9949965402
GS LS-STATISCH (GS448)
LIGHT SENSOR BOARD-STATIC (GS448)
CARTE PHOTOCELLULE STATIQ (GS448)
CM+9988905800
KABEL FL 4POL (GS410/BU2 - GS448/BU1)

FLAT CABLE 4POL (GS410/BU2 - GS448/BU1)
CABLE PLAT 4POL (GS410/BU2 - GS448/BU1)
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
SCAN UNIT PART 3

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 37
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
02
(M402)
08
11
04
(GS 446)
09 10
(GS 448)
07
01
06
(GS 440)
03*
05
CR25.0
Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000)
5156_chap05_17.CDR
SCAN UNIT PART 3

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100
Chapter 5 / 38
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.

Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9047710270
KABEL MIT 2X4P MINI DIN

CABLE WITH 2X4P MINI DIN
CABLE AVEC 2X4P MINI DIN
CM+9514625100
SCHRITTMOTOR ST5709S2608-A (M402)

STEPPER MOTOR ST5709S2608-A (M402)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS ST5709S2608-A (M402)
CM+9515524181
CM+9515524451
BOWDENZUG
BOWDEN CABLE TRACTION
CABLE SOUS-GAINE
CM+9515544321
KABEL FL 10/8/4POL
FLAT CABLE 10/8/4POL
CABLE PLAT 10/8/4POL
CM+9515544341
KABEL FL 12/4/4/4POL
FLAT CABLE 12/4/4/4POL
CABLE PLAT 12/4/4/4POL
CM+9515590902
PIN-DIODEN
PIN DIODES
PLOTS DIODES
CM+9514525900
KUPPLUNG VOLLSTNDIG
CLUTCH COMPLETE
ACCOUPLEMENT COMPLET
CM+9949965402
GS LS-STATISCH (GS448)
LIGHT SENSOR BOARD-STATIC (GS448)
CARTE PHOTOCELLULE STATIQ (GS448)
10
CM+9988905800
KABEL FL 4POL
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
11
CM+9514526190
FHRUNG
GUIDE
GUIDE
LICHTLEITER L=850MM
FIBRE-OPTIC L=850MM
FIBRE OPTIQUE L=850MM
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
SCAN UNIT PART 3

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100
Chapter 5 / 39
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
01
02
03
(M300)
08
06
05
(GS302)
(GS304)
07
04
(GS300)
13
(GS312)
10
CR35-X
Type 5158/100 (up to SN < 4000)
CR25.0
Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000)
Type 5156/105 (up to SN < 6500)
09
(GS306)
12
(GS310)
11
CPCI-RACK
11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 40
DD+DIS268.08M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Spare Parts List

Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9515614001
CPCI-RACK, KOMPLETT
CPCI RACK, COMPLETE
RACK CPCI, COMPLET
CM+9515614054
CPCI-RACK BESTCKT
CPCI RACK ASSEMBLED
RACK CPCI QUIPE
CM+9514614250
LFTER VERDR. PCI-RACK 250MM (M300)

FAN WIRED, PCI-RACK 250MM (M300)
VENTILATEUR CABLE, PCI-RACK 250MM (M300)
CM+9048613420
CPCI BACKPLANE 3 SLOT (GS300)

CM+9514614401
EINSCHUB STORAGE KOMPLETT (GS302, GS304)

PLUG-IN MODULE STORAGE COMPLETE (GS302, GS304)
TIROIR STORAGE COMPLET (GS302, GS304)
CM+9048613650
DISKETTENLAUFWERK 3,5"
FLOPPY-DISK-DRIVE 3,5"
LECTEUR 3,5"
CM+9048613540
FESTPLATTE 9,1GB ATLAS V

HARDDISK 9,1GB ATLAS V
DISQUE DUR 9,1GB ATLAS V
CM+9048613570
SCSI ULTRA 3 TERMINATOR

CM+9514614303
PCI POWER SUPPLY KOMPLETT (GS306)

PCI POWER SUPPLY COMPLETE (GS306)
PCI BLOC SECTEUR COMPLET (GS306)
10
CM+9515516352
VME GLEITBAHN GENIETET

VME SLIDE TRACK
RAIL GLISSANT VME
11
CM+9515546700
KABEL NETZ-VME
POWER CABLE
CORDON DALIMENTATION
12
CM+9514614653
EINSCHUB IO-MASTER (GS310)

PLUG-IN MODULE IO-MASTER (GS310)
TIROIR IO-MASTER (GS310)
13
CM+9514615012
OBERON 3 PCB (GS312)

=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
CPCI-RACK
11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 41
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
01
02
07
03
06
05
04
CR35-X
Type 5158/100 (as of SN 4000)
CR25.0
Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6500)
5158_chap05_19_M.CDR
REVIVE RACK
11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 42
DD+DIS268.08M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Spare Parts List

Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9515890100
REVIVE PCI-RACK CR35-X

CM+9514614250
LFTER VERDR. PCI-RACK 250MM

FAN WIRED, PCI-RACK 250MM
VENTILATEUR CABLE, PCI-RACK 250MM
CM+9514614303
PCI POWER SUPPLY KOMPLETT

PCI POWER SUPPLY COMPLETE
PCI BLOC SECTEUR COMPLET
CM+9514890200
REVIVE PCB
REVIVE PCB
REVIVE PCB
CM+9048614280
IDE HARD DISK

IDE HARD DISK
IDE HARD DISK
CM+9514814900
CABLE SET IDE HARD DISK

CM+9515888100
MEMORY STICK WITH SW C25_3007

=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
REVIVE RACK
11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 43
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
01
10
02
(GS210)
09
11
(GS220)
13
(SI1-SI4)
D2182
D5681
08
(SI201)
(SI202)
12
(TR206)
15
03
10
16
(GS230)
14
(SI5)
04
(S203)
17
D707
D707
07
D707
D707
D3227
06
(S201)
05
(S202)
POWER UNIT
11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 44
DD+DIS268.08M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Spare Parts List

Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9515664001
LEISTUNGSEINHEIT
POWER UNIT
BLOC DE PUISSANCE
CM+9515591106
GS SWITCH-ERASURE UNIT (GS210)

PCB SWITCH-ERASURE UNIT (GS210)
CI COMMUTATION UNIT D'EFFACEMENT (GS210)
CM+9043660590
NETZFILTER 250V/16A
MAINS FILTER 250V/16A
FILTRE RSEAU 250V/16A
CM+9515541300
KB WAHLSCHALTER (S203)
SELECTOR SWITCH (S203)
SELECTEUR (ELECTRIQUE) (S203)
CM+9042663040
TR, DECKELSCHALTER (S202)

CASSETTE UNIT SAFETY SWITCH (S202)
PORTE, INTERRUPTEUR DE COUVERCLE (S202)
CM+9045231730
BERSTROMSCHUTZSCHALTER 14A (S201)

OVERCURRENT CIRCUIT BREAK 14A (S201)
DISJONCTEUR DE SURCHARGE 14A (S201)
CM+9515691000
NETZTEIL 90-264V/24V-1A
POWER SUPPLY, 90-264V/24V-1A
BLOC SECTEUR, 90-264V/24V-1A
CM+9045196090
SICHERUNG T 2A (SI201, SI202)

FUSE SLOW-BLOW T 2A (SI201, SI202)
INERTIE FUSIBLE T 2A (SI201, SI202)
CM+9515664800
TRAFOWINKEL
TRANSFORMER BRACKET
EQUERRE POUR TRANSFORMATEUR
10
CM+9515541800

11
CM+9515564401
GS CURRENT-SENSE (GS220)
PCB CURRENT-SENSE (GS220)
CI CONTROLE COURANT (GS220)
12
CM+9515664050
TRANSFORMATOR XBF (TR206)

TRANSFORMER (TR206)
TRANSFORMATEUR (TR206)
13
CM+9045196040
SICHERUNG T 2,5A (SI1-SI4)

FUSE T 2,5A (SI1-SI4)
FUSIBLE T 2,5A (SI1-SI4)
14
CM+9045197050
SICHERUNG T 6,25A (SI5)

FUSE T 6,25A (SI5)
FUSIBLE T 6,25A (SI5)
15
CM+9047910160
ABSTANDSHALTER
SPACER
ECARTEUR
16
CM+9515664502
GS POWER INTEGRATION BOARD (GS230)

PCB POWER INTEGRATION BOARD (GS230)
CI CARTE INTEGRATION PUIS (GS230)
17
CM+9515541900
KABEL BUS 26POL (GS210/ST1 - ST310)

BUS CABLE 26POL (GS210/ST1 - ST310)
CABLE BUS 26POL (GS210/ST1 - ST310)
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
POWER UNIT
11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 45
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
02
01
03
04
5158_chap05_21.cdr

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 46
DD+DIS268.08M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Spare Parts List

Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9515592202
MODIFIKATIONSKIT ENTLADEBRSTE
MODIFICATIONS KIT DISCHARGE BRUSH
KIT DE MODIFICATIONS BROSSES DE DECHARGEMENT
CM+9515592300
MODIFIKATIONSKIT KASSETTENFFNER
MODIFICATIONS KIT CASSETTE OPENER
KIT DE MODIFICATIONS OUVREUSE DE CASSETTES
CM+9515510152
CU-FILTER VERPACKT
CU FILTER PACKED
FILTER CU EMBALLE
CM+9514810900
ALU FILTER VERPACKT

ALUMINIUN FILTER PACKED
ALUMINIUN FILTER PACKED
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 47
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
01
02*
14
03*
15
04
10
12
05
11
13
07
06
08
04
08
09
06
07
ADC-C CASSETTES - 35X35 (TYPE 8304/780)

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 48
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.

Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9830461302
CHIPKARTENHALTER, KOMPL.
CHIP CARD HOLDER, COMPLETE
PORTE CARTE PUCE, COMPLET
CM+9830461600
DECKEL GESCHW.
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
CM+9830460300
BODEN VOLLSTNDIG
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
CM+9830010032
REITER
SLIDE
CAVALIER
CM+9830030702
RIEGEL RECHTS VOLLSTNDIG

LATCH RHS COMPLETE
VERROU A DROITE COMPLET
CM+9832520360
ZUGFEDER
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
CM+9830010340
UMLENKTEIL
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
CM+9830010351
KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
CM+9830030802
RIEGEL LINKS VOLLSTNDIG

LATCH LHS COMPLETE
VERROU A GAUCHE COMPLET
10
CM+9830010381
BLATTFEDER RECHTS
LEAF SPRING RHS
RESSORT A BRANCHES A DROITE
11
CM+9830010391
BLATTFEDER LINKS
LEAF SPRING LHS
RESSORT A BRANCHES A GAUCHE
12
CM+9830011310
ALULABEL (FILMERKENNUNG)
ALU LABLE (FILM DETECTION)
ETIQUETTE ALU (DETECTION DE FILM)
13
CM+9830010440
SCHRAUBE
SCREW
VIS
14
CM+9830010552
ABWEISER BESCHICHTET
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
15
CM+9830430110
SCHARNIER
HINGE
CHARNIERE
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 49
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
01
02*
14
03*
15
04
10
12
05
11
13
07
06
08
04
08
09
06
07

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 50
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.

Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9830461302
CM+9830561600
DECKEL GESCHW.
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
CM+9830560300
BODEN VOLLSTNDIG
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
CM+9830010032
REITER
SLIDE
CAVALIER
CM+9830030702

LATCH RHS COMPLETE
CM+9832520360
ZUGFEDER
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
CM+9830010340
UMLENKTEIL
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
CM+9830010351
KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
CM+9830030802

LATCH LHS COMPLETE
10
CM+9830010381
BLATTFEDER RECHTS
LEAF SPRING RHS
11
CM+9830010391
BLATTFEDER LINKS
LEAF SPRING LHS
12
CM+9830011310
13
CM+9830010440
SCHRAUBE
SCREW
VIS
14
CM+9830010552
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
15
CM+9830430110
SCHARNIER
HINGE
CHARNIERE
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 51
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
01
02*
14
03*
15
04
10
12
05
11
13
07
06
08
04
08
09
06
07

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 52
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.

Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9830461302
CM+9830761600
DECKEL GESCHW.
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
CM+9830760300
BODEN VOLLSTNDIG
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
CM+9830010032
REITER
SLIDE
CAVALIER
CM+9830030702

LATCH RHS COMPLETE
CM+9832520360
ZUGFEDER
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
CM+9830010340
UMLENKTEIL
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
CM+9830010351
KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
CM+9830030802

LATCH LHS COMPLETE
10
CM+9830010381
BLATTFEDER RECHTS
LEAF SPRING RHS
11
CM+9830010391
BLATTFEDER LINKS
LEAF SPRING LHS
12
CM+9830011310
13
CM+9830010440
SCHRAUBE
SCREW
VIS
14
CM+9830010552
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
15
CM+9830630110
SCHARNIER
HINGE
CHARNIERE
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 53
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
01
02*
14
03*
15
04
10
12
05
11
13
07
06
08
04
08
09
06
07

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 54
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.

Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9830461302
CM+9830861600
DECKEL GESCHWEISST
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
CM+9830860300
BODEN VOLLSTNDIG
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
CM+9830010032
REITER
SLIDE
CAVALIER
CM+9830030702

LATCH RHS COMPLETE
CM+9832520360
ZUGFEDER
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
CM+9830010340
UMLENKTEIL
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
CM+9830010351
KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
CM+9830030802

LATCH LHS COMPLETE
10
CM+9830010381
BLATTFEDER RECHTS
LEAF SPRING RHS
11
CM+9830010391
BLATTFEDER LINKS
LEAF SPRING LHS
12
CM+9830011310
13
CM+9830010440
SCHRAUBE
SCREW
VIS
14
CM+9830010552
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
15
CM+9830830110
SCHARNIER
HINGE
CHARNIERE
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 55
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
01
02*
14
03*
15
04
10
12
05
11
13
07
06
08
04
08
09
06
07

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 56
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.

Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9830461302
CM+9830961600
DECKEL GESCHWEISST
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
CM+9830960300
BODEN VOLLSTNDIG
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
CM+9830010032
REITER
SLIDE
CAVALIER
CM+9830030702

LATCH RHS COMPLETE
CM+9832520360
ZUGFEDER
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
CM+9830010340
UMLENKTEIL
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
CM+9830010351
KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
CM+9830030802

LATCH LHS COMPLETE
10
CM+9830010381
BLATTFEDER RECHTS
LEAF SPRING RHS
11
CM+9830010391
BLATTFEDER LINKS
LEAF SPRING LHS
12
CM+9830011310
13
CM+9830010440
SCHRAUBE
SCREW
VIS
14
CM+9830010552
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
15
CM+9830930110
SCHARNIER
HINGE
CHARNIERE
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 57
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
01
02*
14
03*
15
04
10
12
05
11
13
07
06
08
04
08
09
06
07

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 58
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.

Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9831661302
CHIPKARTENHALTER ADC-C 15X30

CHIP CARD HOLDER
PORTE CARTE PUCE ADC-C
CM+9831661600
DECKEL GESCHWEISST
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
CM+9831660300
BODEN VOLLSTNDIG
BOTTOM COMPLETE
FOND COMPLET
CM+9830010032
REITER
SLIDE
CAVALIER
CM+9830030702

LATCH RHS COMPLETE
CM+9832520360
ZUGFEDER
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
CM+9830010340
UMLENKTEIL
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
CM+9830010351
KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
CM+9830030802

LATCH LHS COMPLETE
10
CM+9830010381
BLATTFEDER RECHTS
LEAF SPRING RHS
11
CM+9830010391
BLATTFEDER LINKS
LEAF SPRING LHS
12
CM+9830011310
13
CM+9830010440
SCHRAUBE
SCREW
VIS
14
CM+9830010552
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
15
CM+9830530110
SCHARNIER
HINGE
CHARNIERE
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 59
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 60
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.

Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9830461302
CM+9832061600
DECKEL GESCHW.
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
CM+9832060300
BODEN VOLLSTNDIG
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
CM+9830030702

LATCH RHS COMPLETE
CM+9832520360
ZUGFEDER
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
CM+9830010340
UMLENKTEIL
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
CM+9830010351
KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
CM+9830030802

LATCH LHS COMPLETE
CM+9830010381
BLATTFEDER RECHTS
LEAF SPRING RHS
10
CM+9830010391
BLATTFEDER LINKS
LEAF SPRING LHS
11
CM+9830011310
12
CM+9830010440
SCHRAUBE
SCREW
VIS
13
CM+9830430110
SCHARNIER
HINGE
CHARNIERE
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 61
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
ADC-C CASSETTES - 21X43 (43X35) (TYPE 8320/785)

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 62
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.

Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9830461302
CM+9832061600
DECKEL GESCHW.
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
CM+9832080300
BODEN VOLLSTNDIG
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
CM+9830030702

LATCH RHS COMPLETE
CM+9832520360
ZUGFEDER
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
CM+9830010340
UMLENKTEIL
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
CM+9830010351
KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
CM+9830030802

LATCH LHS COMPLETE
CM+9830010381
BLATTFEDER RECHTS
LEAF SPRING RHS
10
CM+9830010391
BLATTFEDER LINKS
LEAF SPRING LHS
11
CM+9830011310
12
CM+9830010440
SCHRAUBE
SCREW
VIS
13
CM+9830430110
SCHARNIER
HINGE
CHARNIERE
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
ADC-C CASSETTES - 21X43 (43X35) (TYPE 8320/785)

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 63
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
ADC-C CASSETTES - 21X43AS (43X35) (TYPE 8320/790)

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 64
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.

Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9830461302
CM+9832061600
DECKEL GESCHW.
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
CM+9832080500
BODEN VOLLSTNDIG
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
CM+9830030702

LATCH RHS COMPLETE
CM+9832520360
ZUGFEDER
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
CM+9830010340
UMLENKTEIL
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
CM+9830010351
KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
CM+9830030802

LATCH LHS COMPLETE
CM+9830010381
BLATTFEDER RECHTS
LEAF SPRING RHS
10
CM+9830010391
BLATTFEDER LINKS
LEAF SPRING LHS
11
CM+9830011310
12
CM+9830010440
SCHRAUBE
SCREW
VIS
13
CM+9830430110
SCHARNIER
HINGE
CHARNIERE
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
ADC-C CASSETTES - 21X43AS (43X35) (TYPE 8320/790)

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 65
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
01,02
5158_chap05_31.CDR
CR MAMMO CASSETTE (TYPE 8330/785, 8331/785)

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 66
DD+DIS268.08M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Spare Parts List

Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9833010000
CR MAMMO CASSETTE 18X24

CM+9833110000

=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
CR MAMMO CASSETTE (TYPE 8330/785, 8331/785)

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 67
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Spare Parts Kit Categories

R
'Repair'
Parts required to repair a machine

Kit `R` should be part of the field service engineers` car stock.
Quantity covers requirements for ca. 10 machines.
Adapt quantity locally depending on:
'Installation'
number of machines
extension of the service area
local service structure (centralized / decentralized)
stockpiling
Parts required to install a machine

Kit `I`should be available as case stock.
Includes all parts to perform the installation (does not comprise parts
included in the shipment).
Quantity covers one single machine installation.
M 'Maintenance'
'Local stock'
Parts required to maintain a machine

Kit `M` should be available as case stock.
Includes all parts required to perform a maintenance according to the
maintenance checklist.
Quantity covers one single maintenance.
Extremely expensive or bulky parts
Kit `L` should be part of the local central warehouse.
Determine quantity depending on costs and on the installed base.
Spare Parts Kit Order numbers

Order number
CM+051560100731
Spare Part Kit

CR 25.0 Sortiment R
version
CM+051560100733
CR 25.0 Sortiment M
CM+051560100734
CR 25.0 Sortiment L
CM+051580100731
CR 35-X Sortiment R
CM+051580100733
CR 35-X Sortiment M
CM+051580100734
CR 35-X Sortiment L

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
Type
TYPE5156/0100/0105/5158/0100
5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 68
DD+DIS268.08M
Spare Parts List
Type Overview
This spare parts list is valid for the following machine type(s):
Device Name
Type No.
Specification
CR 25.0
5156/0105
AS OF SN 6000
CR 35-X
5158/0100
ALL SERIAL NUMBERS
CR 25.0
5156/0100
UP TO SN < 6000
Accessory Overview
Following accesssories are separately available:
Order number
Accessory
MOBILE KIT
EBYO1
PROSAT WIPERS
ETRTM

11-2008
CR25.0 / CR35-X
Type
TYPE5156/0100/0105/5158/0100
5156/100/105, 5158/100
Chapter 5 / 69
HEALTHCARE
Chapter 6
Accessories
Imaging Services
CR 35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 105
(as of SN 6000)
Content of Chapter 6: Accessories

This chapter contains the instructions for all accessories (options):
Document No.
Contents
Edition.
Revision
DD+DIS222.06E
Fitting Instructions for the Mobile Kit
1.0
DD+DIS025.05E
Technical Documentation for the CR User Station
4.0
DD+DIS180.05M
Spare Parts List for the CR User Station
n.a.


eq_06_accessories_toc_e_template_v02
HEALTHCARE
Accessories
Global Services Organisation
Order-No.: DD+DIS222.06E
CR 35-X
*16BY9U1*
Type 5158
1 Piece 6BY9U MA1
CR 25.0
F7.5155.9024.0
(only needed for production purpose)
Type 5156
ADC SOLO
Type 5155
Fitting Instructions for the Mobile Kit

CM+9 5155 9500 x
This fitting instruction is also enclosed to the accessory Mobile Kit.
This document describes the installation of the Mobile Kit, which is
necessary to fix the digitizer on deck when in mobile use.
Necessary time:
approx. 1 hour
Necessary tools:
5 mm Allen key
6 mm Allen key
7 mm socket wrench
10 mm wrench
13 mm wrench
This fitting instruction replaces DD+DIS233.05E.

printed in Germany

eq_06_accessories_e_template_v01
DD+DIS222.06E
Accessories
List of contents
1
General Information .....................................................................1
1.1
Introduction .......................................................................................... 1
1.2
Scope of Delivery ................................................................................. 1
1.3
Preparation ........................................................................................... 2
Installation Procedure..................................................................2
2.1
Adjust the Wall Mounting Bracket ...................................................... 2
Adjust the Ground Plate ..............................................................3
3.1
Fix the Ground Plate and the Wall Mounting Bracket ....................... 3
3.2
Fix the Mounting Bracket to the Digitizer........................................... 4
3.3
Fix the Digitizer to the wall .................................................................. 4
3.4
Security Fix of the Scan Unit............................................................... 5

CR 35-X
Type 5158
Chapter 6 / 1
DD+DIS222.06E
Accessories
General Information
1.1
Introduction
Provided with a mobile kit the digitizer can be installed in a van, in a container
or in a vessel. This mobile installation kit is used to fix the machine on deck.
Mobile Kit:
Type Number: 5155 / 153
ABC Code: EBYO1
Spare Parts No.: CM+ 9.5155.9500.x
1.2
Scope of Delivery
1 safety bar with screw (1A)
length: 655 mm
1 safety bar with screw (1B)
length: 605 mm
CR
(A)
1 mounting block (2).
+
25
CR
)
(B
LO
SO
1 wall mounting bracket

with 2 quick action locks (3).
1 bolt with split pin (4).
35
C
AD
4
5
1 mounting bracket to be fixed

to the digitizer (6 screws) (5).
1 ground plate with mounting
bracket (6).
1 set of installation instructions.
5158_reg06_001.cdr
figure 1

CR 35-X
Type 5158
Chapter 6 / 1
DD+DIS222.06E
Accessories
1.3
Preparation
Examine thoroughly the path along which the digitizer has to be moved until
it reaches its final location, to guarantee sufficient space to pass all the
doors.
Make sure that the final location is solid enough to carry the digitizer.
Read carefully the Installation Planning Instructions, chapter 11.
Installation Procedure
2.1
Adjust the Wall Mounting Bracket

(1)
Remove the side panels of the

digitizer.
(2)
Loosen the paneling screws on

the rear of the digitizer.
CAUTION:
The scan unit may be damaged.
Take care that none of the elements
5155P2-A.CDR
fixing the paneling screw
figure
2
(1 small and 1 large washer,
1 retaining ring, 1 nut) can fall into the
digitizer.
(3)
Fix the mounting block to the

digitizer with a 5 mm Allen key.
Please use the two screw sets
supplied, consisting of 1 allen
screw, 1 washer, 1 retaining
ring and one nut each.
(4)
Fix the mounting block to the

wall mounting bracket with the
quick action locks.
figure 3

Chapter 6 / 2
CR 35-X
Type 5158
DD+DIS222.06E
Accessories
Adjust the Ground Plate
3.1
(1)
Position the ground plate as

close as possible to the place
where the digitizer is expected
to remain located.
(2)
Move the digitizer onto the

ground plate.
(3)
Insert the bolt into the guide slot

of the mounting bracket
provided to fix the digitizer on
the ground plate.
(4)
Make sure that the mounting

block touches the wall mounting
bracket.
(5)
The mounting bracket of the

ground plate should be
approximately in the middle
position while the screws are
not fixed. Now the ground plate
is in the perfect position.
(6)
Mark the corners of the ground

plate with a pencil.
5155P1-C.CDR
figure 4
Fix the Ground Plate and the Wall Mounting Bracket

(1)
Remove the bolt from the guide slot and move the digitizer down
from the ground plate.
(2)
Select a minimum of 4 holes in the ground plate where you want to

fix it to the floor. You may be guided by the conditions of the floor
where the digitizer is being located.
(3)
Fix the ground plate to the floor.
(4)
Select a minimum of 4 holes in the wall mounting bracket. You

may be guided by the conditions of the wall where the digitizer is
being fixed.
(5)
Fix the wall mounting bracket to the wall.
(6)
Examine the solidness of the fixed wall mounting bracket and the
fixed ground plate.

CR 35-X
Type 5158
Chapter 6 / 3
DD+DIS222.06E
Accessories
3.2
Fix the Mounting Bracket to the Digitizer

(1)
Lift the digitizer to an angle

which allows you to fix the
mounting bracket to the
digitizer. Use the 10 mm
wrench to fix the mounting
bracket tightly (6 screws).
5155P3-A.CDR
figure 5
3.3
Fix the Digitizer to the Wall

(1)
Move the digitizer onto the

ground plate again and insert
the mounting block into the wall
mounting bracket.
figure 6
(2)
Connect the mounting block to

the wall mounting bracket with
the quick action locks again.
Now screw the quick action
locks to the perfect length. The
perfect length is reached when
the lock snaps softly into the
locking position.
figure 7

Chapter 6 / 4
CR 35-X
Type 5158
DD+DIS222.06E
Accessories
(3)
Insert the bolt into the guide slot

and the mounting bracket of the
digitizer. This locks the digitizer
to the ground plate.
(4)
Attach the split pin to the

provided hole of the bolt.
(5)
Fix the 4 screws thoroughly to

connect the mounting bracket
firmly to the ground plate.
figure 8
3.4
Security Fix of the Scan Unit

If the digitizer is being used in a
mobile location, the scan unit has to
be fixed additionally.
(1) Insert the safety bar into the
provided guides (A) and fix it
with the 7 mm socket wrench
(B).
5158_reg06_002.cdr
figure 9

CR 35-X
Type 5158
Chapter 6 / 5
HEALTHCARE
Global Services Organisation
Technical
Documentation
Order-No.: DD+DIS025.05E
*1YNCFV1*
1 Piece YNCFV MA1
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
4th Edition
This documentation is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS025.05E

This document contains the technical documentation for the CR User Station.
It describes the installation, function and troubleshooting of the CR User Station as well as the technical data.
The CR User Station is an accessory of the CR 25.0 and the CR 75.0 digitizers.
This document is part of the service documentation for the CR 25.0 (DD+DIS071.04E)
and for the CR 75.0 (DD+DIS002.04E).

printed in Germany 2006-03-27

CAUTION:
This system uses mains voltage.
Please consider the respective safety regulations.
The adjustments and routines described in this document must only be performed by qualified
technical personnel.
NOTE:
Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician.
CE Declaration:
According to the medical guidelines the CE Declaration (CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the
product is changed without explicit consent of the manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not
only to safety elements.
We reserve the right to technical changes
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
List of Contents
1
Introduction ..................................................................................1
Safety Instructions .......................................................................3
2.1
General Safety Instructions ........................................................................... 3
2.2
Safety Precautions for the Monitor ............................................................... 4
2.3
Safety Instructions for Cleaning the CR User Station ................................. 4
2.4
Relevant Warning Label ................................................................................. 5
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
Safety Compliance.......................................................................................... 6
CR User Station ................................................................................................ 6
ID Tablet ........................................................................................................... 6
Installation Instructions...............................................................7
3.1
Mounting to the Base Plate............................................................................ 7
3.2
Removing the ID Tablet from the CR User Station ...................................... 8
3.3
Installing Hub and Uninteruptible Power Supply (UPS) .............................. 8
3.4
Installing Monitor, Keyboard and Mouse...................................................... 9
3.5
Re-Installing the ID Tablet............................................................................ 11
3.6
Selecting Power settings ............................................................................. 12
3.7
Connections and Grids ................................................................................ 14
3.8
Docking the CRUS to a CR 25.0 Digitizer ................................................... 15
3.9
Exchanging the Monitor Rack ..................................................................... 17
3.10
Adjusting the Monitor................................................................................... 21
Functional Description ..............................................................22
4.1
Components of the CR User Station ........................................................... 22
4.2
Standard Workflow with the CR User Station ............................................ 23
4.3
Direct ID Workflow with the CR User Station ............................................. 24
Troubleshooting .........................................................................24
Spare Parts List ..........................................................................25
Maintenance................................................................................25

2006-03-27
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
Page I
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
Installation Planning.................................................................. 26
8.1
Continuous Operation...................................................................................26
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.3
Dimensions ....................................................................................................26
CR User Station as stand-alone Device ..........................................................26
CR User Station with CR 25.0 .........................................................................27
CR User Station with CR 75.0 .........................................................................28
Technical Data ...............................................................................................29
8.4
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.4.4
Connections...................................................................................................30
Mains Fuse Protection.....................................................................................30
Operating Voltage ...........................................................................................30
ID Tablet..........................................................................................................31
Connection Cables ..........................................................................................31

Page II
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
2006-03-27
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
Introduction
The CR User Station (CRUS) is a new operating console that facilitates the
work of the radiographer. It is suitable for all CR environments: centralized,
decentralized or personal CR solutions.
It has been designed for the use with the digitizers CR 25.0 and CR 75.0.
Its modular ergonomic design offers space for:
a PC which handles, processes and dispatches images,
an LCD monitor,
mouse and keyboard,
a network switch or hub,
an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), and
cassette storage.
The CRUS can be installed as a stand-alone configuration, working together

with a CR 25.0 or CR 75.0 digitizer.
figure 1

2006-03-27
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
Page 1
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
For an optimal workflow the CRUS can also be docked directly to the CR 25.0.
The CRUS can not be docked directly to the CR 75.0.
figure 2
This documentation includes the safety instructions, the instructions for the
mechanical installation, and technical data of the CRUS.
As the CRUS is maintenance-free, there are no maintenance instructions or
checklists available.
NOTE:
For all information concerning the digitizers the CRUS can be attached to,
please refer to the relevant service documentation:
CR 25.0:
Order number DD+DIS071.04E or

in MedNet: GSO Library / Computed Radiography /
CR Digitizers / CR 25.0
CR 75.0:
Order number DD+DIS002.04E or

in MedNet: GSO Library / Computed Radiography /
CR Digitizers / CR 75.0

Page 2
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
2006-03-27
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
Safety Instructions
2.1
General Safety Instructions
The CRUS complies with the EN 60950 standard for

Information Technology. This means that, although it is absolutely safe,
patients may not come in direct contact with the equipment. Therefore,
the operator console must be placed outside a radius of 1.5 m around
the patient.
Perform no other operations on the CRUS than those described in this

document.
Pay attention when working near the pedestal: the foot projects slightly
and could be tripped on. When rolling the pedestal away from its
position, take care not to pull or put any strain on power or network
leads.
When moving the CRUS, take care that it remains stable at all times. In
particular, the following considerations should be kept in mind:
the nature of the floor and any floor-coverings, carpets, etc.;
any obstructions such as cables;
any slopes to be negotiated.
To avoid collisions and instability the monitor must be turned over the
ID Tablet when moving longer distances, as shown below:
figure 3

2006-03-27
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
Page 3
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
Make sure that the two safety caps are mounted on top of the right side
rollers in case of stand-alone CRUS (this means that the CRUS is not
connected to a CR 25.0 Digitizer), as shown below:
figure 4
2.2
2.3
Safety Precautions for the Monitor
The monitor must be fixed on the monitor arm with screws.
If the monitor arm is re-positioned in a different height, the lock must be

closed.
Safety Instructions for Cleaning the CR User Station
Pull the power plug out of the CRUS prior to cleaning the
equipment and switch off the UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) if
installed.

Page 4
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
2006-03-27
DD+DIS025.05E
2.4
CR User Station
Relevant Warning Label
Pay attention to the warning label at the rear side of the CRUS:
Check power selection before connecting to mains
figure 5

2006-03-27
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
Page 5
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
2.5
Safety Compliance
2.5.1
CR User Station
the general safety regulations EN 60950, EN 60601-1-2, and UL 60950,
CSA C22.2 No. 60950,
the radio interference regulations EN 55022:1997, Class B and FCC 47,

Part 15, Subchapter B, Class A.
The safety compliance is only guaranteed by using equipment supplied by

Agfa (refer to Technical specifications on page 21 of the User Manual 2313).
Using other equipment will void the safety compliance.
In combination with a digitizer the isolating transformer assures that the
digitizer still complies with EN 60601-1-1 medical, electrical systems.
The CR User Station bears the CE mark and fully complies with the
CE Directive 89/336/EEC and with the federal code of the United States,
bearing on:
Emission and immunity according to EN 60601-1-2, for emissions the

equipment complies with EN 55011 class A (CISPR 11).
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take
adequate measures.
2.5.2
Emissions according to 47 CFR part 15 subpart B, Class A.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Radio-parameters of the ID Tablet according to ETS 300330.
ID Tablet
UL 60950, Third Edition,
CAN/CSA 22.2 No. 60950, Third Edition (cUL),
EN 60950 1:2001
TV certified.

Page 6
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
2006-03-27
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
3.1
Mounting to the Base Plate

NOTE:
The actions described in this section apply only, if the CRUS is installed as
stand-alone device.
Skip this section if you want to dock it to a CR 25.0 digitizer.
(1)
Put base plate on the ground at

the final position of the CRUS.
(2)
Move the unequipped CRUS

onto it.
figure 6
(3)
Screw four Phillips screws

slightly to the thread nuts of the
base plate.
Attend that the base plate does
not bend up by tightening the
screws.
figure 7
(4)
Mount safety caps on top of the

right side rollers.
figure 8
2006-03-27
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
Page 7
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
3.2
Removing the ID Tablet from the CR User Station

(1)
Loosen the Phillips screw

(see circle).
(2)
Pull the ID Tablet to the front

and lift it off carefully
(see arrow).
(3)
Unplug the power supply and

the connection to the control
PC.
figure 9
3.3
Installing Hub and Uninteruptible Power Supply (UPS)

(1)
Unscrew the two grids at the

rear side of the CRUS.
(2)
Insert the hub (A) from above

between the brackets at the
rear wall.
A
B
C
(3)
Pass the mains cable of the

hub through the cut of the front
bracket (B), plug it in the hub
and fix the bracket with
two screws (5.5 mm, C).
(4)
Insert the UPS
(5)
Plug in the power cable of the

UPS to the isolating
transformer.
(6)
Connect the power cables of

control PC, ID tablet and
monitor to the UPS.
(7)
Push the feet of the UPS in the

four borings at the bottom
(arrows; the fourth boring is
hidden by the UPS).
figure 10
figure 11

Page 8
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
2006-03-27
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
(8)
Apply foam to the bracket

(figure 12) and fix it with
four screws to the furniture
(figure 13).
figure 12
figure 13
Result
3.4
Hub and UPS are installed in the CRUS.
Installing Monitor, Keyboard and Mouse

(1)
Insert the monitor arm (A) in the

socket (B) and fix it with the
Allen screw (C, 5 mm) at the
desired height.
figure 14

2006-03-27
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
Page 9
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
NOTE:
By default, a rack for the Barco monitor is installed.
If you have a Barco monitor, go directly to step (2).
If you have another monitor, exchange the rack before proceeding with
step (2). The exchange of the rack for the NEC monitor is described in
section 3.9.
(2)
Unpack the monitor and fix it to

the monitor rack with screws
(see arrows).
NOTE:
figure 15 is an example.
Installations of other monitors, e.g.
with adapter plates, may look
different.
figure 15
(3)
Adjust the monitor according to

section 3.10.
(4)
Put keyboard and mouse into

their predefined position.
figure 16

Page 10
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
2006-03-27
DD+DIS025.05E
Result
3.5
CR User Station
(5)
Unscrew the cable duct at the

monitor arm
(two Phillips screws).
(6)
Pass the cable in the duct and

close it.
(7)
Place the monitor adapter

beside the UPS and connect it
to the monitor and the power
supply.
(8)
Install other cables as usual

with PC installations. Pass the
cables accurately in the
provided cable ducts.
figure 17
Monitor, Keyboard and Mouse are installed in the CRUS.
Re-Installing the ID Tablet

(1)
Reconnect the ID tablet:

Connect the power supply (B)
and the connection to the
control PC.
NOTE:
With workstation software
ADC QS 2.1 use the
serial RS232 connection (A).
With CR QS 3.0 or higher use the
USB connection (C).
(2)
B
C
Put the ID tablet back to its

place and fix the Phillips screw
(see figure 9, circle).
figure 18

2006-03-27
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
Page 11
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
(3)
Fix the two cassette brackets

beneath the ID tablet.
figure 19
3.6
Selecting Power settings

You find the possible
primary voltages with the
corresponding currents for the
fuses at the rear side of the
CRUS:
100 V:
120 V
230 V
240 V
6.3 AT
5.0 AT
2.5 AT
2.5 AT
figure 20

Page 12
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
2006-03-27
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
(1)
Take out the plastic bushing

above the power socket.
figure 21
(2)
Check that both fuses have

current values which fit the
local mains voltage.
If fuses must be changed,
take the appropriate fuses
from the accessory pack.
figure 22
Take out the adjustment
element and insert it with the
country-specific voltage at
the left side (230 V in the
example).
20
100
2 01
(3)
240
figure 23

2006-03-27
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
Page 13
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
(4)
Check that the correct

mains voltage is visible in
the small window of the
plastic bushing
(230 V in the example).
figure 24
(5)
Result
3.7
Put the plastic bushing back.
The power settings are adjusted.
Connections and Grids

(1)
Connect the network cable of the digitizer to the hub of the CRUS.
(2)
Connect the CRUS to the hospital network.
(3)
Reinstall both rear grids.
NOTE:
If you want to dock the CRUS to a CR 25.0 digitizer, continue with
section 3.8.
Result
The installation of the CRUS as a stand-alone device is finished. Connect it

to the mains.

Page 14
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
2006-03-27
DD+DIS025.05E
3.8
CR User Station
Docking the CRUS to a CR 25.0 Digitizer

(1)
Fix the sticky tape to the side

panel facing the digitizer
(arrows).
figure 25
(2)
Move the CRUS to its final

position next to the digitizer.
figure 26

2006-03-27
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
Page 15
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
(3)
Position the attaching plate in

such a way, that the axis of the
wheel of the digitizer is caught.
figure 27
(4)
Swivel attaching plate by 90

and fasten two Phillips screws
at the CRUS side panel.
This connection prevents the
CRUS from unintended moving.
figure 28
(5)
Turn the wheels of the CRUS

inwards and lock the brakes.
figure 29
Result
(6)
Place the side cover such that

the cutout (see arrow) is on the
upper side.
(7)
Mount the side cover with two

screws (7 mm, circles).
(8)
Connect the CRUS to the

mains.
figure 30
The CRUS is installed and docked to the CR 25.0.

Page 16
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
2006-03-27
DD+DIS025.05E
3.9
CR User Station
Exchanging the Monitor Rack

By default, the CRUS is equipped
with the monitor rack for the
Barco monitor (see figure 31).
If you have a NEC monitor, you
will have to exchange the
monitor rack. For this, follow the
instructions in this section.
figure 31
(1)
Unscrew the lever

(Allen key, size 4) and
remove it.
figure 32
(2)
Unscrew the quick opening

device with your hand.
figure 33

2006-03-27
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
Page 17
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
NOTE:
The monitor rack, the bearing and
the washers can easily fall down!
Be careful when removing the
axis.
(3)
Push the axis out of its

bearing.
figure 34
(4)
Remove monitor rack,

bearing and two washers
from the retainer.
figure 35

Page 18
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
2006-03-27
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
NOTE:
If the monitor rack is not fixed
properly, it may tilt unwanted.
Check that the hole of the retainer
(see circle) and the form of the
axis fit smoothly together.
figure 37
figure 36
(5)
Align the bearing with the

NEC monitor rack.
figure 38
(6)
Fix the monitor rack with the

axis on the retainer.
The arrows indicate the
places for the washers.
figure 39

2006-03-27
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
Page 19
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
(7)
Screw the quick opening

device into the lever.
figure 40
(8)
Screw the quick opening

device with the lever back
onto the end of the axis.
figure 41
Result
The monitor rack is exchanged.

Page 20
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
2006-03-27
DD+DIS025.05E
3.10
CR User Station
Adjusting the Monitor

Adjust the inclination of the monitor by using the lever at the rear side:
NOTE:
The lever is a quick-fix system: Its fixed or loose position can be changed
when it is pulled (lever free, see figure 42).
There is no need to open the Allen screw at the axis for the adjustment of the
monitor.
(1)
Support the monitor by

holding it at the bottom side.
(2)
Loosen lever by turning

counter-clockwise.
(3)
Adjust the inclination.
(4)
Fix the lever by turning

clockwise.
lever
free
lever
locked
loose
fixed
figure 42

2006-03-27
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
Page 21
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
4.1
Components of the CR User Station
monitor *
keyboard *
mouse
support
top storage rack
ID tablet
side storage racks
case
figure 43: The * indicates devices which are not included in the CRUS delivery
Components
Additional devices
The CRUS consists of the following components:
an operator console which provides place for keyboard and mouse,
a monitor arm,
an integrated ID tablet,
a top storage rack for up to six cassettes,
two side storage racks for up to five cassettes each,
an isolating transformer (inside the case), and
a case which contains the ID tablet and the isolation transformer.
The CRUS offers space for the following devices which are not included in
the delivery of the CRUS:
a PC which handles, processes and dispatches images,
an LCD monitor (flat-screen),
mouse and keyboard,
a network switch or hub, and
an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS).

Page 22
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
2006-03-27
DD+DIS025.05E
4.2
CR User Station
Standard Workflow with the CR User Station
figure 44
Together with a digitizer the CRUS offers an optimum workflow:
(1)
Up to five exposed cassettes are stored in the upper side storage rack
(A).
(2)
The exposed cassettes are then identified in the ID Tablet (B).
(3)
The exposed and identified cassettes are inserted directly into the
digitizer or, if the digitizer is busy, stored in the top storage rack (C).
(4)
The scanned and erased cassettes waiting to be used again are stored
in the lower side storage rack (D).

2006-03-27
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
Page 23
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
4.3
Direct ID Workflow with the CR User Station

In order to save time it is also possible to use the CRUS for Direct ID workflow:
The digitizer recognizes that the cassette is not identified and opens a
communication to the control PC in the CRUS.
The digitizer starts scanning the image plate and sends an ID Data
Request Message to the control PC. On the monitor the ID Viewer
window pops up for user entry of the ID data.
The control PC sends the complete ID data to the digitizer.
Troubleshooting
Symptom
The control PC shuts down automatically or does not start up.

The UPS is either off or it is beeping. In the latter case the On Battery
indicator is blinking.
Defect
A fuse in the isolating transformer is defect.
Solution
Check fuses and replace them if necessary.

Three fuses are installed at the
isolating transformer in the CRUS:
One fuse is located inside the

fuse box (A),
2.0 AT for 500 V,
(CM+9 0451 9609 0)
Two fuses are located inside the

plastic bushing of the
voltage adjustment (B).
The fuses must be appropriate for
the country-specific voltage:
figure 45
2.5 AT for 230 240 V
5.0 AT for 120 V
6.3 AT for 100 V
(CM+9 0451 9604 0)

(CM+9 0452 3188 0)
(CM+9 0452 3187 0)
WARNING:
Overload of the isolation transformer may lead to fire hazard!
Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated above.

Page 24
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
2006-03-27
DD+DIS025.05E
Symptom
Defect
Solution
CR User Station
The ID Viewer application at the control PC does not pop up if a cassette is

inserted in the ID tablet.
The main switch (arrow) of the ID tablet does not shine green, i.e. it is off.
Check if the main switch of the ID tablet shines green.
figure 46
Spare Parts List

For the Spare Parts List refer to the document DD+DIS180.05M.
Maintenance
The CRUS does not need maintenance.

2006-03-27
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
Page 25
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
8.1
Continuous Operation
The device is suitable for continuous operation.
8.2
Dimensions
8.2.1
CR User Station as stand-alone Device

Height
1010 mm (39.8)
Height with monitor arm and

19 monitor
1710 mm (67.3)
Width without cassette rack
320 mm (12.6)
Depth
650 mm (25.6)
Footprint
with racks: 530 x 650 mm

(20.9 x 25.6)
without racks: 520 x 650 mm
(20.5 x 25.6)

Page 26
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
2006-03-27
DD+DIS025.05E
8.2.2
CR User Station
CR User Station with CR 25.0
Required free space for optimum operation (all dimensions in cm (inch)):
193 (75)
5 (2)
5 (2)
43 (17)
45 (18)
100 (40)
64 (25)
120 (47)
200 (77)
75 (30)
Digitizer
figure 47

2006-03-27
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
Page 27
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
8.2.3
CR User Station with CR 75.0

Required free space for optimum operation (all dimensions in cm (inch)):
10 (4)
203 (79)
5 (2)
5 (2)
64 (25)
Digitizer
127 (48)
200 (77)
68 (27)
61 (23)
43 (17)
figure 48

Page 28
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
2006-03-27
DD+DIS025.05E
8.3
CR User Station
Technical Data
Weight
Empty
53 kg
Fully equipped
approx. 100 kg
Operating Conditions
Temperature
10C 30C
Change of temperature
0.5C / min.
Relative humidity
15% 80%
Specifications of the Isolating Transformer

Power input, switchable
(primary winding)
100 V AC / 120 V AC /
230 V AC / 240 V AC
Power output (secondary winding)
230 V AC
Dimensions
220 mm x 170 mm x 200 mm

(8.7 x 6.7 x 7.9)
(H x W x D)
Specifications of the integrated ID Tablet

Input voltage
100 240 V AC; 5 V DC
Frequency
50 60 Hz
Classification
Class III

2006-03-27
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
Page 29
DD+DIS025.05E
CR User Station
Type Label
You find the type label at the rear side of the CRUS.
figure 49
8.4
Connections
8.4.1
Mains Fuse Protection

Mains Fuse Protection of CRUS
100 V
6,3 A, slow blow
120 V
5,0 A, slow blow
230 240 V
2,5 A, slow blow
Mains Fuse Protection of Wall Outlet
8.4.2
Europe
16 A, slow blow
USA & Japan
15 A, slow blow
Operating Voltage
100 V
+ 10%
120 V
+ 10%
230 240 V
+ 10%

Page 30
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
2006-03-27
DD+DIS025.05E
8.4.3
CR User Station
ID Tablet
The ID Tablet has
a 5 V DC power supply,
8.4.4
a RS232 Interface and
an USB connector.
Connection Cables
The following cables are included as standard delivery.
Mains cable
I-2500-S
Mains cable
5-15P/IEC 320 C13
Serial cable
RS232 cable 1-1UL VW1, 2 m

2006-03-27
CR User Station
Type 5157 / 100
Page 31
Copyright AGFA GEVAERT HealthCare, DD+DIS025.05E

All rights reserved
Published by
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
D - 81539 Mnchen
Technical modifications reserved

AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services
Ersatzteilliste
Spare Parts List
Liste des Pices de Rechange
Order No.: DD+DIS180.05M
CR User Station
Type 5157/0100/0200
1 Piece YV)VH MA1
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
1.
This system uses main voltage.
Please
considerGSO
the respective
safety regulations.
(see
MEDNET
=> General
Info => Agfa HealthCare =>
These instructions descibre Publications
adjustments and routines
which must
only beprior
performed
by
to attempting
any operation,
=> Service
Manual)
qualified technical personnel.
repair or maintenance task on the equipment.
Note:
2.
Strictly observe all safety directions within the
"Generic
Safety
Directions"
and onelectrician.
the product.
Electrical repairs and connections
must only
be performed
by a qualified
Caution:

CE Declaration:
According to the medical guidelines, the CE Declaration (CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the
product is changed without explicit consent of the manufacturer!
This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
Attention:
De la tension secteur est prsente dans ce systme. Observez toutes les prcautions de scurit.
Ce manuel contient des procdures et des rglages l' attention exclusive de spcialistes du
service aprs-vente.
Note:
Seul un spcialiste est autoris effectuer les branchements lectriques et les rparations.
Seul un spcialiste est autoris effectuer les
branchements mcaniques et les rparations.
Explication CE:
D'aprs les directives mdicales l'explication CE (conformit CE) expire ds que ce produit est
modifi sans autorisation de son fabricant!
Valable pour toutes les pices et non seulement pour les lments de scurit!
5157_0100_TITEL.CDR
Die Ersatzteilliste ist gesondert lieferbar: Bestellnummer DD+DIS180.05M
nderungen von Daten und Eigenschaften, die dem technischen Fortschritt dienen, vorbehalten.
We reserve the right to change data and characteristics in the light of technical progress.
Sous rserve de modifications de donnes et de caractristiques pouvant servir au progrs
technique.
The spare parts list is available separately. Order number DD+DIS180.05M

La liste des pices dtaches est votre disposition sparment: No. de Ref. DD+DIS180.05M
internal update #: 3
printed in Germany 03-2007


Spare Parts List
DD+DIS180.05M
Inhaltsverzeichnis - Contents - Table de matires
External Partners: For ordering spare parts

contact your local AGFA representative.
LEISTUNGSEINHEIT
POWER UNIT
MODULE DE PUISSANCE
SEITE / PAGE 8 - 9
ID STATION
ID STATION
ID STATION
SEITE / PAGE 6 - 7
Please refer to:

www.agfa.com => HealthCare => ABOUT US => Agfa HealthCare worldwide
For Recycling information refer to:

http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf
GESTELL
FRAME
CHSSIS
SEITE / PAGE 4 - 5
WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or
improper operation.
Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the
respective procedure.

Chapter 5 / 2
03-2007
Type 5157/0100/0200
CR User Station

Spare Parts List
DD+DIS180.05M
Ersatzteilliste / Spare Parts List / Liste des Pices de Rechange
Type 5157/0100/0200
CR User Station
Chapter 5 / 3
03-2007
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS180.05M
08
06
05
09
07
04
03*
02
01
5157_0100_8001.CDR

Chapter 5 / 4
03-2007
GESTELL
FRAME
CHSSIS
TYPE 5157/0100/0200
CR User Station
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS180.05M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9515777350
LENKROLLE MIT FESTSTELLER MONT.

GUIDE ROLLER WITH ARRESTING LEVER INSATLLED
ROUE GUIDE AVEC LEVIER DE BLOCAGE MONTER
CM+9515777250
LENKROLLE MONT.
GUIDE ROLLER INSTALLED
ROUE GUIDE MONTER
CM+9515778120
CM+9515778151
ABLAGE
TRAY
RANGEMENT
CM+9515777420
MONITORWINKEL
MONITOR BRACKET - (FOR BARCO MONITOR)
EQUERRE DU MONITEUR
CM+9515777921
ZWISCHENPLATTE
INTERMEDIATE PLATE - (FOR NEC MONITOR)
PLAQUE D'ECARTEMENT
CM+9039901130
SCHARNIER
HINGE
CHARNIERE
CM+9039000290
ENTRIEGELUNGSGRIFF
RELEASE HANDLE
POIGNEE DE DERROUILLAGE
CM+9037160600
GUMMIKAPPE
RUBBER FOOT
PIED CAOUTCHOUC
99
CM+9515791000
VERPACKUNG CR USER STATION

PACKING CR USER STATION
EMBALLAGE CR USER STATION
HALTEWINKEL
SUPPORT BRACKET
EQUERRE DE MAINTIEN
=Assembly
D =Standardised part. For order please refer to the separate spare parts list for standardised parts "DD+DIS011.93M"
* =Spare part not available from stock. Expect extended delivery time.

GESTELL
FRAME
CHSSIS
TYPE 5157/0100/0200
CR User Station
Chapter 5 / 5
03-2007
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS180.05M
01*
07
08
02
04
05
06
05
03
5157_0100_8002.CDR

Chapter 5 / 6
03-2007
ID STATION
ID STATION
ID STATION
TYPE 5157/0100/0200
CR User Station
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS180.05M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
*
CM+9515777750
VERKLEIDUNG KASSETTENEINGABE
PANELING CASSETTE INPUT
REVTEMENT INTRODUCTION CASSETTE
CM+9516211601
HF-PLATINE
HF BOARD
HF DISQUE
CM+9516211807
DIGITALPLATINE
DIGITAL BOARD
DIGITAL DISQUE
CM+9516212101
RESET PLATINE
RESET BOARD
RESET DISQUE
CM+9516290200
FLACHBANDKABEL
RIBBON CABLE
CABLE RUBAN
CM+9047710950
RS232-KABEL
RS232 CABLE
CABLE RS232
CM+9048613960
NETZMODUL 24V/1,3A PMA30S24

POWER SUPPLY 24V/1,3A PMA30S24
BLOC D'ALIMENTATION 24V/1,3A PMA30S24
CM+9047710960
USB-A-B KABEL
USB-A-B CABLE
CABLE USB-A-B
=Assembly

ID STATION
ID STATION
ID STATION
TYPE 5157/0100/0200
CR User Station
Chapter 5 / 7
03-2007
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS180.05M
02
01
03,04,05
5157_0100_8003.CDR

Chapter 5 / 8
03-2007
LEISTUNGSEINHEIT
POWER UNIT
MODULE DE PUISSANCE
TYPE 5157/0100/0200
CR User Station
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS180.05M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9515777711
TRENNTRAFO
TRANSFORMER
TRANSFORMATEUR
CM+9045196090
SICHERUNG T 2A
FUSE SLOW-BLOW T 2A
INERTIE FUSIBLE T 2A
CM+9045196040
SICHERUNG T 2,5A
FUSE T 2,5A
FUSIBLE T 2,5A
CM+9045231880
SICHERUNG (T 5A) UL - 6,3X32MM

FUSE (T 5A)
FUSIBLE (T 5A)
CM+9045231870
SICHERUNG (T 6,25A)
FUSE (T 6,25A)
FUSIBLE (T 6,25A)
=Assembly

LEISTUNGSEINHEIT
POWER UNIT
MODULE DE PUISSANCE
TYPE 5157/0100/0200
CR User Station
Chapter 5 / 9
03-2007
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS180.05M
Empfohlene Ersatzteilsortimente
Ersatzteilsortimente reprsentieren eine Auswahl wichtiger Teile aus der Ersatzteilliste.
Sortimentskategorien
R
'Repair'
Teilebedarf zur Reparatur des Gerts.

Dieses Sortiment sollte der Techniker im Auto mitfhren "Car Stock".
Die Mengen decken den Bedarf fr bis zu 10 Gerte.
Lokal individuelle Mengenanpassungen vornehmen in Abhngigkeit von:
- Anzahl der Gerte
- Gre des Servicegebiets
- Servicestruktur (zentral/dezentral)
- Bevorratungszeit
'Installation'
Teilebedarf zur Installation des Gerts.

Dieses Sortiment sollte als Kofferlager zur Verfgung stehen.
Es enthlt alle gertespezifischen Teile die zustzlich zu den Teilen des
Gertelieferumfangs zur Durchfhrung einer Installation bentigt werden.
Die Mengen reichen fr eine einzige Gerteinstallation.
'Maintenance'
Teilebedarf zur Wartung des Gerts.

Dieses Sortiment sollte als Kofferlager zur Verfgung stehen.
Dieses Sortiment muss fr eine Wartung zur Verfgung stehen.
Es enthlt alle gertespezifischen Teile die zur Durchfhrung einer Wartung nach
Wartungscheckliste bentigt werden.
Die Mengen reichen fr eine einzige Wartung.
'Local stock'
Extrem teure oder sperrige Teile die im Zentrallager des Landes anstatt im R-Sortiment
zur Verfgung stehen sollten.
Strategischer Bestand unabhngig von der Anzahl der Gerteinstallationen.
Falls diese Teile Bestandteil des Serviceabkommens sind mssen sie nach Verwendung
umgehend wieder auf Lager gelegt werden.

Chapter 5 / 10
03-2007
Type 5157/0100/0200
CR User Station
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS180.05M
Recommended Spare Parts Assortments

Spare Parts Assortments represent a selection of important parts out of the Spare Parts List.
Categories of Assortments
R
'Repair'
Parts required to repair a machine.

This assortment should be available in the field service engineers` car stock
Quantity covers requirements for up to 10 machines.
Adapt the locally required individual amount depending on:
- number of machines
- extension of the service area
- service structure (centralized/decentralized)
- stockpiling
'Installation'
Parts required to install a machine.

This assortment should be available in a suitcase.
It includes all machine specific parts required to perform
the installation in addition to the parts included in
the shipment.
Quantity covers one single machine installation
'Maintenance'
Parts required to maintain a machine.

This assortment should be available in a suitcase.
This assortment must be available during a maintenance job,
it includes all machine specific parts required to perform a maintenance
according to the Maintenance check list.
Quantity covers one single maintenance.
'Local stock'
Extremely expensive or bulky parts which should be kept

in the country central warehouse instead of the R assortment.
Strategic stock quantity is independent of the installed base.
If service contract obligations refer to these parts, they must be replenished
immediately.

Type 5157/0100/0200
CR User Station
Chapter 5 / 11
03-2007
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS180.05M
Assortiments de pices dtaches

Les assortiments suivants reprsentent une slection de pices essentielles extraites de la liste de
pices dtaches.
Catgories dassortiments
R
'Repair'
Pices requises pour la rparation de lappareil.

Le technicien devrait avoir cet assortiment dans son vhicule ( = Carstock)
Cette quantit est suffisante pour la rparation de 10 appareils.
Adapter les quantits sur place daprs les critres :
- nombre dappareils
- extension de la zone dintervention
- structure du service technique (centralisation/dcentralisation)
- temps dapprovisionnement
'Installation'
Pices requises pour linstallation de l'appareil.

Cet assortiment devrait tre disponible dans une mallette.
Il contient toutes les pices spcifiques lappareil requises pour effecteur l'installation en
plus des pices incluses dans la fourniture.
La quantit recouvre les besoins pour linstallation dun seul appareil.
'Maintenance'
Pices requises pour la rvision de lappareil.

Cet assortiment devrait tre disponible dans une mallette.
Cet assortiment doit tre disponible pendant la rvision.
Il contient toutes les pices spcifiques lappareil pour effecteur la maintenance en
fonction de la Maintenance check list.
Cette quantit est suffisante pour la rvision dun seul appareil.
'Local stock'
Pices encombrantes, extrmement onreuses qui devraient tre stockes

dans le magasin central de votre pays la place de l'assortiment R.
La rserve de pices stratgiques ne dpend pas du nombre dappareils installs.
Si le contrat de maintenance fait rfrence ces pices elles doivent tre remplaces
immdiatement.

Chapter 5 / 12
03-2007
Type 5157/0100/0200
CR User Station
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS180.05M
Bestellung von Sortimenten

Bestellung AGFA intern:
Code AH602A im EVS ffnen, Sortimentsnummer fr das gewnschte Sortiment R, I, M oder L
eingeben und Einzelteile bestellen.
Bestellung durch AGFA Partner:
Das gewnschte Sortiment bei der zustndigen AGFA Vertretung mit Angabe der betreffenden
Sortimentsnummer R, I, M oder L bestellen.
Ordering of Spare Part Kits

AGFA internal orders:
Open Code AH602A in the EVS, enter the kit number for the required assortment R, I, M, or L and
order individual parts.
Orders of AGFA partners:
Order the required assortment via the responsible AGFA Agency listing the respective kit number of
assortment R, I, M, or L.
Commande d'assortiments
Commande interne AGFA :
ouvrir le code AH602A dans EVS, crire le numro de l'assortiment souhait comme R, I, M ou L et
passer commande des pices.
Commande par les partenaires d'AGFA :
passer commande de l'assortiment souhait auprs du dpositaire AGFA en charge en indiquant le
numro de l'assortiment comme R, I, M ou L.

Type 5157/0100/0200
CR User Station
Chapter 5 / 13
03-2007
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS180.05M
Typenverzeichnis / Type List / List de Type

CR User Station
CR User Station
BASIC VERSION
GE VERSION
5157/0100
5157/0200

Chapter 5 / 14
03-2007
Type 5157/0100/0200
CR User Station
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS180.05M
Optionen / Options / Options

- INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK -
Nur ber Vertrieb bestellbar / Can only be ordered through Sales / Passer commande uniquement par le service des ventes

Type 5157/0100/0200
CR User Station
Chapter 5 / 15
03-2007
14.03.2007 DD+DIS180.05M Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare

Copyright
Alle Rechte vorbehalten / All rights reserved / Tous droits rservs
Herausgegeben von / Published by / Edit par
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
D - 81539 Mnchen
Technische nderungen vorbehalten
Technical modifications reserved
Sous rserve des modifications techniques
AGFA und der Agfa-Rhombus sind eingetragene Warenzeichen von Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trade marks of Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
AGFA et le logo Agfa sont des marques dposes de Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
Chapter 8
HEALTHCARE
Manufacturing Standard
Modifications
Imaging Services
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN 6000)

This document contains an overview of all the technical changes and their
chronological introduction as a production standard. This includes hardware and
software modifications.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
2.0
12-2007
Initial Release
Document
Title
n.a.
n.a.


eq_08_modifications_e_template_v02
DD+DIS219.06E
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
on the product.

12-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 8 / 2
DD+DIS219.06E
TABLE OF CONTENT
The following modifications of CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100 and CR 25.0 - Type 5156 /
105 (as of SN 6000) are listed in chronological order, the latest modification on top
of the list.
timeline
Modification
2007
August 1. Introduction of High Altitude Vacuum Pump
Enclosure: DD+DIS151.07E,
SB No. 02: DD+DIS276.07E
June 2. Introduction of Oberon 3 Board
Enclosure: DD+DIS034.07E
April 3. Modification of Brush Stripe complete
n.a.
January 4. Modification of Side Panel left
n.a.
2006
Dec. 5. Modification of cPCI-Rack
October 6. Modification of the 5-fold Stepper Motor Board
n.a.
n.a.
SB Service Bulletin

12-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 8 / 3
DD+DIS219.06E
Introduction of High Altitude Vacuum Pump

Reason
A modified vacuum pump has been introduced for the use of the
digitizer on sites between 2000 m and 4000 m above sea level.
Product(s)/
Serial
Number(s)
The High Altitude Vacuum Pump is not part of series production and
only available as upgrade kit for new installations or already installed
digitizers as well as spare part for the replacement of modified
vacuum pumps, which are defective.
Part
Number(s)
Upgrade Kit High Altitude Vacuum Pump for CR 25.0/CR 35-X

ABC Code: EZKDB
Spare part High Altitude Vacuum Pump CM+9 5158 6130 0
Enclosure - Replacement Instructions: High Altitude Vacuum

Pump for Use on Sites between 2000 m and 4000 m above Sea
Level, DD+DIS151.07E
Service Bulletin No. 02, DD+DIS276.07E
Referenced
Document(s)

12-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 8 / 4
DD+DIS219.06E
Introduction of Oberon 3 Board

Reason
In respect to the previous Oberon Board, the Oberon 3 Board is

RoHS compliant (Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous
Substances in electrical and electronic equipment).No functional
changes have been made.
Digitizer Software C25_2007 or higher is required when using the
Oberon 3 board. The required Digitizer Software is in scope of the
spare part.
This spare part can be used in RoHS compliant and non-RoHS
compliant Digitizers.
Oberon 3 Board requires Digitizer Software C25_2007 or higher.
Product(s)/
Serial
Number(s)
CR 35-X Type 5158:

SN 2061, 2129, 2131, 2132, 2133, 2134, 2136, 2138, 2142, 2143,
2145, 2149, 2152,
SN 2155, CW 25/2007
CR 25.0 Type 5156/105:
SN 6211, 6220, 6224, 6225, 6228, 6229, 6231, 6232, 6233, 6236,
6237, 6238, 6239, 6240, 6241, 6242, 6243, 6244,
SN 6246, CW 25/2007
Part
Number(s)
Spare part Oberon 3 Board, CM+9 5146 1501 0
Referenced
Document(s)
Enclosure - Installation Instructions of the Oberon 3 Board,

DD+DIS034.07E

12-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 8 / 5
DD+DIS219.06E
Modification of Brush Stripe complete

Reason
The spare part Brush stripe complete has been modified to

prevent from stray light. which could probably influence sensors by
flash light from the erasure unit.
Product(s)/
Serial
Number(s)
CR 35-X Type 5158/100:

SN 1744, 1861, 1866
SN 1868, , CW 17/2007
CR 25.0 Type 5156/105:
SN 6201, CW 17/2007
Part
Number(s)
Referenced
Document(s)
n.a.
Spare part Brush stripe complete CM+9 5158 2425 1
Modification of Side Panel left

Reason
The side panel left has been modified to ensure more free space
between photomultiplier and side panel left. This improvement has
been introduced to avoid contact between photomultiplier and side
panel left.
Product(s)/
Serial
Number(s)
CR 35-X Type 5158/100:

SN 1001
CR 25.0 Type 5156/105:
SN 6001
Part
Number(s)
Referenced
Document(s)
n.a.
Spare part Side wall, lhs, CM+9 5155 1270 4

12-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 8 / 6
DD+DIS219.06E
Modification of cPCI-Rack
Reason
The power supply unit has been modified to enable the use of hard
disks with higher voltage input.
The modified power supply unit is RoHS compliant.
Product(s)/
Serial
Number(s)
CR 35-X Type 5158/100:

SN 1385, CW 52/2006
CR 25.0 Type 5156/105:
SN 6001, CW 52/2006
Part
Number(s)
Referenced
Document(s)
n.a.
Spare part cPCI-Rack complete, CM+9 5156 1400 1

Spare part cPCI-Rack assembled, CM+9 5156 1405 4
Modification of the 5-fold Stepper Motor Board

Reason
The fixation of the 5-fold stepper motor board has been

changed by introducing new clips to prevent bending of the
board.
Product(s)/
Serial
Number(s)
CR 35-X Type 5158/100:
Part
Number(s)
The new fixation and the board are included when ordering:
spare part Cassette unit: CM+9 5156 5000 1
Referenced
Document(s)
n.a.
SN 1048, CW 41/2006

12-2007
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 8 / 7
HEALTHCARE
Chapter 9
Maintenance
Imaging Services
CR 35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 105
(as of SN 6000)
CR 35-X
CR 25.0
Type 5158 / 100
Type 5156 / 105

(as of SN 6000)
This documentation is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS403.06E.



eq_09_maintenance_e_template_v02
DD+DIS403.06E
Maintenance
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
on the product.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 2
DD+DIS403.06E
Maintenance

This document describes all routines and tests to be carried out during maintenance.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.0
12-2006

Document
Title
Service Bulletin

DD+DIS407.06E

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 3
DD+DIS403.06E
Maintenance
LIST OF CONTENTS
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION ...........................................................................5

1.1
Maintenance Frequency ...........................................................................................................5
1.2
Required Time...........................................................................................................................6
1.3
Required Tools..........................................................................................................................6
1.4
Required Cleaning Material ......................................................................................................6
1.5
Required Spare Parts ...............................................................................................................6
MAINTENANCE STEP BY STEP .............................................................................................7

2.1
Diagnostics................................................................................................................................7
2.1.1
Questioning of the Customer ....................................................................................................7
2.1.2
Infocounter Analysis..................................................................................................................7
2.1.3
How to Evaluate the Infocounter...............................................................................................8
2.1.4
Clear Infocounter ......................................................................................................................9
2.1.5
Visual Check .............................................................................................................................9
2.2
Safety Switches ......................................................................................................................10
2.3
Inside.......................................................................................................................................10
2.4
Cassette Unit...........................................................................................................................11
2.5
cPCI Rack ...............................................................................................................................12
2.6
Scan Unit.................................................................................................................................12
2.7
Transport Unit .........................................................................................................................13
2.8
Erasure Unit ............................................................................................................................14
2.9
Cassettes ................................................................................................................................16
2.10
Image Plates ...........................................................................................................................17
CHECKING THE IMAGE QUALITY........................................................................................17

3.1
Test Cycles .............................................................................................................................17
3.2
Exposure of a Flatfield ............................................................................................................17
3.3
Evaluation of a Flatfield...........................................................................................................20
COMPLETION OF MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................21

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 4
DD+DIS403.06E
Maintenance
General Maintenance Information

NOTE:
These maintenance instructions must be considered confidential.
To ensure quality and functional reliability of the system all the points listed below
(minimum maintenance points) must be carried out.
The maintenance points have been arranged in a chronologically suitable order

to make the work routines as efficient as possible.
The sequence of the maintenance points in the checklist (see appendix) is
identical with these maintenance instructions.
If there is a detailed description for a certain maintenance point in the service

documentation, this will be noted in the column "details".
During the maintenance procedure always consider the safety instructions, see
service documentation chapter 1 / 1.
Please check if it is necessary to include country specific regulations as

additional maintenance points!
NOTE:
Only for Systems with DRA Contract:
In systems with DRA Contract the infocounters are checked and evaluated in regular
intervals by the GSC. If there is an indication of an upcoming defect, this is noted in
the DRA Report and sent to the respective NSO with instructions for measures
possibly required on the machine.
Therefore we recommend to contact your NSO about this subject before
maintenance, in order to perform these recommended measures in addition to the
"must" maintenance points.
1.1
Maintenance Frequency
The maintenance has to be carried out:
every 12.000 cycles

or
once a year
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 5
DD+DIS403.06E
1.2
Maintenance
Required Time
approximately 2 h
1.3
1.4
Required Tools
Order number
Description
CM+9 5155 1015 2
Cu Filter (for exposure of test images)
CM+9 5145 3055 0
CD ROM with test images
Commercially available
service PC
Commercially available
flashlight
Required Cleaning Material

In addition to the standard equipment the following cleaning substances are required:
1.5
Order number
Description
CM+9 9999 0895 0
vacuum cleaner
CM+9 9999 0896 0
dirt bags for vacuum cleaner (10 x)
ABC-Code: EFOJH
ADC cleaner
commercially available
dust brush
lint-free cloth
soft dust brush
Required Spare Parts

The following assortment represents a complete copy of the
Maintenance-assortment (CM+0 5156 0100 733)
according to the R I M L -assortment categorization in the spare parts list:
Order number
Description
CM+9 0450 6553 0
10 x erasure lamp, 100 W, 12 V
CM+9 5145 9100 0
1 x roller (for cassette unit)

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 6
DD+DIS403.06E
Maintenance
Maintenance Step by Step
2.1
Diagnostics
2.1.1
Questioning of the Customer
2.1.2
Ask the customer for any problem that appeared since the last maintenance.
Infocounter Analysis
Service PC, required to analyze the infocounter
(1)
Insert an empty floppy in the floppy drive

of the cPCI rack.
See figure 1.
(2)
In the service menu select

<3 Save on floppy>
< 1 Infocounter>
(3)
When copying is finished remove the

floppy from the floppy drive and insert it in
the Service PC.
MG3000
Infocounter
5155_reg09_002.cdr
figure 1
(4)
Unzip the file "5156_xxxx_icn.zip"

(xxxx stands for the serial number).
(5)
Start an editor (e.g. notepad or wordpad).
(6)
Open the file "\D_\infocounter\0\infocounter.txt".
(7)
Evaluate the infocounter file.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 7
DD+DIS403.06E
2.1.3
Maintenance
How to Evaluate the Infocounter

Evaluation of infocounters.txt
What to check in the
infocounter
Comment
1.1 Device Info: Serial

number and
Installation date
Compare device serial number to chapter 8

Manufacturing Standard Modifications and
chapter 10 Service Bulletins to determine whether the
device is modified or requires a modification.
1.4 Software Info
It is recommended to have the latest software installed.

Before you upgrade to a new software, make sure that
your hardware is up to date.
2.2 Throughput
For throughput most important are the cycles per day.

They usually count between 30 and 100.
3.3 Hardware
Modification History
By comparing the status of the device with the available

Field Modifications, chapter 7, the exact hardware status
can be determined.
3.4 Software modification

history
By checking the software modification history it can be

determined, whether a recent software upgrade solved a
problem, that occurred quite often in the error list.
4.6 Laser power
Check that laser power is constant: no more than 1 mW

difference in between two entries. If the value is higher,
run system check.
4.7 Polygon Jitter

Monitoring
If amplitude exceeded 300 milli-pixel, check accurately

the image quality on the processing station.
The entries are only indications and can only be
interpreted as one symptom which is conducted to the
optic module.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 8
DD+DIS403.06E
Maintenance
Evaluation of infocounters.txt
What to check in the
infocounter
Comment
5.3 Retries
Many retries (> 1%) have to be investigated: They usually

lead to less throughput of the device. Compare it with
frequent error codes.
5.7 Error History
Check the errors occurred since last maintenance, how

often they appeared as well as the CBF (cycles between
failures) of these errors. This gives an overview of the
current status of the machine.
Compare frequently occurring errors to the error hit list,
chapter 3.3, and take actions.
5.8 Error List Relatives

and
5.9 Error List Total
2.1.4
Clear Infocounter
(1)
2.1.5
Troubleshoot these errors with the help of the technical

documentation, chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting.
Clear the infocounter to refresh relative counters.
Visual Check
flashlight
(1)
Check overall condition of the machine outside and inside for obvious
changes or damage.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 9
DD+DIS403.06E
2.2
Maintenance
Safety Switches
(1)
Check both interlock switches

(A) and (B), figure 2.
A
Note.
The machine starts up only, if both
interlocks are pressed.
Note:
The power supply is interrupted, when the
front door (interlock A) is opened.
5155_reg09_003.cdr
figure 2
2.3
Inside
vacuum cleaner
lint free cloth
(1)
Vacuum the inside of the digitizer and wipe it.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 10
DD+DIS403.06E
2.4
Opener
Mechanism
Maintenance
Cassette Unit
screw driver
dust brush
roller (CM+9 5145 9100 0)
toothed belt (CM+9 5145 5195 1)
(1)
Remove panel on right hand side of

the digitizer.
(2)
Clean the opener mechanism with a

soft dust brush.
5155_reg09_004.cdr
figure 3
(1)
Check roller (A) for visible wear and

replace if necessary (see figure 4).
(2)
To replace the roller, remove the

retaining ring (B) and pull the roller
off its shaft.
(3)
NOTE:
In case of recorded cassette feeding
problems replace the roller anyway and in
any case replace it once a year.
B
A
5155_reg09_005.cdr
figure 4
Belt
(1)
Exchange the transport belt once a year.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 11
DD+DIS403.06E
2.5
Maintenance
cPCI Rack
vacuum cleaner
cPCI Fan
(1)
Check the fan function of the cPCI rack fan by hand.

There is no air filter to be replaced.
General
(2)
Remove visible dust and dirt deposits using a vacuum cleaner.
2.6
Scan
Rollers
Scan Unit
soft cloth
ADC cleaner (if not available, use water)
Allen key 3 mm
(1)
Remove the transport unit.

(see chapter 3.5).
(2)
Clean all scan rollers (use a soft

cloth and ADC cleaner).
IMPORTANT:
The scan rollers have to be cleaned in
place and must not be removed.
To move the scan rollers just turn the
drive of the slow scan motor manually
(C), see figure 5.
Discharge
Brush
(1)
Check the discharge brush (A)

for visible wear and heavy dirt.
Clean them by hand or replace
(B), if necessary.
5155_reg09_006.cdr
figure 5

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 12
DD+DIS403.06E
2.7
Maintenance
Transport Unit
Filter
soft cloth
suction cups (CM+9 5145 6550 2)
(2)
Pull the hoses off the filter.
(3)
Unscrew the filter (A).
(4)
Shake the micro-filter (B) and

blow it clean.
(5)
Check the O-ring for cracks

and, if necessary, remove the
complete filter with its housing
(CM+9 0362 6094 0).
B
A
5155_reg09_012.cdr
figure 6
Suction
Cups
(1)
Check the suction cups

position.
(2)
Clean the suction cups (C) with

ADC cleaner.
(3)
In case of vacuum problems,

check the suction cups by
bending up the edges (check
for tears) and replace if
necessary.
5155_reg09_007.cdr
figure 7

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 13
DD+DIS403.06E
2.8
Lamps
Maintenance
Erasure Unit
soft cloth
10 x 100 W lamps (CM+9 0450 6553 0)
(1)
Open the front door.
(2)
Pull the erasure unit out and

remove it.
(3)
Remove pane (A).
(4)
Pull all lamps carefully out of their

sockets (B).
(5)
Check all parts of the erasure unit

for damage.
5155_reg09_008.cdr
figure 8
(6)
Dust the following parts of the erasure unit
reflector
input and output opening of the air stream (protection grid)
KG2 filter (A).
front pane (B) (see figure 9).
IMPORTANT:
In case of persistent dirt, use ADC cleaner for cleaning all surfaces except the inner side
of the large glass plate. This side must not be cleaned with anything wet since a gelatin
layer is attached to it.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 14
DD+DIS403.06E
Maintenance
(7)
Check the KG2 filter (A) for

damage and replace if necessary.
(8)
Insert the new lamps carefully.
B
5155_reg09_009.cdr
figure 9
NOTE:
Do not touch the glass bulbs with your bare fingers. Use a soft cloth to insert the
lamps.
Fan
(9)
Check fan of erasure unit for dust and clean if necessary.
(10) Re-insert the erasure unit.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 15
DD+DIS403.06E
2.9
Cassettes
Visual
Check
Maintenance
aluminum label (CM+9 8300 1131 0)
(1)
Check the most frequently used

cassettes and image plates for
damage. If damage is noticed,
check further cassettes.
(2)
Check the following items of the

cassette:
- Outside condition
- Hinges
- Locking
- Opening leaf springs
- Aluminum label
(3)
ALU LABEL
5156_reg09_010.cdr
figure 10
Attach missing aluminum label.
NOTE:
The digitizer needs the aluminum label to recognize ADC cassettes.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 16
DD+DIS403.06E
2.10
Visual
Check
Maintenance
Image Plates
(1)
Check if there are scratches on the surface.
(2)
Check if edges are loose as an indication for mechanical problems at IP

transport.
Checking the Image Quality

NOTE:
Check the last 20 to 40 images on the VIPS Processing Station / ADC QS Server
Station for artifacts or other image quality problems.
3.1
Test Cycles
NOTE:
Repeat the following procedure for all formats on site!
(1)
3.2
Carry out four test cycles with each format of the cassettes.
Exposure of a Flatfield
Flatfield
(1)
Print the flatfield sample provided by the digitizer:

Start the service program.
Select from the service menu
<7 Checks>
<2 Send image>
<2 Flatfield Calibration pattern>
<3 Flatfield Banding pattern>
Print the flatfields "Calibration" and "Banding" via the processing station
(Window Setting of 0.6, without changing the Level Setting).

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 17
DD+DIS403.06E
(2)
Maintenance
Expose a new image plate:
Rotating
Place the cassette in length direction Anode

to the
X-ray tube
(see figure 11).
Set the following exposure
parameters:
dose 10 Gy
(result of setting:
12 mAs, 75 kVp,
1.3 m distance)
1.5 mm Cu filter with small focus
figure 11
Turn cassette by 180.
Expose plate a second time by using
the same parameters.
X-ray tube
5156_reg09_011.cdr
NOTE:
Notice, that all exposure parameters are approximate values.
(3)
Identify the cassette on the ID Station (figure 12):

In the <Patient name> field, type a name and a cassette format,
e.g. Flatfield 18 x 24.
In the <First name> field, type the serial number of the digitizer,
e.g. SN1356.
In the <Birth date> field, type the current date,
e.g. 02012001 (use date format DDMMYYYY for day/month/year).
In the <Study Group> list, click <SERVICE>.
In the <Study Type> list, click <system diagnosis>.
In the <Substudy> list, click <Flatfield>.
Confirm the Exposure class <200>.
NOTE:
Make sure that the outlined areas are filled in as shown in the example.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 18
DD+DIS403.06E
(4)
Maintenance
Insert the cassette into the digitizer and print the image on a printer with a
Window Setting of 0.6 without changing the Level Setting.
figure 12

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 19
DD+DIS403.06E
3.3
Maintenance
Evaluation of a Flatfield
(1)
Inspect the developed image for homogeneity:

Compare the prints of the flatfield sample with your exposed flatfield at a light
box.
If there are no lines visible or the effects are less than on the example, the
image quality is all right.
If there are unacceptable effects, compare with the following sketches.
Calibration lines
Blurred dark lines in slow scan direction on the
flatfield
(see figure 13).
Expose another flatfield and compare it
again with the sample.
If there are still unacceptable effects, you have
to redo shading calibration as described in
chapter 3.6.
Expose another flatfield and compare it again
with the sample.
figure 13
NOTE:
If there are still unacceptable effects, please contact the Support Center.
Banding
Fine sharp white or gray lines in fast scan
direction on the flatfield
(see figure 14).
Check diagnostic images.
figure 14

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 20
DD+DIS403.06E
Maintenance
NOTE:
Dust
Fine sharp lines in slow scan direction on the
flatfield
(see figure 15).
Check if scanner is dusty. If yes, use the
scan brush to remove it. Expose another flat
field and compare it again with the sample.
figure 15
NOTE:
Completion of Maintenance
(1)
Confirm the maintenance by signing the checklist.
(2)
Make a backup of the system on floppy.
(3)
Inform the customer about what was done during the maintenance and which
repairs need to be done in next future.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 21

Published by
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
Chapter 9
HEALTHCARE
Maintenance
Imaging Services
Maintenance Checklist
CR 35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 105
(as of SN 6000)

This document contains the Maintenance Checklist.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.0
12-2006

Document
Title
Service Bulletin

DD+DIS407.06E



eq_09_maintenance-checklist_e_template_v02
Maintenance
DD+DIS403.06E
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
on the product.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 2
Maintenance
DD+DIS403.06E
Work Instruction for order no.
SN
Film cycles
The maintenance has to be carried out:

Once a year or every 12.000 cycles.
NOTE:
Maintenance must be carried out according to the maintenance instructions
DD+403.06E
Done
Ask customer about problems
Read out the info counters, analyse them and clear

them afterwards
Check visually the overall condition
Safety Switches
Check function of both safety switches
Inside
Vacuum the inside and wipe it
Cassette Unit
Clean opener mechanism
Check roller for visible wear and exchange if necessary
Exchange belt once a year
Check function of the cPCI rack fan manually
Remove dust and dirt
Clean scan-rollers with ADC Cleaner

(do not remove!)
Check discharge brush and clean or replace it if

necessary
Clean micro filter
Check suction cups position, clean them with ADC

Cleaner and exchange suction cups if necessary
Diagnostics
cPCI Rack
Scan Unit
Transport Units

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 3
Maintenance
DD+DIS403.06E

Erasure Unit
Cassettes
Image Plates
Done
Remove dust from reflector, input and output opening of

air stream, KG2 filter, outer front panel
Check the KG2 filter
Exchange lamps every maintenance
Clean fan, if necessary
Check the following items of the cassette:

outside condition, hinges, locking, opening leaf springs,
aluminum label
Attach missing aluminum labels
Check if there are scratches on the surface
Check if edges are loose
Checking the Image Quality

General
Done
Check the last 20 to 40 images on the VIPS / ADC QS
Carry out test cycles, four with each format
Print flatfield sample provided by the digitizer
Expose a flatfield
Evaluate the flatfield and carry out respective actions
Completion of the maintenance

General
Done
Confirm the maintenance
Make a backup of the system on floppy
Inform the customer about maintenance and which

repairs are necessary

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 4
Maintenance
DD+DIS403.06E
Remarks:
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.............................................................
Date / Signature Service Technician
.........................................................
Customer

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 9 / 5
HEALTHCARE
Chapter 10
Service Bulletins
Imaging Services
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN 6000)
Please note
Service Bulletins are not part of the Service Manual for Download.
Please download the Service Bulletins from the GSO Library:
MEDNET GSO Computed Radiography CR Digitizers
CR 35-X Service Bulletin


service_bulletin_cover_e_template_v01
DD+DIS219.06E
Service Bulletins
intentionally left blank

02-2008
CR 35-X Type 5158/100

Chapter 10 / 2
CR 25.0 Type 5156/105 as of SN 6000 Agfa Company Confidential
HEALTHCARE
Chapter 11
Imaging Services
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN 6000)
CR 35-X
CR 25.0
Type 5158 / 100
Type 5156 / 105

(as of SN 6000)
This documentation is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS402.06E.



eq_11_install-planning_e_template_v02
DD+DIS402.06E
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
on the product.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 2
DD+DIS402.06E

This document contains all planning data including the required measures to be carried
out on site prior to the machine delivery.
This chapter is divided into:
construction planning data
technical connection and performance data
safety instructions, listing of certificates
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.0
12-2006

Document
Title
Service Bulletin

DD+DIS407.06E

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 3
DD+DIS402.06E
LIST OF CONTENTS
SCOPE OF DELIVERY ............................................................................................................5
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR INSTALLATION ..............................................................................5
SYSTEM OVERVIEW...............................................................................................................6
MACHINE DIMENSIONS AND TRANSPORT PATH ...............................................................7

4.1
Required free Space .................................................................................................................7
4.1.1
CR 35-X Standalone .................................................................................................................7
4.1.2
CR 35-X with CRUS..................................................................................................................8
4.1.3
Required free Space when Digitizer is set up in Patient Examination Room ...........................9
4.2
Machine Dimensions...............................................................................................................10
4.3
Transport Path ........................................................................................................................11
CLIMATIC AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS..............................................................................12
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ..............................................................................................13
6.1
External Fuse Protection.........................................................................................................13
6.2
Connection Cables..................................................................................................................13
6.3
Power Connection...................................................................................................................14
SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................................15
7.1
Type Overview ........................................................................................................................15
7.2
Electrical Data .........................................................................................................................15
7.3
Packing Dimensions ...............................................................................................................15
7.3.1
Package ..................................................................................................................................15
7.3.2
Weights ...................................................................................................................................15
7.3.3
Transport Conditions...............................................................................................................16
INSTALLATION PLANNING CHECKLIST..............................................................................17

8.1
Checklist..................................................................................................................................18
FORM TO FILL IN THE NETWORK PARAMETERS .............................................................19

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 4
DD+DIS402.06E
NOTE:
This document describes the Installation Planning of the CR 35-X Digitizer,
Type 5158 / 100 and CR 25.0 Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
For the Installation Planning of other ADC devices, refer to the respective Installation
Planning documents (see MedNet).
Scope of Delivery
Pieces
Description
Digitizer
Installation Report
User Manual
Reference Manual
Certificates
Mains Cable (1 x US- connector, 1 x Euro-DIN connector)
UTP network cable (2 x RJ45 connection)
floppy disks (3 x Release floppy, 1 x Hard Disk Formatter floppy,

1 x Backup floppy, 1 x Language floppy, 2 x Portex floppy)
Cu filter
Required Tools for Installation

Pieces
Description
Order No.
Cu filter
CM+9 5155 1015 2
CD-ROM with test images
CM+9 5145 3055 0

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 5
DD+DIS402.06E
System Overview
on
ly
figure 1
The above example shows the Digitizer connected to a WIN NT based ADC Quality
System (ADC QS).

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 6
DD+DIS402.06E
Machine Dimensions and Transport Path
4.1
Required free Space
4.1.1
CR 35-X Standalone
150 (59.05")
5(1.97")
5 (1.97")
45 (17.72")
120 (47.24")
200 (78.74")
75 (29.53")
Digitizer
5155_reg11_002.CDR
figure 2
Free space as shown in the drawing must be reserved for repair and maintenance.
Less space may result in longer repair times!
All dimensions in cm (inch).
Recommended free space for the ventilation, power and
Ethernet connection.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 7
DD+DIS402.06E
4.1.2
CR 35-X with CRUS
figure 3
Free space as shown in the drawing must be reserved for repair and maintenance.
Less space may result in longer repair times!
Recommended free space for the ventilation, power and
Ethernet connection.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 8
DD+DIS402.06E
4.1.3
Required free Space when Digitizer is set up in Patient Examination Room

IMPORTANT:
When setting up the machine, the following must be kept in mind during the room
planning:
The CR 30-X complies with the EN 60601-1 standard for Information Technology. This
means that, although it is absolutely safe, patients may not come in direct contact with
the equipment. Therefore the operator console must be placed outside a radius of 1.5
m around the patient.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 9
DD+DIS402.06E
4.2
Machine Dimensions
figure 4

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 10
DD+DIS402.06E
4.3
Transport Path
It must be possible to transport the digitizer
through all hallways and doors up to the
installation site.
Minimum doorwidth 47 cm (18.50")
The machine dimensions are
134 cm x 45 cm x 75 cm
(H x W x D)
52.76" x 17.72" x 29.53"
(H x W x D)
Packed on a pallet
80 cm x 100 cm (31.5" x 39.37")
Minimum space to remove the digitizer off the

pallet
200 cm x 350 cm (79" x 138")
NOTE:
Once the machine is unpacked, it can be moved to the installation site on four mounted
rollers.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 11
DD+DIS402.06E
Climatic and ambient Conditions

NOTE:
All specifications in this chapter apply on unpacked digitizer.
Temperature and Humidity

Ambient temperature
20C min. / 59F min.

30C max. / 86F max.
20C ideal / 68F ideal
Rate of change of temperature
0.5C per min. / 0.9F per min.
Relative Humidity
15 % min.
75 % max.
40 - 50 % ideal
(at 25C / 77F ambient

temperature)
Light Tightness
Tightness
SALMIN still met at 2500 lux ambient light
NOTE:
The digitizer must not be operated in direct sunlight exposure.
Throughput (scan mode fast)
Throughput
(Image plates per hour)
71 (for size 18 cm x 24 cm)

48 (for size 35 cm x 43 cm)
Cassette Return Time

Time between entry of cassette
and return of erased cassette
(seconds)
< 51 s (for size 18 cm x 24 cm)

< 75 s (for size 35 cm x 43 cm)

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 12
DD+DIS402.06E
Floor Conditions
Horizontal Alignment
Digitizer works without leveling,

horizontal alignment is not required.
Nevertheless, the digitizer should be run
preferably in a horizontal position.
Take care that the digitizer can not tilt at
the installation site.
Magnetic Fields
Maximal permissible magnetic
field in the room
according to EN 61000-4-8: Level 5
Emissions
Noise level
during scanning max. 65 dB (A)

stand-by mode / idle max. 45 dB (A)
Electrical Connections
6.1
External Fuse Protection
6.2
Fuse
Rated voltage (single phase)
maximal line fuse 16 A
240 V, + 10 %
230 V, + 10 %
120 V, + 10 %
(e.g. USA)
100 V, + 10 %
(e.g. Japan)
Connection Cables
Two mains cables are included as standard delivery:
USA/Japan: NEMA-5-15P
Europe: CEE(7)VII 250 V/16 A
One network cable is included as standard delivery
UTP network cable, 5 m long, (2 x RJ45 connection)

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 13
DD+DIS402.06E
6.3
Power Connection
Single phase connection, operable on 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
IMPORTANT:
The digitizer has a voltage selector at its rear side. Voltage adaptation has to be checked
prior to first operation.
If the voltage adaptation is not correct, take a screw driver and turn the switch
(1, figure 5) to correct position.
1 Voltage selector
Voltage can be adapted to 100 /
120 / 230 - 240 V. The default
setting is
230 - 240 V
2 Mains connection
Put in the correct mains cable
(delivered in the enclosure box)
_0
g11
5_re
515
dr
04.c
figure 5
NOTE:
If the CR 35-X shall operate at 240 V, 60 Hz, use a phase to phase centre tap wall
outlet. Otherwise the leakage current will rise over 0.5 mA.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 14
DD+DIS402.06E
Specifications
7.1
Type Overview
7.2
Digitizer /
Type
CR 35-X
5158 / 100
CR 25.0
5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Electrical Data
Rated Voltage [~V]
100 V
15 A
120 V
12 A
230 - 240 V
7A
Frequency [Hz]
50 / 60
Power consumption [W]
Standby approx. 400 W

Maximum approx. 1400 W
Leakage current
7.3
Packing Dimensions
7.3.1
Package
3,5 mA
Packed on a pallet the size is:
7.3.2
Height
160 cm (63")
Width
80 cm (31.5")
Depth
100 cm (39.4")
Weights
Digitizer without package
approx. 215 kg
Digitizer with package
approx. 275 kg
NOTE:
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the digitizer.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 15
DD+DIS402.06E
7.3.3
Transport Conditions
Temperature
-25 C / -13 F for 72 hrs.

+55 C / 131 F for 96 hrs.
Relative Humidity
5 % to 95 %

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 16
DD+DIS402.06E
Installation Planning Checklist

In order to avoid any unnecessary delays during the installation and the machine startup, the following points of the checklist below should be carried out prior to the
installation.
Check and discuss all the required measures for the installation by means of this
checklist. Remarks on the individual items may be made on the back of the list.
We ask you to give this checklist to your local Agfa representative.
Customer:
........................................................................................
.................................
Department:
........................................................................................
.................................
System
components:
........................................................................................
.................................
........................................................................................
.................................
........................................................................................
.................................
........................................................................................
.................................
........................................................................................
.................................
Desired
installation date:
.......................... Signed: .............................................

.......................... Signature
.......
Remarks:

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 17
DD+DIS402.06E
8.1
Checklist
Subject
OK
NOK
Required external
connections
Fixed connection via an all-pole

main switch or connection via plug
and socket approx. 30 cm from the
floor.
Cables
USA/Japan: NEMA-5-15P
Europe: CEE(7)VII 250 V / 16 A
Mains connection
Appointment with the house

electrician or authorized electrician
for the mains connection has been
made?
Network connection Ethernet connection (Twisted pair)

prepared?
Direct Remote
Access
Remote Access must be

guaranteed!
Transport path
Transport to the installation site,

unpacking and taking the machine
off the pallet must be done by the
carrier.
Transport path:
Minimum doorwidth 47 cm
(18.50")
Way:
.......................................................
...................................................
Free space for taking the machine
off the pallet defined?
200 cm x 350 cm (79" x 138")
Place:
.......................................................
..................................................

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 18
DD+DIS402.06E
Form to fill in the Network Parameters

Digitizer
Example
hostname
ADCS1
ip_addr.
192.9.200.199
1st Digitizer
2nd Digitizer
Remarks
1st Server
Station
2nd Server
Station
Remarks
Subnet_mask
default router
AE_title
ADCS1
Station Name *
ADCS1
ADC QS
Example
Server Station
hostname
ADC_QS
ip_addr.
192.9.200.202
subnet_mask
default router
AE_title
ADC_QS
AE_title IDViewer
Station Name *
ADC_QS
ID - Viewer
Example
hostname
ID207
ip_addr.
192.9.200.207
1st ID-Viewer 2nd ID-Viewer
Remarks
Subnet_mask
default router
AE_title
ID207
Station Name *
ID207
ADC QS Server
to connect to
192.9.200.202
or ADC_QS
= main components
12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 19
DD+DIS402.06E
ADC QS Client
Station
Example
hostname
QC206
ip_addr.
192.9.200.206
1st Client
Station
2nd Client
Station
Remarks
1st HCP
2nd HCP
Remarks
Subnet_mask
default router
AE_title ID-Viewer
ADC QS Server to 192.9.200.202
connect to
or ADC_QS
Hard Copy
Printer
Example
hostname
MG1
ip_addr.
192.9.200.201
Subnet_mask
default router
AE_title
ADC_LR1
Station Name *
ADC_LR1
Remarks
RIS-System
hostname
ip_addr.
Subnet_mask
default router
AE_title
Station Name *
*) Friendly name
(Station name) appears in the USER interface
Site
filled in by
Date

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 20
DD+DIS402.06E
Intentionally left blank!

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 11 / 21

Published by
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
HEALTHCARE
Chapter 12
Glossary
Imaging Services
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN 6000)

This document contains explanations of product specific terms and abbreviations used
in the service documentation.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.0
12-2006

Document
Title
Service Bulletin

DD+DIS407.06E



eq_12_glossary_e_template_v02
DD+DIS219.06E
Glossary
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
on the product.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 12 / 2
DD+DIS219.06E
Glossary
Glossary
Term
Shord Description
Gy
Micro Gray x-ray dose

1Gy= 0.87 x 10 2 J/kg
A / D Converter
Analog Digital Converter; the part that translates an analog

signal into a digital signal, which can be handled by
computers.
ADC
Agfa Diagnostic Center
AE title
Application Entity
AOS
Adonis Operating System

Operating system for Agfa CPU's (Gemini, Goliath, David)
APIP
Agfa Picture Archiving Protocol
AUI
Attachment Unit Interface (External Box to connect to a

network)
AS
Archive Station
BOL
Begin Of Line; Sensor for exact positioning the scan surface

along the x-axis. A PIN diode is hit by the laser beam before it
reaches the image plate. The Pin diode creates a digital
signal, called begin of line signal. The distance (time)
between this signal and the IP must be adjusted.
BOS
Begin Of Scan;
Browser
Software that provides an interface to the World Wide Web
BSP
Boot Support Package: boot program for Agfa CPU's
Calibration
Procedure on ADC to make a homogeneous exposure look

like one on film. Algorithm to counterbalance irregularities in
the scanner of ADC.
CAS
Clinical Application Specialist
CCM
Configuration and Customization Manager (Tool to edit the

configuration file adc.cpf)
Collimation
Determination of the region in the image where the interesting

data is at. On that region the image processing is applied..
Controller
Is connected ahead the laser recorder. The controller is

responsible for the image reception from the diagnostic
equipment, the image processing, layout of the images on the
film, and image transmission to the machine.
cPCI
compact Peripheral Component Interconnect bus system

used in CR85-X

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 12 / 3
DD+DIS219.06E
Glossary
CPF file
Customization Parameter File; file that contains settings for

all parameters that can be modified to configure an ADC
System according to local needs.
CPU
Central Processing Unit.
CR
Computed Radiography
CR Quality System
Agfas CR Processing Station software
CU-Filter
Copper Filter, used for control of image quality
DAC
Digital Analog Converter
Decomposition
The original image is being split up in a set of bandpassfiltered images
Diagnostic Logger
Tool on ADC to keep a lot of reduced images with the

corresponding image data on the HD.
DICOM
Digital Imaging and COmmunications in Medicine;
Dose, x-ray dose
= kV x mA x sec see also Gy = Micro Gray
Dosimeter
Device to measure x-ray dose
DR
Direct Radiography
DRA
Direct Remote Access (external product name: AGFATEC

LINK)
Dynamic Range
Exposure range in which ADC can get usable image data.
Ethernet
A network standard for the hardware and data link levels.
FSE
Field Service Engineer
FTP
File Transfer Protocol.

The Internet service that transfers files from one computer to
another. (Program used for transmission of files in the
Internet)
Grid
to reduce scattered radiation

to increase sharpness
GSC
Global Support Center
GUI
Graphical User Interface
HT power supply
High Tension power supply
HCP
Hard Copy Printer
HDD
Hard Disk Drive
Heel Effect
inhomogeneous exposure
HiRes
High Resolution: pixel size = 100 micrometer

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 12 / 4
DD+DIS219.06E
Glossary
HIS
Hospital Information System
Histogram
graphical display of the distribution of gray levels
HUB (Ethernet)
box to interconnect network hosts with Twisted Pair cable.

Also called concentrator.
HUB (in AGFA

devices)
Switchbox (Hard- or Software) which switches or multiplexes

different channels, e.g. AMDI and Service Channel.
I/O BUS
Input / Output BUS.

System consisting of a defined cable, cable connection, and
signal for the parallel transmission of control data. The
machine uses a bus system of 8 V level and 26 parallel lines.
ID Station
IDENTIFICATION Station
IMOS
IMAGE MONITOR SOFTWARE - succession for SMA
Internet
The global computer network, composed of thousands of

Wide Area Networks (WANs) and Local Area Networks
(LANs), that uses TCP/IP to provide world-wide
communication to homes, schools, businesses, and
governments. The World Wide Web runs on the Internet.
IP
for ADC: Image Plate (phosphor plate)
IP
Image Processing
IP
(Internet Protocol) Internet software that divides data into

packets for transmission over the Internet. Computers must
run IP to communicate across the Internet. See also TCP.
IP-Address
(Internet Protocol Address) The standard method which

identifies an internet connected computer.
Java
A general-purpose programming language created by Sun

Microsystems. Java can be used to create Java applets. A
Java program is downloaded from the Web server and
interpreted by a program running on the machine containing
the Web browser.
Java applet
A short program written in Java that is attached to a World

Wide Web page and executed by the browser machine.
JavaScript
A cross-platform, World Wide Web scripting language

developed by Netscape Communications. JavaScript code is
inserted directly into the HTML page.
LAN
Local Area Network. Network technology, designed to

connect computers over short distances. It is possible to
connect the LAN with the Internet or to make a configuration
into an intranet.
Laser
Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation:
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 12 / 5
DD+DIS219.06E
Glossary
LED
Light Emitting Diode; Semi conductor emitting light
Leeds Phantom
Image Plate to check the technical image quality of the ADC.

The Leeds Phantom was developed for Agfa by the
University of Leeds.
Low Pass Filtering
Butterworth filter in SAB board to eliminate frequencies >

250 kHz.
LUT
Look Up Table
MD Plate
AGFA MD Medium Definition Image Plate
MFA
Machine Factor A
Machine specific value indicating the photo multiplier
sensitivity
MFA is the log of the PM high voltage which results in a scan
average level SAL1800 at a given dose of 1mR (~20 Gy)
and a speed class 200
MFB
Machine Factor B
MIMOSA
Medical IMage Operating System Agfa; Agfa's workstation

operating software
MODEM
MODULATOR DEMODULATOR device to connect via

telephone line to another computer.
Monitor level
lowest software level on CPU (like BIOS on DOS systems)

stored on EEPROM
milli Rntgen, measure for x-ray dose
mR
1 mR corres. 8.7 Gy
MS-Board
Multy Supply Board; is part of the Power Unit, detects supply

voltage, controls the mechanical periphery of the digitizer and
protects the stepper motor boards.
MUSICA
MUltiple Scale Image Contrast Amplification;

Agfa's image processing software
Network location
In a URL, the unique name that identifies an Internet server.

A network location has two or more parts, separated by
periods, as in my.network.location. Also called host name and
Internet address.
Node
Nodes in the I/O bus system = printed circuit board in the I/O
bus.
Nullmodem
RS 232 (RS242) cable with crossed Transmit / Receive Line
NVE
Name value file editor; editor system for parameter

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 12 / 6
DD+DIS219.06E
Glossary
NX
NX is Agfas new standalone CR Processing Station for:

image acquisition, identification, image processing and image
transmission of digitized images received from a digitizer
It prepares these images for diagnostic use and sends them
to a printer, an archive or a diagnostic station
OBERON board
CPU in Agfa digitizers, successor of ARIEL board
OLUT
Output Look-Up Table
OS
Operating System
Password
A text string that allows a user access to an Internet service,

if the service requires it.
Photomultiplier Tube Photo Multiplier Tube: opto electronical sensitive device to

convert light (laser emission) in current and with a I / V
(PMT)
Converter into voltage
Pixel
Scanning point on the film or plate. A maximum of 2048 per

line may be read by the Photomultiplier.
Preview Monitor
displays the image and the name of the patient.

This monitor enables to roughly check whether the exposure
was successful.
PRID
PREVIEW and ID Station, installed on one PC, used on older

CR systems, current CR QS systems use the ID viewer
software
PS
Processing Station
Pyramidal Image
Image file format of images on VIPS
Quantisation
compression of image files
RAM
Random Access Memory

volatile main memory of computers
RAM DISK
virtual harddisk simulated in the CPU main memory

Gemini RAM-Disk contains all the machine dependent
parameters, e.g. stepper motor steps, info counters
REM Tool
Debugging tool for AOS logfiles
Reset
Machine reset into a defined machine status. Various

checking routines are carried out during a reset.
RIS
Radiology Information System
ROI
Region Of Interest
ROM
Read Only Memory
RS232 interface
Serial interface which converts computer internal parallel

information into serial bits, and vice versa.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 12 / 7
DD+DIS219.06E
Glossary
Scan Average Level
SAL
Digitized photo multiplier signal of an average of several

hundred scanned lines
Range SAL0 SAL4095 (12bit)
SCP
SOFTCOPY Tool
SCSI
Small Computer Systems Interface interface to connect

peripherals to computers
(e.g. HDD, CD-ROM)
Server
A computer that shares its resources, such as printers and

files, with other computers on the network.
Service interface
RS232 standard interface for the connection of the Service

PC.
Shading Calibration
position dependent sensitivity calibration; calibration of each

pixel in a line
Shell
User Interface of the VME AOS
Slowscan direction
Transport Direction of Image Plate through the scan unit. The

stepper motor speed is calculated such that the distance
between two scan lines equals the distance between two
pixels in a line.
Speed Class (SC)
Dose=1mR + SC100 => D=1 above fog + base

A film-screen-system with speed class 100 which is exposed
with a dose of 1mR results in a density 1 above fog+base.
Square Root
Compression
Signal
N.
Method to quantisize Signal in 12 similar block sizes
Standard Res
Standard Resolution: pixel size = 150 micrometer
Subnet number
A part of the internet address which designates a subnet
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol. Internet networking software

that controls the transmission of packets of data over the
Internet. Among its tasks, TCP checks for lost packets, puts
the data from multiple packets into the correct order, and
requests that missing or damaged packets be resent.
Computers must run TCP to communicate with World Wide
Web servers.
TCP/IP
Transport Control Protocol / Internet Protocol. Common

Protocol for Networks. Used in the Internet
Text Field
Part of the film displaying patient, hospital and image

processing information

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 12 / 8
DD+DIS219.06E
Glossary
UI
User Interface; part of a computer program that handles

interaction with the user.
UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply
URL
Uniform Resource Locator; address code for multimedia

documents.
UTP - cable
Unshielded Twisted Pair (Network transfer medium) cable.

Cable to connect to a computer network.
VIPS
Viewing and Image Processing Station

Unix based Processing Station
W/L
Window and Leveling of digital images.
X-Rite densitometer
Automatic density measuring instrument manufactured by XRite.

12-2006
CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN 6000)
Chapter 12 / 9
Document Number:
DD+DIS219.06E
CR 35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 105

(as of SN > 6000)
2nd edition
Document Number:
DD+DIS219.06E
CR 35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 105

(as of SN > 6000)
2nd edition
Document Number:
DD+DIS219.06E
CR 35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 105

(as of SN > 6000)
2nd edition
Document Number:
DD+DIS219.06E
CR 35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 105

(as of SN > 6000)
2nd edition

Agfa CR35-CR25 Serice Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Agfa CR35-CR25 Serice Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

ReadMeFirst

Service Manual for Download

Purpose of this Document

add the order list for documentation.

Added how to integrate the order list for documentation in a

Document Node ID: 16099429

Copyright 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V.

Integrating the Order List for Documentation

Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Printing single Pages or Chapters

Click the bookmark of the desired chapter.

Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar

Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.

Select the page range.

Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".

Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Printing the complete Service Manual

Select "shrink to printable area" and "Auto-rotate and Center"

Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual

Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Exporting your Comments

Figure 5: Drop down menu Comment & Markup

Select Options - Export Selected Comments.

Save the file with any name.

Select Options - Import Comments.

Browse for the comments file and press select.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Document No: DD+DIS219.06E

Type 5158 / 100

Type 5156 / 105

01-2007 printed in Germany

Document Node ID: 12434149

Copyright 2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare

About this Manual

Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

About this Manual

Purpose of this document

compared to previous Edition 1:

Only layout changes as CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

About this Manual

Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures

Repair and Service

Machine specific Safety and Repair Information

Machine specific Tools, Software Tools and Auxiliary Equipment

Electrical and Mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs

Adjustments and Calibrations

Software Menus and Setting

Software Releases, Patches

FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions

Reference and Circuit Diagrams

Spare Parts List

Manufacturing Standard Modifications

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100

About this Manual

This documentation uses:

Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the